MINI Owners Manual F55 F56 SOP 3-2022

LINK:
CONTENT & A-Z
OWNER'S MANUAL.
MINI HARDTOP 2 DOOR / 4 DOOR.
Online Edition for Part no. 01405A2C1C9 - II/21
WELCOME TO MINI.
OWNER'S MANUAL.
Thank you for choosing a MINI.
The more familiar you are with your vehicle, the better control you will have
on the road. We therefore strongly suggest:
Read this Owner's Manual before starting off in your new MINI. Also use the
Integrated Owner's Manual in your vehicle. It contains important information
on vehicle operation that will help you make full use of the technical features
available in your MINI. The manual also contains information designed to
enhance operating reliability and road safety, and to contribute to
maintaining the value of your MINI.
Any updates made after the editorial deadline can be found in the appendix of
the printed Owner's Manual for the vehicle.
Get started now. We wish you driving fun and inspiration with your MINI.
3
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
NOTES
Information.............................................................................................................................. 6
QUICK REFERENCE
Entering.................................................................................................................................. 16
Set-up and use.......................................................................................................................20
On the road............................................................................................................................ 24
AT A GLANCE
Cockpit.................................................................................................................................... 32
Central Information Display (CID)..................................................................................36
Voice activation system.................................................................................................... 44
General settings................................................................................................................... 48
Owner's Manual media.......................................................................................................60
CONTROLS
Opening and closing........................................................................................................... 62
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel.................................................................................. 82
Transporting children safely............................................................................................ 92
Driving.................................................................................................................................... 98
Displays................................................................................................................................ 123
Lights.................................................................................................................................... 145
Safety.....................................................................................................................................151
Driving stability control systems.................................................................................175
Driving comfort................................................................................................................. 179
Climate control...................................................................................................................200
4
Interior equipment............................................................................................................209
Storage compartments.....................................................................................................220
Cargo area............................................................................................................................224
DRIVING TIPS
Things to remember when driving.............................................................................. 230
Reducing fuel consumption........................................................................................... 235
MOBILITY
Refueling..............................................................................................................................242
Fuel........................................................................................................................................ 244
Wheels and tires................................................................................................................246
Engine compartment........................................................................................................268
Engine oil.............................................................................................................................271
Coolant..................................................................................................................................275
Maintenance....................................................................................................................... 277
Replacing components.................................................................................................... 279
Breakdown assistance..................................................................................................... 285
Care........................................................................................................................................293
REFERENCE
Technical data.................................................................................................................... 298
Appendix..............................................................................................................................302
Everything from A to Z....................................................................................................304
© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Aktiengesellschaft
Munich, Germany
Reprinting, including excerpts, only with the written consent of BMW AG, Munich.
US English ID5 II/21, 03 21 490
Printed on environmentally friendly paper, bleached without chlorine, suitable for recycling.
5
NOTES Information
Information
Using this Owner's Manual Internet
Vehicle information and general informa-
Orientation tion on MINI, e.g., on technology, are availa-
ble on the Internet: www.miniusa.com.
The fastest way to find information on a
particular topic is by using the index.
Integrated Owner's Manual in the
An initial overview of the vehicle is pro- vehicle
vided in the first chapter.
The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
Updates made after the editorial describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
deadline can be displayed on the Control Display. Ad-
Due to updates after the editorial deadline, ditional information, refer to page 60.
differences may exist between the printed
Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's MINI Motorer’s Guide app
Manual in the vehicle.
The app specifically describes features and
Notes on updates can be found in the ap- functions found in the vehicle. The app can
pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for be displayed on smartphones and tablets.
the vehicle.
MINI Motorer’s Guide Web
Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Driver’s Guide Web shows the most suita-
Entertainment, Communication ble information for the selected vehicle. If
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- possible, only equipment and functions that
tainment, and Communication can be ob- are actually installed in the vehicle will be
tained as a printed book from the service explained. Driver’s Guide Web can be dis-
center. played in any current browser.
The topics are also discussed in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle.
Symbols and displays
Additional sources of informa- Symbols in the Owner's Manual
tion
Icon Meaning
Service center Precautions that must be followed
A service center will be glad to answer in order to avoid the possibility of
questions at any time. injury to yourself and to others as
well as serious damage to the
vehicle.
Measures that can be taken to help
protect the environment.
6
Information NOTES
Icon Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions

and systems.
"..." Control Display texts used to select
When using these functions and systems,
individual functions.
the applicable laws and regulations must be
›...‹ Verbal instructions to use with the observed.
voice activation system. For any options and equipment not descri-
››...‹‹ Responses generated by the voice bed in this Owner's Manual, refer to the
activation system. Supplementary Owner's Manuals.
Your dealer’s service center is happy to an-
Action steps swer any questions that you may have
about the features and options applicable to
Action steps to be carried out are presented your vehicle.
as a numbered list. The steps must be car-
ried out in the defined order.
1. First action step. Status of the Owner's Manual
2. Second action step.
Basic information
Enumerations The manufacturer of your vehicle pursues a
Enumerations without mandatory order or policy of constant development that is con-
alternative possibilities are presented as a ceived to ensure that our vehicles continue
list with bullet points. to embody the highest quality and safety
standards. In rare cases, therefore, the fea-
– First possibility.
tures described in this Owner's Manual may
– Second possibility. differ from those in your vehicle.
Icons on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

This symbol on a vehicle component deadline
indicates that further information on the Due to updates after the editorial deadline,
component is available in the Owner's differences may exist between the printed
Manual. Owner's Manual and the Integrated Owner's
Manual in the vehicle.
Notes on updates can be found in the ap-
Vehicle features and options pendix of the printed Owner's Manual for
the vehicle.
This Owner's Manual describes all models
and all standard, country-specific and op-
tional equipment that is offered in the For Your Own Safety
model series. Therefore, this Owner's
Manual also describes and illustrates fea-
tures and functions that are not available in Manufacturer
a vehicle, for example because of the se- The manufacturer of this MINI is Bayeri-
lected optional features or the country-spe- sche Motoren Werke Aktiengesellschaft,
cific version. BMW AG.
7
NOTES Information
Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-

Heed the following when using the vehicle: stance maintenance and repair, there is a
risk of subsequent damage and related
– Owner's Manual. safety risks.
– Information on the vehicle. Do not re- Improperly performed work on the vehicle
move stickers. paint can lead to a failure or malfunction of
– Technical vehicle data. components, e.g., the radar sensors, and
– The traffic, speed, and safety laws where thereby result in a safety risk.
the vehicle is driven.
– Vehicle documents and statutory docu- Parts and accessories
ments. The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends the use of parts and accessory prod-
Warranty ucts approved by the manufacturer of the
MINI.
Your vehicle is technically configured for
the operating conditions and registration Approved parts and accessories, and advice
requirements applying in the country of on their use and installation are available
first delivery, also known as homologation. from a MINI dealer's service center.
If your vehicle is to be operated in a differ- MINI parts and accessories were tested by
ent country it might be necessary to adapt the manufacturer of the MINI for their
your vehicle to potentially differing operat- safety and suitability in MINI vehicles.
ing conditions and registration require- The manufacturer of your vehicle warrants
ments. If your vehicle does not comply with genuine MINI parts and accessories.
the homologation requirements in a certain
The manufacturer of your vehicle does not
country you may not be able to lodge war-
evaluate whether each individual product
ranty claims for your vehicle there. Further
from another manufacturer can be used
information on warranty is available from a
with MINI vehicles without presenting a
service center.
safety hazard, even if a country-specific of-
ficial approval was issued. The manufac-
Maintenance and repairs turer of your vehicle does not evaluate
Advanced technology, for instance the use whether these products are suitable for
of modern materials and high-performance MINI vehicles under all usage conditions.
electronics, requires suitable maintenance
and repair work. California Proposition 65 Warning
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom- For vehicles sold in California, the law re-
mends that you entrust corresponding pro- quires vehicle manufacturers to provide the
cedures to a MINI dealer’s service center. If following warning:
you choose to use another service facility,
the manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends use of a facility that performs work, Warning
e.g., maintenance and repair, according to Engine exhaust and a wide variety of Au-
MINI specifications with properly trained tomobile components and parts, including
personnel, referred to in the Owner's components found in the interior furnish-
Manual as "another qualified service center ings in a vehicle, contain or emit chemi-
or repair shop". cals known to the State of California to
8
Information NOTES
cause cancer and birth defects and repro- – Federal Emissions System Defect War-
ductive harm. In addition, certain fluids ranty.
contained in vehicles and certain products – Federal Emissions Performance War-
of component wear contain or emit chemi- ranty.
cals known to the State of California to
cause cancer and birth defects or other re- – California Emission Control System Lim-
productive harm. Battery posts, terminals ited Warranty.
and related accessories contain lead and Detailed information about these warranties
lead compounds. Batteries also contain is listed in the Service and Warranty Infor-
other chemicals known to the State of Cali- mation Booklet for US models or in the War-
fornia to cause cancer. Wash your hands ranty and Service Guide Booklet for Cana-
after handling. Used engine oil contains dian models.
chemicals that have caused cancer in labo- Your vehicle has been specifically adapted
ratory animals. Always protect your skin and designed to meet the particular operat-
by washing thoroughly with soap and wa- ing conditions and homologation require-
ter. For more information go to ments in your country and continental re-
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve- gion in order to deliver the full driving
hicle. pleasure while the vehicle is operated under
those conditions. If you wish to operate
your vehicle in another country or region,
Warning you may be required to adapt your vehicle
to meet different prevailing operating con-
Operating, servicing and maintaining a
ditions and homologation requirements.
passenger vehicle or off-highway motor
You should also be aware of any applicable
vehicle can expose you to chemicals in-
warranty limitations or exclusions for such
cluding engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,
country or region. In such case, please con-
phthalates, and lead, which are known to
tact Customer Relations for further informa-
the State of California to cause cancer and
tion.
birth defects or other reproductive harm.
To minimize exposure, avoid breathing ex-
haust, do not idle the engine except as Maintenance
necessary, service your vehicle in a well- Maintain the vehicle regularly to sustain
ventilated area and wear gloves or wash the road safety, operational reliability and
your hands frequently when servicing the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
your vehicle. For more information go to Specifications for maintenance measures:
www.P65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-ve-
– MINI Maintenance system.
hicle.
– Service and Warranty Information Book-
let for US models.
Service and warranty – Warranty and Service Guide Booklet for
We recommend that you read this publica- Canadian models.
tion thoroughly. Your vehicle is covered by If the vehicle is not maintained or is im-
the following warranties: properly maintained, this could result in se-
– New Vehicle Limited Warranty. rious damage to the vehicle. Such damage is
not covered by the MINI New Vehicle Lim-
– Rust Perforation Limited Warranty.
ited Warranty.
9
NOTES Information
Refer to section on engine oil change re- – Ambient conditions, e.g., temperature,
garding recommended service intervals for rain sensor signals.
oil changes. The processed data is only processed in the
vehicle itself and generally volatile. The
data is not stored beyond the operating pe-
Data memory riod.
Electronic components, e.g. control units
General information and ignition keys, contain components for
Electronic control devices are installed in storing technical information. Information
the vehicle. Electronic control units process about the vehicle condition, component us-
data they receive from vehicle sensors, self- age, maintenance recommendations, events
generate or exchange with each other. Some or faults can be stored temporarily or per-
control units are necessary for the vehicle manently.
to function safely or provide assistance dur- This information generally records the state
ing driving, for instance driver assistance of a component, a module, a system, or the
systems. Furthermore, control units facili- environment, for instance:
tate comfort or infotainment functions. – Operating states of system components,
Information about stored or exchanged data for instance, fill levels, tire inflation
can be requested from the manufacturer of pressure, battery status.
the vehicle, in a separate booklet, for exam- – Malfunctions and faults in important
ple. system components, for instance lights
and brakes.
Personal reference – Responses by the vehicle to special sit-
Each vehicle is marked with a unique vehi- uations such as airbag deployment or
cle identification number. Depending on the engagement of the driving stability con-
country, the vehicle owner can be identified trol systems.
with the vehicle identification number, li- – Information on vehicle-damaging
cense plate and corresponding authorities. events.
In addition, there are other options to track
The data is required to perform the control
data collected in the vehicle to the driver or
unit functions. Furthermore, it also serves
vehicle owner, for instance via utilized
to recognize and correct malfunctions, and
services.
helps the vehicle manufacturer to optimize
vehicle functions.
Operating data in the vehicle
The majority of this data is stored tempora-
Control units process data to operate the ve- rily and is only processed within the vehicle
hicle. itself. In some circumstances the vehicle
For example, this includes: may store some data for an additional but
– Status messages for the vehicle and its limited period of time.
individual components, e.g., wheel rota- When servicing, for instance during repairs,
tional speed, wheel speed, deceleration, service processes, warranty cases, and qual-
lateral acceleration, engaged safety belt ity assurance measures, this technical infor-
indicator. mation can be read out from the vehicle to-
10
Information NOTES
gether with the vehicle identification – Data on the use of Internet services.
number. This data can be stored locally in the vehicle
A dealer’s service center or another quali- or is found on a device that has been con-
fied service center or repair shop can read nected to the vehicle, e.g., a smartphone,
out the information. The socket for OBD On- USB stick or MP3 player. If this data is
board Diagnosis required by law in the ve- stored in the vehicle, it can be deleted at
hicle is used to read out the data. any time.
The data is collected, processed, and used This data is only transmitted to third parties
by the relevant organizations in the service upon personal request as part of the use of
network. The data documents technical con- online services. The transmission depends
ditions of the vehicle, which can be used to on the selected settings for the use of the
determine vehicle maintenance status, and services.
facilitate quality improvement.
Fault and event memories in the vehicle can Incorporation of mobile devices
be reset when a dealer’s service center or Depending on the vehicle equipment, mo-
another qualified service center or repair bile devices connected to the vehicle, for in-
shop performs repair or servicing work. stance smartphones, can be controlled via
the vehicle control elements.
Data entry and data transfer into The sound and picture from the mobile de-
the vehicle vice can be played back and displayed
through the multimedia system. Certain in-
General information formation is transferred to the mobile de-
Depending on the vehicle equipment, com- vice at the same time. Depending on the
fort and individual settings can be stored in type of incorporation, this includes, for in-
the vehicle and modified or reset at any stance position data and other general vehi-
time. cle information. This optimizes the way in
which selected apps, for instance navigation
For example, this includes: or music playback, work.
– Settings for the seat and steering wheel There is no further interaction between the
positions. mobile device and the vehicle, such as ac-
– Chassis and climate control settings. tive access to vehicle data.
If necessary, data can be transferred to the How the data will be processed further is
entertainment and communication system determined by the provider of the particular
of the vehicle, for instance via smartphone. app being used. The extent of the possible
This includes the following depending on settings depends on the respective app and
the respective equipment: the operating system of the mobile device.
– Multimedia data such as music, films or
photos for playback in an integrated Services
multimedia system.
– Address book data for use in conjunc-
General information
tion with an integrated hands-free sys- If the vehicle has a wireless network con-
tem or an integrated navigation system. nection, this enables data to be exchanged
between the vehicle and other systems. The
– Entered navigation destinations.
wireless network connection is realized via
11
NOTES Information
an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit Event Data Recorder EDR

or via personal mobile devices brought into
the vehicle, for instance smartphones. This
wireless network connection enables 'online This vehicle is equipped with an event data
functions' to be used. These include online recorder EDR. The main purpose of an EDR
services and apps supplied by the vehicle is to record, in certain crash or near crash-
manufacturer or by other providers. like situations, such as an air bag deploy-
ment or hitting a road obstacle, data that
Services from the vehicle will assist in understanding how a vehicle’s
systems performed. The EDR is designed to
manufacturer record data related to vehicle dynamics and
Where online services from the vehicle safety systems for a short period of time,
manufacturer are concerned, the corre- typically 30 seconds or less.
sponding functions are described in the ap- The EDR in this vehicle is designed to re-
propriate place, for instance the Owner's cord such data as:
Manual or manufacturer's website. The rele-
vant legal information pertaining to data – How various systems in your vehicle
protection may also be found on the manu- were operating.
facturer’s website. Personal data may be – Whether or not the driver and passen-
used to perform online services. Data is ex- ger safety belts were fastened.
changed over a secure connection, for in- – How far, if at all, the driver was depress-
stance with the IT systems of the vehicle ing the accelerator and/or brake pedal.
manufacturer intended for this purpose.
– How fast the vehicle was traveling.
Any collection, processing, and use of per-
This data can help provide a better under-
sonal data above and beyond that needed to
standing of the circumstances in which
provide the services must always be based
crashes and injuries occur.
on a legal permission, contractual arrange-
ment or consent. It is also possible to acti- EDR data is recorded by your vehicle only if
vate or deactivate the data connection as a a nontrivial crash situation occurs; no data
whole. That is, with the exception of func- is recorded by the EDR under normal driv-
tions and services required by law such as ing conditions and no personal data, for in-
Assist systems. stance name, gender, age, and crash loca-
tion, are recorded.
Services from other providers However, other parties, such as law enforce-
When using online services from other pro- ment, could combine the EDR data with the
viders, these services are the responsibility type of personally identifying data routinely
of the relevant provider and subject to their acquired during a crash investigation.
data privacy conditions and terms of use. To read data recorded by an EDR, special
The vehicle manufacturer has no influence equipment is required, and access to the ve-
on the content exchanged during this proc- hicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to
ess. Information on the way in which per- the vehicle manufacturer, other parties,
sonal data is collected and used in relation such as law enforcement, that have the spe-
to services from third parties, the scope of cial equipment, can read the information if
such data, and its purpose, can be obtained they have access to the vehicle or the EDR.
from the relevant service provider.
12
Information NOTES
Vehicle identification number

General information
Depending on the national-market version,
the vehicle identification number is located
in different positions in the vehicle. This
chapter describes all possible positions for
the series.
The vehicle identification number can be
Engine compartment found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
side of the vehicle.
Left nameplate
For 3-door models:
The engraved vehicle identification number

can be found in the engine compartment, on
the right-hand side of the vehicle.
Right nameplate The vehicle identification number can be

For 3-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand
For 5-door models:

found on the nameplate, on the right-hand
For 5-door models: found on the nameplate, on the left-hand
13
NOTES Information
Windshield other information about motor vehicle

safety from http://www.safercar.gov
For Canadian customers

Canadian customers who wish to report a
safety-related defect to Transport Canada,
Defect Investigations and Recalls, may call
the toll-free hotline 1-800-333-0510. You
can also obtain other information about mo-
tor vehicle safety from http://www.tc.gc.ca/
roadsafety.
The vehicle identification number can also
be found behind the windshield.
Reporting safety defects

For US customers
The following only applies to vehicles
owned and operated in the US.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause in-
jury or death, you should immediately in-
form the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration NHTSA, in addition to noti-
fying MINI of North America, LLC, P.O. Box
1227, Westwood, New Jersey 07675-1227,
Telephone 1-800-831-1117.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it
may open an investigation, and if it finds
that a safety defect exists in a group of ve-
hicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved
in individual problems between you, your
dealer, or MINI of North America, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to http://
www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administra-
tor, NHTSA, 1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE.,
Washington, DC 20590. You can also obtain
14
Information NOTES
15
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Entering
Opening and closing Buttons for the central locking
system
Buttons on the vehicle key
Overview
1 Unlocking
Buttons for the central locking system.
2 Locking
3 Unlocking the tailgate
Locking
4 Panic mode
Pressing the button locks the vehi-
cle if the front doors are closed.
Unlocking the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key. Unlocking
Pressing the button unlocks the ve-
Depending on the settings, either only the hicle.
driver's door or all vehicle access points are
unlocked.
Panic mode
If only the driver's door is unlocked, press
the button on the vehicle key again to un- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
lock the other vehicle access points. yourself in a dangerous situation.
Press the button on the vehicle key
Press and hold the button on the ve-
and hold for at least 3 seconds.
hicle key after unlocking.
To switch off the alarm: press any button.
The windows and the glass sunroof are
opened, as long as the button on the vehicle Comfort Access
key is pressed.
Concept
Locking the vehicle The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
Press the button on the vehicle key. ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
All vehicle access points are locked. your pants pocket, is sufficient.
16
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi- – Unlock the vehicle and then press the
cle key when it is in close proximity or in button on the outside of the tailgate.
the car's interior. – Press and hold the button on the
vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Unlocking the vehicle
Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked.
Closing
Closing the tailgate manually.
Displays and control elements
On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

handle, press the button. wheel
Locking the vehicle
1 Low beams, fog lights

2 High beams, headlight flasher, turn sig-
On the driver's or front passenger's door nal
handle, press the button. 3 Instrument cluster
4 Wiper system
Tailgate
Indicator/warning lights
Unlocking The indicator/warning lights can light up in
a variety of combinations and colors.
Several of the lights are checked for proper
functioning and light up temporarily when
the engine is started or the ignition is
switched on.
Driver's door
For 3-door models:
17
QUICK REFERENCE Entering
Central Information Display (CID)

Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Buttons on the Controller

1 Power windows
2 Exterior mirrors Button Function
For 5-door models: Press once: calls up the main

menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu.
Goes to the Communication
menu.
Goes to the Media/Radio menu.
Goes to destination input menu

for navigation.
1 Safety switch
2 Power windows Goes to navigation map.
3 Exterior mirrors
Press once: opens the previous
display.
All around the selector lever Press and hold: open the menus
used last.
Goes to the Options menu.
Voice control
Activating the voice control system
Press the button on the steering
1 Selector lever wheel.
2 Controller with buttons Wait for the signal.
3 Parking brake, manual or electric Say the command.
This icon indicates that the voice con-
trol system is active.
18
Entering QUICK REFERENCE
If no other commands are available, operate

the function via the Central Information
Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control system

wheel or ›Cancel‹.
19
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Set-up and use

Seats, mirrors and steering Adjusting the exterior mirrors
wheel
Manually adjustable seats
1 Adjusting
2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
1 Forward/backward 3 Folding in and out
2 Thigh support
3 Height Adjusting the steering wheel
4 Backrest tilt In four directions
Adjusting the head restraint

Height
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat
position.
– To raise: push the head restraint up.
3. Fold the lever back up.
– To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
push the head restraint down.
20
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
Entering the rear Button Function

1. Pull lever up to the stop. Programmable memory buttons.
Changing the waveband/satellite

radio.
Navigation destination input

Entering a destination via address
State/province
2. Fold backrest forward.
1. "Navigation"
3. Push the seat forward.
2. "Enter address"
Original position 3. "State/Province?"
1. Push the seat back into the original po- 4. Select the country from the list.
sition.
Entering the address
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
The address can be entered in any order.
Example: entering the address via the town/
Infotainment city
1. "City/Postal code?"
Radio 2. Enter the town/city.
The list is narrowed down further with
Buttons and functions each entry.
Depending on the country and equipment
3. Select the icon.
version, the radio has the following buttons.
4. Select a town/city from the list.
Button Function
5. If necessary, enter the street.
Press: switches sound output on/
6. Select the street as you would the town/
off.
city.
Turn: adjusts the volume.
7. If necessary, enter a house number.
Change the entertainment 8. Select the icon.
source.
9. Select a house number or range of house
Press once: changes the station/ numbers from the list.
track.
Press and hold: fast forward/ Starting destination guidance
rewind the track. "Start guidance"
Destination guidance is started to the town/
city center if no street is entered.
21
QUICK REFERENCE Set-up and use
Pairing the mobile phone Using the telephone

After the mobile phone is paired once with
the vehicle, the mobile phone can be oper- Accepting a call
ated using the Central Information Display Incoming call can be accepted via the Cen-
(CID), the steering wheel buttons and spo- tral Information Display (CID) or the button
ken instructions. on the steering wheel.
1. "My MINI"
Via the Central Information Display (CID)
2. "System settings" "Accept"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Connect new device" Via the button on the steering wheel
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- Press the button.
played on the Control Display.
Via the instrument cluster
5. Select the functions for which the mo-
bile phone is to be used. Use the OK button on the steering wheel to
select: "Accept"
6. To perform additional steps on the mo-
bile phone, refer to the operating in- Dialing a number
structions for the mobile phone: for in-
stance search for or connect the 1. "Communication"
Bluetooth device or a new device. 2. "Dial number"
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- 3. Select the numbers individually.
pears on the mobile phone display. Se-
4. Select the icon.
lect the Bluetooth name of the vehicle.
Establish the connection via the additional
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con-
telephone:
trol number is displayed or the control
number must be entered.
1. Press the button.
– Compare the control number dis-
played on the Control Display with 2. "Call via"
the control number on the display of
the device. Confirm the control num- Apple CarPlay preparation
ber on the device and on the Control
Display. Concept
– Enter and confirm the same control CarPlay allows certain functions of a com-
number on the device and via the patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
Central Information Display (CID). voice operation and the Central Information
The device is connected and displayed Display (CID).
in the device list.
The mobile phone is connected and will ap- Functional requirements
pear at the top of the list of mobile phones. – Compatible iPhone: iPhone 5 or later
with iOS 7.1 or later.
– Corresponding mobile contract.
22
Set-up and use QUICK REFERENCE
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

tion are activated on the iPhone.
– If necessary, the setting for mobile data
must be activated on the iPhone.
– WLAN and Bluetooth are enabled in the
vehicle.
Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings"
5. Select the following settings:
– "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Pair iPhone via Bluetooth with the vehicle.
Select CarPlay as the function:
"Apple CarPlay"
The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list.
23
QUICK REFERENCE On the road
On the road
Driving 3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: switching off

Starting and stopping the engine
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button.
Ignition on/off
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
– On: press the Start/Stop
button. 3. Set the parking brake.
Most of the indicator/
Auto Start/Stop function
warning lights light up for
a varied length of time. Steptronic transmission: switches the en-
gine off automatically while stationary to
– Off: press the Start/Stop button again.
save fuel. The engine starts automatically
All indicator lights go out. when the brake pedal is released.
– Radio-ready state: when the ignition is Manual transmission: switches the engine
switched off, press the ON/OFF button off automatically while stationary to save
on the radio or when the engine is run- fuel. As soon as the clutch pedal is de-
ning, press the Start/Stop button. pressed, the engine starts automatically.
Some electrical consumers remain ready
for operation. Parking brake
Start/stop engine Engage manual parking brake

The lever automatically engages after being
Steptronic transmission: starting pulled up.
1. Depress the brake pedal.
Releasing
2. Engage selector lever position P or N.
3. Press the Start/Stop button.
Manual transmission: starting

2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to
neutral.
Steptronic transmission: switching off Raise lever slightly, press the button and
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply guide the lever down.
the parking brake.
2. Engage selector lever position P.
24
On the road QUICK REFERENCE
Set the electrical parking brake tain pressure on the brake pedal until you
Pull the switch when the vehicle is are ready to start.
stationary.
Selector lever lock
The LED and indicator light light up.
A lock prevents an inadvertent change from
Releasing selector lever position P to another selector
lever position and, depending on the trans-
Manual transmission: press the switch mission version, inadvertent switching to
while the brake pedal is pressed. selector lever position P or R.
Steptronic transmission: press the switch To release the lock: with the brake pedal de-
while the brake is pressed or selector lever pressed, press the button on the side of the
position P is set. selector lever.
The LED and indicator light go out.
The parking brake is released. Steptronic transmission, Sport and
manual mode
Manual transmission
Shifting
When shifting into 5th or 6th gear, push
the gearshift lever to the right in order to
prevent inadvertent shifting into the 3rd or
4th gear.
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Sport program:
To overcome the resistance push the gear- Press the selector lever to the left from se-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- lector lever position D.
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting
Manual mode:
movement.
– To shift down: press the selector lever
Steptronic transmission forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
Selector lever positions wards.
Parking position P.
R is reverse.
Neutral N.
Gear position D.
Engage selector lever position P or R only
when the vehicle is stationary.
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
you select a gear position or reverse, main-
25
Turn signal, high beams, headlight Canada: roadside parking light

flasher, roadside parking lights
Turn signal
To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

– On: with the radio-ready state switched
off, press the lever either up or down
– On: press the lever past the resistance past the resistance point for approx.
point. 2 seconds.
– Off: lightly tap the lever to the resist- – Off: briefly press the lever to the resist-
ance point. ance point in the opposite direction.
– Off: press the lever past the resistance
point in the opposite direction. Lights and lighting
– Triple turn signal activation: lightly tap
the lever up or down. Light functions
– Brief signaling: press the lever to the re-
sistance point and hold it there for as Icon Function
long as you want the turn signal to flash. Bad weather light.
High beams, headlight flasher

Automatic headlight control.
Cornering light.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
Parking lights.
Low beams.
Press the lever forward or pull it backward.
– High beams on, arrow 1.
Instrument lighting.
The high beams light up when the low
beams are switched on.
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar-
row 2.
26
Wiper system Rain sensor
Switching the wipers on/off and brief Activating/deactivating

wipe
Switching on
To activate: press the lever up once from its

standard position, arrow 1.
To deactivate: press the lever back into the
Press the lever up until the desired position standard position.
is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers: posi- Set interval or sensitivity of the rain
tion 0. sensor
– Rain sensor: position 1.
– Normal wiper speed: position 2.
– Fast wiper speed: position 3.
Switching off and brief wipe
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield
Press the lever down.

– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
Pull the lever.
27
Canada: wiper system Rain sensor
Switching the wipers on/off and brief Activating/deactivating

wipe
Switching on
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

Tap up the lever or press it past the resist- sensor
ance point.
– Normal wiper speed: tap up once.
– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.
Cleaning the windshield

– To switch off fast wipe: press down
twice.
– To switch off normal wipe: press down
once.
– Brief wipe: press down once.
Pull the lever.
28
Climate control Button Function

Air recirculation mode.
Air conditioner
Controls the air flow,
Button Function manual.
Temperature.
Air distribution, manual.
Air conditioning. Defrosts and defogs the

windows.
Air recirculation mode. Windshield defroster.
Controls the air flow, Rear window defroster.

manual.
Refueling stop
Controls the air distribution
manually.
Refueling
Fuel cap
Windshield defroster. 1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
and open it.
Automatic climate control

Button Function
Temperature.
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.

Air conditioning.
3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
tached to the fuel filler flap.
Maximum cooling.
AUTO program.
29
Gasoline – Before embarking on an extended trip.

For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur After correcting the tire inflation
content. pressure
Refuel only with unleaded gasoline without Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
metallic additives. Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor.
Information on the recommended fuel grade
can be found in the Owner's Manual. Electronic oil measurement
Wheels and tires Requirements

A current measured value is available after
Tire inflation pressure specifications approx. 30 minutes of driving. During a
shorter trip, the status of the last, suffi-
ciently long trip is displayed.
Displaying the engine oil level

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Engine oil level"
For 5-door models: The engine oil level is displayed.
The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar. Adding engine oil
General information
Switch off the ignition and safely park the
vehicle before engine oil is added.
Adding engine oil
For 3-door models:

The tire inflation pressure values can be
found on the sign on the door pillar.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

Regularly check the tire inflation pressure Only add engine oil when the message is
and correct it as needed: displayed in the instrument cluster.
– At least twice a month.
30
Observe the quantity to be added in the

message.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
Observe recommended engine oil types.
Providing assistance
Hazard warning flashers
The button is located above the Control Dis-

play.
Breakdown assistance
MINI Roadside Assistance
This service can be reached around the
clock in many countries.
1. "MINI Connected"
2. "MINI Assist"
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The contact to the MINI Roadside Assis-
tance is established.
A telephone number is displayed, if
needed. Select to dial the telephone
number on a connected mobile phone.
31
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Cockpit
Vehicle features and options in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies
to safety-related functions and systems.
This chapter describes all standard, country- When using these functions and systems,
specific and optional features offered with the applicable laws and regulations must be
the series. It also describes features and observed.
functions that are not necessarily available
In the vicinity of the steering wheel
1 Power windows 77 Lights off

2 Exterior mirror operation 89 Daytime running lights 147
3 Buttons of the central locking sys- Parking lights 145
tem 68
4 Lights
Low beams 145
Bad weather light 148
Light switch 145
32
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
Automatic headlight con- Roadside parking lights 146

trol 146
Cornering light 147
Trip computer 136
High-beam Assistant 147
Instrument lighting 149
7 Instrument cluster 123
8 Steering column stalk, right
5 Steering wheel buttons, left
Wipers 107
Camera-based cruise control
Wiper on Canadian mod-
on/off 179
els 111
Cruise control on/off 186 Rain sensor 108
Rain sensor on Canadian mod-
els 111
Speed Limiter 171
Cleaning windows 109
Pausing, continuing cruise

control Rear window wiper in Cana-
dian models 109
Cruise control: increase speed
Rear window wiper 109
Cruise control: reduce speed

Clean the rear window 109
Camera-based cruise control:

reduce distance 9 Steering wheel buttons, right
Camera-based cruise control: Voice control 44
increase distance
Telephone
6 Steering column stalk, left
Turn signal 106
Confirm the selection 136
High beams, head-

light flasher 106 Move selection up 136
High-beam Assistant 147

Move selection down 136
33
AT A GLANCE Cockpit
Increase volume 11 Heated steering wheel 91

12 Adjusting the steering wheel 91
Reduce volume 13 Unlocking the hood 269
14 Depending on the equipment: using tail-
gate 70
10 Horn, entire surface
In the vicinity of the center console
1 Hazard warning system 285 6 PDC Park Distance Con-

trol 189
Rearview camera 192
Intelligent Safety 162
Parking assistant 195
Auto Start/Stop func-
2 Control Display 36 tion 101
3 Radio/Multimedia
Start/stop the engine and
4 Glove compartment 220 switch the ignition on/
5 Climate control 200 off 98
34
Cockpit AT A GLANCE
DSC Dynamic Stability Control Manual transmission gearshift

175 lever 115
8 Controller with buttons 39
MINI Driving Modes
switch 177 9 Parking brake, manual 104
Parking brake, electric 104
7 Steptronic transmission selector
lever 116
In the vicinity of the roofliner
1 Emergency Call, SOS 286 4 Ambient light 149
2 Indicator light, front-seat pas- 5 Panoramic glass sunroof 79

senger airbag 154
3 Reading lights 149 6 Interior lights 149
35
AT A GLANCE Central Information Display (CID)
Central Information Display (CID)

Vehicle features and options Input and display
This chapter describes all standard, country- Main menu
specific and optional features offered with
the series. It also describes features and General information
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The main menu is divided into two areas.
tions or country versions. This also applies The left area contains menu items that can
to safety-related functions and systems. be used to call up all functions from the on-
When using these functions and systems, board monitor. The menu items in the right
the applicable laws and regulations must be area show dynamic contents that enable
quick access to certain functions.
observed.
Concept
The Central Information Display (CID) com-
bines the functions of a multitude of
switches. These functions can be operated
via the Controller.
Safety information Media/Radio

All functions for the entertainment system,
for instance radio stations or pairing with
external devices.
Warning
Operating the integrated information sys- Communication
tems and communication devices while
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- Telephone and message function, e-mail and
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is calendar and also pairing and managing mo-
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or bile devices, for instance smartphones.
devices when the traffic situation allows.
As warranted, stop and use the systems Navigation
and devices while the vehicle is stationary. Access to the navigation system, destina-
tion input and traffic bulletins. Configurable
map views and other functions, such as
Points of Interest.
36
Central Information Display (CID) AT A GLANCE
My MINI – Destination search: place names can be

Information on the vehicle status and avail- entered in all languages that are availa-
able settings for vehicle and on-board moni- ble on the Control Display.
tor. Access to the Integrated Owner's
Manual. Activating/deactivating the
functions
MINI Connected Several menu items are preceded by a
Access to apps and vehicle functions. Addi- checkbox. The checkbox indicates whether
tional apps and vehicle functions can be the function is activated or deactivated. Se-
purchased from the MINI Connected Store. lecting the menu item activates or deacti-
vates the function.
Messages Function is activated.
Access to all incoming messages in the ve- Function is deactivated.
hicle, for instance Check Control messages.
Status information
Letters and numbers
Depending on the menu, you can switch be- General information
tween entering upper and lower case let- The status field can be found in the upper
ters, numbers and characters: area of the Control Display. Status informa-
Icon Function tion is displayed in the form of symbols.
Change between capital and Radio

lower-case letters.
Insert blank space. Icon Meaning
Use voice control. HD Radio station is being re-
ceived.
Confirm entry.
Satellite radio is switched on.
Without navigation system
Telephone
Select the icon.
Icon Meaning
Entry comparison
Incoming or outgoing call.
When entering names and addresses, the
choice is narrowed down with every letter Missed call.
entered and letters may be added automati-
cally. Signal strength of cellular network.
Entries are continuously compared with Symbol flashes: network search.
data stored in the vehicle. Cellular network is not available.
– Only those letters are offered during en- Roaming is active.
try for which data is available.
SMS text message received.
Message received.
37
Icon Meaning Selecting the display

The display can be selected in menus which
Reminder.
support the split screen function.
Sending not possible.
1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the
split screen is selected.
Entertainment
2. Press the Controller.
Icon Meaning 3. Select the desired setting.
Bluetooth audio. Specifying the number of displays
USB audio interface. It is possible to specify the number of dis-
Mobile phone audio interface. plays.
Apple CarPlay. 1. Tilt the Controller to the right until the

split screen is selected.
Other symbols 2. Press the Controller.
3. "Personalize menu"
Icon Meaning 4. Select the desired setting.
Check Control message. 5. Tilt the Controller to the left.
The sound output has been
switched off.
Control elements
Encrypted connection not active.
Request for the current vehicle po- Overview
sition.
Checking the current vehicle posi-
tion.
Split screen
General information
Additional information can be displayed on
the right side of the split screen, for in-
stance information from the trip computer. 1 Control Display with touchscreen
In the divided screen view, the so-called 2 Controller with buttons
split screen, this information remains visi-
ble even when switching to another menu.
Control Display
Switching the split screen on/off
General information
1. Press the button. To clean the Control Display, follow the care
2. "Split screen" instructions, refer to page 296.
38
In the case of very high temperatures on Controller

the Control Display, for instance due to in-
tense solar radiation, the brightness may be General information
reduced down to complete deactivation.
Once the temperature is reduced, for in- The buttons can be used to open the menus
stance through shade or air conditioning, directly. The Controller can be used to se-
the normal functions are restored. lect menu items and enter the settings.
Safety information Operation

– Turn to switch between menu items, for
example.
NOTICE
Objects in the area in the front of the Con-
trol Display can shift and damage the Con-
trol Display. There is a risk of damage to
property, among other potential damage.
Do not place objects in the area in front of
the Control Display.
Switching on/off automatically

The Control Display is switched on automat- – Press to select a menu item, for example.
ically when the vehicle is unlocked or as
soon as the Control Display is needed for
operation.
In certain situations, the Control Display is
switched off automatically, for instance if
no operation is performed on the vehicle for
several minutes.
Switching on/off manually

The Control Display can also be switched off – With navigation system: tilt in four di-
manually. rections to switch between displays, for
example.
2. "Turn off control display"
Press the Controller or any button on the
Controller to switch it back on again.
39
– Without navigation system: tilt in two Operating via the Controller

directions to switch between displays,
for example.
Opening the main menu
Press the button.
Buttons on the Controller
Button Function
The main menu is displayed.
Press once: calls up the main All Central Information Display (CID) func-
menu. tions can be called up via the main menu.
Press twice: displays all menu
items of the main menu. Adjusting the main menu
With navigation system: opens
the Communication menu. 1. Press the button twice.
All menu items of the main menu are
With navigation system: opens displayed.
the Media/Radio menu.
2. Select a menu item.
Without navigation system: open
3. To move the menu item to the desired
the Audio menu.
position, tilt the Controller to the right
Without navigation system: or left.
opens the Telephone menu.
With navigation system: opens Selecting menu items
destination input menu for navi- Highlighted menu items can be selected.
gation.
1. Turn the Controller until the desired
With navigation system: opens menu item is highlighted.
navigation map. 2. Press the Controller.
Press once: opens the previous
display. Adjusting menu contents
Press and hold: open the menus The display of menus "Media/Radio",
used last. "Communication" and "MINI Connected" can
be adjusted, for instance to remove the en-
Goes to the Options menu.
tries of functions that are not used from the
menu.
40
Via the Central Information Display (CID): The "Options" menu is displayed.
1. Select the menu. The menu consists of various areas, for in-
stance:
2. "Personalize menu"
– "Split screen": screen settings.
3. Select desired menu contents to be dis-
– "Media/Radio": control options for the
played.
selected main menu.
Dynamic contents – "Save station": if applicable, further con-
trol options for the selected menu.
You can display dynamic contents within
the menu items. The contents of the menu Entering letters and numbers
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
Input
1. Turn the Controller: select letters or
1. "My MINI" numbers.
2. "Contents of main menu" 2. : confirm entry.
Changing between displays Deleting

After a menu item is selected, for instance
"System settings", a new display appears. Icon Function
– Tilt the Controller to the left. Press the Controller: delete
The current display closes and the previ- letters or number.
ous display is shown. or Hold the Controller down: de-
lete all letters or numbers.
– Press the button.
The previous display re-opens. Using alphabetical lists
– Tilt the Controller to the right. For alphabetical lists with more than 30 en-
The new display opens. tries, the letters for which there is an entry
An arrow indicates that additional displays are displayed at the left edge.
can be opened.
1. Turn the Controller to the left or right
quickly.
Opening recently used menus
All letters for which there are entries
The recently used menus can be displayed. are displayed on the left edge.
Press and hold this button. 2. Select the first letter of the desired en-
The recently used menus are dis- try.
played. The first entry of the selected letter is
displayed.
Going to the Options menu
Press the button.
41
Operation via touchscreen Changing between displays

After a menu item is selected, a new display
General information opens.
The Control Display is equipped with a An arrow indicates that additional displays
touchscreen. can be opened.
Touch the screen with your fingers. Do not – Swipe to the left.
use any objects. – Tap arrow.
The new display opens.
Opening the main menu
Tap on the icon. Entering letters and numbers
Input
1. Tap the icon on the touchscreen.
A keyboard is displayed on the Control
Display.
2. Enter desired letters and numbers.
Deleting
The main menu is displayed. Icon Function
All Central Information Display (CID) func- Tapping the icon: deletes the letter
tions can be called up via the main menu. or number.
Adjusting the main menu Tapping and holding the icon all
letters: deletes all letters or num-
1. Tap on the icon. bers.
2. Drag the menu item to the desired posi-
tion on the right or left. Operating navigation map
Selecting menu items The navigation map can be moved using the
touchscreen.
Tap the desired menu item.
Function Operation
Dynamic contents Enlarge/shrink Drag in or out with the
You can display dynamic contents within map. fingers.
the menu items. The contents of the menu
items update automatically, e.g., the active
destination guidance in the navigation.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Contents of main menu"
42
Programmable memory but-

tons
General information
The Central Information Display (CID) func-
tions can be stored on the programmable
memory buttons and called up directly, for
instance radio stations, navigation destina-
tions, phone numbers and menu entries.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Storing a function
1. Select the function via the Central Infor-
mation Display (CID).
2. Press and hold the desired but-

ton, until a signal sounds.
Executing a function
Press the button.
The function will work immediately.
This means, for instance that the number is
dialed when a phone number is selected.
Displaying the key assignment

Touch buttons with finger. Do not wear
gloves or use objects.
The assignment of the buttons is displayed
in the upper area of the Control Display.
Deleting the button assignments

1. Press buttons 1 and 6 simultaneously
for approx. 5 seconds.
2. "OK"
43
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Voice activation system

Vehicle features and options activation system. To set the language,
refer to page 48.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Always say commands in the language
specific and optional features offered with of the voice activation system.
the series. It also describes features and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Using the voice activation sys-
tions or country versions. This also applies tem
the applicable laws and regulations must be Activating the voice control system
observed.
wheel.
Concept Wait for the signal.
Say the command.
Most functions displayed on the Control This icon indicates that the voice con-
Display can be operated by voice commands trol system is active.
via the voice activation system. The system No other commands may be available. In
supports you with announcements during this case, operate the function via the Cen-
input. tral Information Display (CID).
Terminating the voice control

General information system
– Functions that can only be used when
wheel or ›Cancel‹.
the vehicle is stationary can only be op-
erated via the voice activation system to
a limited extent.
– The system uses a special microphone Possible commands
on the driver's side.
– ›...‹ in the Owner's Manual denotes ver- General information
bal instructions to use with the voice ac- Most menu items on the Control Display can
tivation system. be spoken as commands.
Commands from other menus can also be
spoken.
Functional requirements
You can also select list entries such as
phone list entries via voice activation. Read
– A language must be set via the Control
Display that is supported by the voice
44
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
these list entries out loud exactly as they Settings

are shown in the respective list.
Displaying possible commands Setting the voice control

The following is displayed in the top area of You can set the system to use standard dia-
the Control Display: log or a short version.
– Some possible commands for the current The short version of the voice control plays
menu. back short messages in abbreviated form.
– Some possible commands from other Via the Central Information Display (CID):
menus. 1. "My MINI"
– Status of the voice recognition. 2. "System settings"
– Encrypted connection is not availa- 3. "Language"
ble.
4. "Speech mode:"
Help on the voice activation system 5. Select the desired setting.
– ›General information on voice control‹:
have information on the operating prin- Activating voice recognition via
ciple of the voice activation system read the server
out loud. The voice recognition feature via the server
– ›Help‹: have help for the current menu provides a dictation function and a natural
read out loud. method of destination input while improv-
ing the quality of voice recognition. To use
the functions, data is transmitted to a serv-
Example: going to the sound ice provider via an encrypted connection
and stored locally there.
settings
The commands of the menu items are spo- 1. "My MINI"
ken just as they are selected via the Con- 2. "System settings"
troller.
3. "Language"
1. Switch on the Entertainment sound out-
4. "Server speech recognition"
put, if needed.
2. Press the button on the steering Adjusting the volume

wheel. Turn the volume button during the spoken
3. ›Media and radio‹ instructions until the desired volume is set.
4. ›Tone‹ – The volume remains constant even if the
volume of other audio sources is
changed.
– The volume is stored for the profile cur-
rently used.
45
AT A GLANCE Voice activation system
Information on Emergency If it was not possible to activate voice com-

mand response, the list of Bluetooth devices
Requests appears on the Control Display.
Do not use the voice activation system to

initiate an Emergency Request. In stressful Voice assistants from third-
situations, the voice and vocal pitch can
change. This can unnecessarily delay the es- party providers
tablishment of a telephone connection.
Instead, use the SOS button, refer to Concept
page 286, close to the interior mirror. Some third-party providers provide digital
voice assistants. Supported voice assistants
can be used in the vehicle.
System limits
General information
– Certain noises can be detected and may Some of the functions are limited in the ve-
lead to problems. Keep the doors, win- hicle to prevent any impairment of safety
dows, and glass sunroof closed. while driving.
– Noises from the front passenger or the
rear seat bench can impair the system. Functional requirements
Avoid making other noise in the vehicle – If applicable, corresponding Connected
while speaking. Service subsequently purchased via
– Major language dialects can cause prob- MINI Connected Store.
lems with the voice recognition feature. – Vehicle added in the MINI app.
Speak loud and clear.
– Third-party provider account and MINI
account connected in the MINI app.
Using the voice activation sys- – Smartphone connected to the vehicle via
Bluetooth audio.
tem of the smartphone
Activation in the MINI app
A smartphone connected to the vehicle can Third-party assistants are set up in the
be used via voice control. MINI app.
Activate voice command response on the Follow the instructions in the app.
smartphone for this purpose.
Activation in the vehicle
1. Press and hold the button on the
steering wheel for approx. 3 seconds. 1. Press the button on the steering
Voice command response is activated on wheel.
the smartphone. 2. Wait for the signal.
2. Release the button. 3. Say the specific activation word of the
third-party provider and the desired
If activation is successful, a confirma- command.
tion appears on the Control Display.
46
Voice activation system AT A GLANCE
Information about the active function is

displayed on the Control Display.
Malfunction
In case of a malfunction, switch off the en-
gine and start the engine again.
47
AT A GLANCE General settings
General settings
Vehicle features and options The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
This chapter describes all standard, country-
Setting the time
the series. It also describes features and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
functions that are not necessarily available 1. "My MINI"
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op-
tions or country versions. This also applies 2. "System settings"
to safety-related functions and systems. 3. "Date and time"
4. "Time:"
observed. 5. Turn the Controller until the desired
hours are displayed.
Language 7. Turn the Controller until the desired mi-
nutes are displayed.
Setting the language 8. Press the Controller.
1. "My MINI"
Setting the time format
3. If necessary, "Language" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Language:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Time format:"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
Time
Setting the time zone Date
1. "My MINI"
Setting the date
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Time zone:" 2. "System settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Date and time"
48
General settings AT A GLANCE
4. "Date:" Activating/deactivating the

5. Turn the Controller until the desired day display of the current vehicle
is displayed.
position
7. Make the settings for the month and Concept
year.
If vehicle tracking has been activated, the
Setting the date format current vehicle position can be displayed in
the MINI Connected app.
1. "My MINI" Activating/deactivating
2. "System settings" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
3. "Date and time" 1. "My MINI"
4. "Date format:" 2. "Vehicle settings"
5. Select the desired setting. 3. "Data privacy"
The setting is stored for the driver profile 4. "Vehicle tracking"
currently used. 5. Select the desired setting.
Setting the units of measure- Activating/deactivating pop-

ment ups
You can set the units of measurement for For some functions, pop-ups are displayed
some values, for example, consumption, dis- automatically on the Control Display. Some
tances and temperature. of these pop-ups can be activated or deacti-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): vated.
1. "My MINI" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
2. "System settings" 1. "My MINI"
3. "Units" 2. "System settings"
4. Select the desired menu item. 3. "Pop-ups"
5. Select the desired setting. 4. Select the desired setting.
The setting is stored for the driver profile The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used. currently used.
Control Display
Brightness
49
1. "My MINI" General information

2. "System settings" The setting of the color world effects the
following display content:
3. "Displays"
– On-board monitor.
4. "Control display"
– Instrument cluster.
5. "Brightness at night"
– Head-up Display.
6. Turn the Controller until the desired Depending on the equipment, the color
brightness is set. world can be applied as basic display for the
7. Press the Controller. LED ring on the central instrument.
The setting is stored for the driver profile LED ring on the central instrument cluster,
currently used. refer to page 140.
Depending on the light conditions, the
brightness settings may not be clearly visi- Setting the color world
ble. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Screensaver 1. "My MINI"

If no entries are made via the Central Infor- 2. "System settings"
mation Display (CID), a screensaver can be 3. "Displays"
displayed after an adjustable time. 4. "Color scheme"
5. Select the desired setting.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
Messages
4. "Control display"
Concept
5. "Screensaver"
The menu centrally displays all messages ar-
6. Select the desired setting. riving in the vehicle in list form.
currently used. General information
The following messages can be displayed:
– Traffic messages.
Instrument cluster with en-
– Communication messages, for example
hanced features: color world e-mails, SMS text messages or remind-
ers.
Concept – Check Control messages.
The display of the display content can be – Messages on service notifications.
configured individually, for instance in a – Messages from the vehicle manufac-
harmonic color style. turer.
Messages are additionally displayed in the
status field.
50
Retrieving messages Data protection

1. "Notifications" Data transfer
2. Select the desired notification.
Concept
The menu in which the notification is dis- The vehicle offers various functions which
played will open. require data to be transferred to MINI or a
service provider. The data transfer can be
Deleting messages deactivated for some functions.
All messages, except Check Control mes-
sages or messages from the vehicle manu- General information
facturer, can be deleted from the list. With data transfer deactivated, the respec-
Check Control messages or messages from tive function cannot be used.
the vehicle manufacturer are displayed as Only make these settings while stationary.
long as they are relevant.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Activating/deactivating
1. "Notifications" Follow the instructions on the Control Dis-
play.
2. Select the desired message.
3. Press the button. 1. "My MINI"
4. "Delete this notification" or "Delete all 2. "System settings"
notifications"
3. "Data privacy"
Settings 4. Select the desired setting.
The following settings can be adjusted:
– Select the applications, from which mes- Deleting personal data in the
sages will be permitted. vehicle
– Sort the messages according to date or
priority. Concept
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Depending on the usage, the vehicle stores
personal data, such as stored radio stations.
1. "My MINI" This personal data can be permanently de-
2. "System settings" leted via the Central Information Display
(CID).
3. "Notifications"
4. Select the desired setting. General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
following data is deleted:
– Driver profile settings.
– Stored radio stations.
– Stored programmable memory buttons.
51
– Travel and trip computer information. connection type to select depends on the
– Music collection. mobile device and the desired function.
– Navigation, for instance stored destina-
tions. General information
– Phone book. The following overview shows possible
functions and the suitable connection types
– Office data, for instance voice memos. for them. The scope of functions depends on
– Login accounts. the mobile device.
Altogether, the deletion of the data can take Function Connec-
up to 15 minutes. tion type
Functional requirement Making calls via the hands- Bluetooth.

free system.
Data can only be deleted while stationary.
Using phone functions via
Deleting data the Central Information Dis-
play (CID).
Note and follow the instructions on the Con-
trol Display. Using the smartphone Of-
fice functions.
Playing music from the Bluetooth
1. "My MINI" smartphone or the audio or USB.
2. "System settings" player.
3. "Data privacy" Using compatible apps via Bluetooth
4. "Delete personal data" the Central Information Dis- or USB.
play (CID).
5. "Delete personal data"
USB storage device: USB.
6. "OK"
Exporting and importing
7. Exit and lock the vehicle. driver profiles.
The deletion process takes 15 minutes to Update the software.
complete.
Playing music.
If not all data was deleted, repeat the dele-
tion. Playing videos from the USB.
smartphone or the USB de-
Canceling deletion vice.
Start the engine to cancel deletion of the Using Apple CarPlay apps Bluetooth
data. via the Central Information and
Display (CID) and voice op- WLAN.
eration.
Connections
The following connection types require one-
Concept time pairing with the vehicle:
Various connection types are available for – Bluetooth.
using mobile devices in the vehicle. The – Apple CarPlay.
52
Paired devices are automatically recognized Bluetooth connection

later on and connected to the vehicle.
Safety information – Compatible device, refer to page 53,
with Bluetooth interface.
Warning – The vehicle key is in the vehicle.
Operating the integrated information sys- – The device is ready for operation.
tems and communication devices while – Bluetooth is activated on the device and
driving can distract from traffic. It is pos- in the vehicle, refer to page 53.
sible to lose control of the vehicle. There is
a risk of accident. Only use the systems or – Bluetooth presettings, such as visibility,
devices when the traffic situation allows. may be required on the device; refer to
As warranted, stop and use the systems the owner's manual of the device.
and devices while the vehicle is stationary.
Switching on Bluetooth
Compatible devices
1. "My MINI"
General information 2. "System settings"
Malfunctions may occur with devices not 3. "Mobile devices"
listed or deviating software versions. 4. "Settings"
Displaying the vehicle identification 5. "Bluetooth®"
number and software part number
Activating/deactivating telephone
When looking for compatible devices, you
functions
may have to state the vehicle identification
number and the software part number. To use all supported functions of a mobile
These numbers can be displayed in the ve- phone, the following functions must be acti-
hicle. vated prior to pairing.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI" 1. "My MINI"

2. "System settings" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Mobile devices"
4. "Settings" 4. "Settings"
5. "Bluetooth® info" 5. Select the desired setting:
6. "System information" – "Office"
A software update, refer to page 58, can Activate function to transmit short
be performed. messages, e-mails, calendars, tasks,
memos, and reminders to the vehi-
cle. Costs can be incurred by trans-
mitting all data to the vehicle.
– "Contact images"
53
Activate function to show the con- Frequently Asked Questions

tact pictures. All requirements are met and all required
steps were completed in the specified order.
Pairing the mobile device with the Despite that, the mobile device does not
vehicle function as expected.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): In this case, the following explanations can
1. "My MINI" help:
Why could the mobile phone not be paired
or connected?
3. "Mobile devices" – There are too many Bluetooth devices
4. "Connect new device" connected to the mobile phone or vehi-
5. Select the functions for which the de- cle.
vice will be used: Delete Bluetooth connections with other
– "Telephone" devices.
– "Bluetooth® audio" Delete all known Bluetooth connections
from the device list on the mobile phone
– "Apps" and start a new device search.
– "Apple CarPlay" – The mobile phone is in power-save mode
The vehicle's Bluetooth name is dis- or has only a limited remaining battery
played on the Control Display. life.
6. On the mobile device, search for Blue- Charge the mobile phone.
tooth devices in the vicinity. Why does the mobile phone no longer re-
The Bluetooth name of the vehicle ap- act?
pears on the mobile device display. – The applications on the mobile phone do
Select the Bluetooth name of the vehi- not function anymore.
cle. Switch the mobile phone off and on
7. Depending on the mobile device, a con- again.
trol number is displayed or the control – Possibly too high or too low ambient
number must be entered. temperatures for mobile phone opera-
– Compare the control number dis- tion.
played on the Control Display with Do not subject the mobile phone to ex-
the control number on the display of treme ambient temperatures.
the device.
Why can phone functions not be used via
Confirm the control number on the the Central Information Display (CID)?
device and on the Control Display.
– The mobile phone may not be properly
– Enter and confirm the same control configured, for instance as Bluetooth au-
number on the device and via the dio device.
Central Information Display (CID).
Connect the mobile phone with the tele-
The device is connected and displayed phone or additional phone function.
in the device list.
Why are no or not all telephone book en-
If connection was not successful: Fre- tries displayed or why are they incomplete?
quently Asked Questions, refer to page 54.
54
– Transmission of the telephone book en- – Audio devices with USB port, for in-
tries is not yet complete. stance MP3 players.
– It is possible that only the telephone – USB storage devices.
book entries of the mobile phone or the Common file systems are supported.
SIM card are transmitted. FAT32 and exFAT are the recommended
– It may not be possible to display tele- formats.
phone book entries with special charac- A connected USB device will be supplied
ters. with charge current via the USB port if the
– It may not be possible to transmit con- device supports this. Follow the maximum
tacts from social networks. charge current of the USB port.
– The number of phone book entries to be The following uses are possible on USB
stored is too high. ports with data transfer:
– Data volume of the contact too large, for – Exporting and importing driver profiles,
instance due to stored information such refer to page 71.
as memos. – Playing music files via USB audio.
Reduce the data volume of the contact. – Playing videos via USB video.
– A mobile phone is only connected as an – Loading of software updates, refer to
audio source. page 58.
Reconfigure the mobile phone and con- Follow the following when connecting:
nect it with the telephone or additional
– Do not use force when plugging the con-
phone function.
nector into the USB port.
How can the telephone connection quality
– Use a flexible adapter cable.
be improved?
– Protect the USB device against mechani-
– The strength of the Bluetooth signal on
cal damage.
the mobile phone can be adjusted, de-
pending on the mobile phone. – Due to the large number of USB devices
available on the market, it cannot be
– Insert the mobile phone into the wire-
guaranteed that every device is operable
less charging tray.
on the vehicle.
– Adjust the volume of the microphone
– Do not expose USB devices to extreme
and loudspeakers separately.
environmental conditions, such as very
If all points in this list have been checked high temperatures; refer to the owner's
and the required function is still not availa- manual of the device.
ble, contact the hotline, a dealer’s service
– Due to the many different compression
center or another qualified service center or
techniques, proper playback of the me-
repair shop.
dia stored on the USB device cannot be
guaranteed in all cases.
USB connection
– To ensure proper transmission of the
General information stored data, do not charge a USB device
via the onboard socket, when it is con-
The following mobile devices can be connected to the USB port.
nected to the USB port:
– Depending on how the USB device is be-
– Mobile phones. ing used, settings may be required on
55
the USB storage device, refer to the Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay
owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Not compatible USB devices:
1. "My MINI"
– USB hard drives.
– USB hubs.
– USB memory card readers with multiple 3. "Mobile devices"
slots. 4. "Settings"
– HFS-formatted USB devices. 5. Select the following settings:
– Devices such as fans or lamps. – "Bluetooth®"
– "Apple CarPlay"
Functional requirement
Compatible device, refer to page 53, with Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay
USB port. Pairing an iPhone with the vehicle, refer to
page 54, via Bluetooth
Connecting the device
Select CarPlay as the function:
Connect the USB device using a suitable
"Apple CarPlay"
adapter cable to a USB port, refer to
page 216. The iPhone is connected to the vehicle and
displayed in the device list, refer to
The USB device is connected to the vehicle
page 57.
and displayed in the device list.
Operation
Apple CarPlay preparation
For more information, refer to the
Concept Integrated Owner's Manual or the Owner's
Manual for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
CarPlay allows certain functions of a communication.
patible Apple iPhone to be used via Siri
voice operation and the Central Information Frequently Asked Questions
Display (CID).
All requirements are met and all required
Functional requirements steps were completed in the specified order.
Despite that, the mobile device does not
– Compatible iPhone, refer to page 53. function as expected.
iPhone 5 or later with iOS 7.1 or later. In this case, the following explanations can
– Corresponding mobile contract. help:
– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera- The iPhone has already been paired with
tion are activated on the iPhone. Apple CarPlay. When a new connection is
– Booking the MINI Connected service: established, CarPlay can no longer be se-
Apple CarPlay preparation. lected.
– If necessary, the setting for mobile data – Delete the iPhone concerned from the
must be activated on the iPhone. device list.
56
– On the iPhone, delete the vehicle con- Configuring the device

cerned from the list of stored vehicles Functions can be activated or deactivated
under Bluetooth and under WLAN. for paired and connected devices.
– Pair the iPhone as a new device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
If the steps listed have been carried out and
the required function is still not available: 1. "My MINI"
contact the hotline, a dealer's service center 2. "System settings"
or another qualified service center or repair 3. "Mobile devices"
shop.
4. Select the desired device.
Managing mobile devices 5. Select the desired setting.
If a function is assigned to a device, the
General information function will be deactivated where appro-
– After one-time pairing, the devices are priate for a device that is already connected
automatically recognized and recon- and the device will be disconnected.
nected when the ignition is switched on.
– The data stored on the SIM card or in Disconnecting the device
the mobile phone is transferred to the The device's connection to the vehicle is
vehicle after recognition. disconnected.
– For some devices, certain settings may The device remains paired and can be con-
be necessary, for instance authorization, nected again, refer to page 57.
see owner's manual of the device. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Displaying the device list 1. "My MINI"
All devices paired and/or connected with 2. "System settings"
the vehicle are displayed in the device list. 3. "Mobile devices"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. Select device.
1. "My MINI" 5. "Disconnect device"
Connecting the device
3. "Mobile devices"
A disconnected device can be reconnected.
A icon indicates, for which function a de-
vice is used. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
Icon Function 1. "My MINI"
"Telephone" 2. "System settings"
3. "Mobile devices"
"Additional telephone"
4. Select device.
"Bluetooth® audio"
5. "Connect device"
"Apps"
The functions that were assigned to the de-
"Apple CarPlay" vice before disconnecting are assigned to
the device when it is reconnected. The func-
57
tions may be deactivated on a device al- Displaying the version of the installed
ready connected. software
The software version installed in the vehicle
Deleting the device is displayed.
3. "Mobile devices" 3. "Software update"
4. Select device. 4. "Show current version"
5. "Delete device" If an update has been carried out before, se-
The device is disconnected and removed lect the desired version to display additional
from the device list. information.
Swapping the telephone and additional Updating software via USB

telephone The software may only be updated when the
If two mobile phones are connected to the vehicle is stationary.
vehicle, the functions of the telephone and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
additional telephone can be switched.
1. Store the file for the software update in
the main folder of a USB device.
1. "My MINI" 2. Connecting USB device to the USB port.
2. "System settings" 3. "My MINI"
3. "Mobile devices" 4. "System settings"
4. "Settings" 5. "Software update"
5. "Swap telephone/additional tel." 6. "Update software"
7. "USB"
Software update
8. "Install software"
General information 9. "OK"
The vehicle supports a large number of mo- 10. Wait for the update to complete.
bile devices, for example mobile phones and 11. Confirm system restart.
MP3 players. Software updates are available
for many of the supported devices. The ve-
hicle is kept up-to-date via regular vehicle Restoring the software version
software updates. You can restore the software to the version
Contact a dealer's service center or another prior to the last update or to its factory set-
qualified service center or repair shop for tings.
information on available software updates. The software may only be restored when
the vehicle is stationary.
58
1. "My MINI"
3. "Software update"
4. "Restore software"
5. – "Previous version"
The previous software version is re-
stored.
– "Default software settings"
The first software version is re-
stored.
6. "Remove software"
7. "OK"
8. Wait for restore.
9. Confirm system restart.
59
AT A GLANCE Owner's Manual media
Owner's Manual media

Vehicle features and options Supplementary Owner's Manuals
Also follow the Supplementary Owner's
This chapter describes all standard, country- Manuals, which are included in addition to
specific and optional features offered with the onboard literature.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Integrated Owner's Manual in
tions or country versions. This also applies the vehicle
the applicable laws and regulations must be Concept
observed. The Integrated Owner's Manual specifically
describes features and functions found in
the vehicle. The Integrated Owner's Manual
General information can be displayed on the Control Display.
You can use the following media formats to Selecting the Owner's Manual
call up the content in the Owner's Manual:
– Printed Owner's Manual, refer to
page 60. 2. "My MINI"
– Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi- 3. "Owner's Manual"
cle, refer to page 60. 4. Select the desired method of accessing
the contents.
Printed Owner's Manual Scrolling through the Owner's

Manual
Concept Turn the Controller, until the next or previ-
The printed Owner's Manual describes all ous contents are displayed.
standard, country-specific, and optional fea-
tures offered with the series. Context help
General information General information
The Owner's Manual for Navigation, Enter- The section of the Owner's Manual relating
tainment, and Communication can be ob- to the function that is currently selected
tained as a printed book from the service can be displayed directly.
center.
60
Owner's Manual media AT A GLANCE
Opening via Central Information

Display (CID)
Change directly to the Options menu from
the function on the Control Display:

2. "Owner's Manual"
Opening when a Check Control

message is displayed
Directly from the Check Control message on
the Control Display:
"Owner's Manual"
Changing between a function and the

Owner's Manual
To switch from a function, for instance
radio, to the Owner's Manual on the Control
Display and to alternate between the two
displays:

2. "Owner's Manual"
3. Select the desired page in the Owner's
Manual.
4. Press the button again to return to

the last displayed function.
5. Press the button to return to the

page of the Owner's Manual displayed
last.
To alternate continuously between the last
displayed function and the last displayed
page of the Owner's Manual, repeat steps 4
& 5. Opens a new display every time.
61
CONTROLS Opening and closing
Opening and closing

Vehicle features and options Safety Instructions
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The vehicle key has a button cell battery.
the series. It also describes features and Batteries or button cells can be swallowed
functions that are not necessarily available and lead to serious or fatal injuries within
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- two hours, for example, due to internal
tions or country versions. This also applies burns or chemical burns. There is an in-
to safety-related functions and systems. jury hazard or danger to life. Keep the ve-
When using these functions and systems, hicle key and batteries out of reach for
the applicable laws and regulations must be children. Immediately seek medical help if
observed. there is any suspicion that a battery or
button cell has been swallowed or is lo-
cated in any part of the body.
Vehicle key
General information Warning
The vehicle is supplied with two vehicle People or animals in the vehicle can lock
keys with integrated key. the doors from the inside and lock them-
Each vehicle key contains a replaceable bat- selves in. In this case, the vehicle cannot
tery, refer to page 65. be opened from the outside. There is a risk
of injury. Take the vehicle key with you so
Depending on the equipment and country that the vehicle can be opened from the
version, various settings, refer to page 74, outside.
can be configured for the button functions.
A personal driver profile, refer to page 71,
for each vehicle key is stored in the vehicle.
Warning
To provide information on maintenance rec-
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
ommendations, the service data is stored in
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
the vehicle key, refer to page 277.
endanger themselves and traffic, for in-
To prevent possible locking in of the vehicle stance due to the following actions:
key, take the vehicle key with you when ex-
– Pressing the Start/Stop button.
iting the vehicle.
– Releasing the parking brake.
– Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
– Engaging selector lever position N.
– Using vehicle equipment.
62
Opening and closing CONTROLS
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do – The interior lights, refer to page 149,
not leave children or animals unattended and the MINI logo projection are
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with switched on, provided that the interior
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. lights were not switched off manually.
– Depending on the settings, the welcome
light and pathway lighting, refer to
Overview page 146, are switched on.
– The alarm system, refer to page 75, is
switched off.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Convenient opening
hicle key after unlocking.
1 Unlocking The windows and the glass sunroof are
2 Locking opened, as long as the button on the vehicle
3 Unlocking the tailgate key is pressed.
4 Panic mode Locking

1. Close the driver's door.
Unlocking
2. Press the button on the vehicle
Press the button on the vehicle key.
key.
The following functions are executed:
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 74, the following access points are – All doors, the tailgate, and the fuel filler
unlocked. flap are locked.
– Driver's door and fuel filler flap. – Locking is confirmed by the turn signals
and the horn. This function must be ac-
Press the button on the vehicle key tivated in the settings, refer to
again to unlock the other vehicle access page 74.
points.
– The alarm system, refer to page 75, is
– All doors, tailgate, and fuel filler flap. switched on.
In addition, the following functions are exe- If the engine or ignition is still switched on
cuted: when you lock the vehicle, the vehicle horn
– Unlocking is confirmed by the turn sig- honks twice. In this case, the engine or ig-
nals and the horn. This function must be nition must be switched off by means of the
activated in the settings, refer to Start/Stop button.
page 74.
– The settings stored in the driver profile,
refer to page 71, are applied.
63
With Comfort Access: convenient whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
closing the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
Safety information fer to page 74.
Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can Warning
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the Body parts can be jammed when operating
doors is clear during convenient closing. the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail-
gate is clear during opening and closing.
Closing
hicle key in the area close to the ve- NOTICE
hicle. The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop-
The windows and the glass sunroof are erty, among other potential damage. Make
closed, as long as the button on the vehicle sure that the area of movement of the tail-
key is pressed. gate is clear during opening and closing.
Switch on interior lights and

courtesy light NOTICE
Press the button on the vehicle key Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the
with the vehicle locked. windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property,
The MINI logo projection is also switched among other potential damage. Cover the
on. edges and ensure that pointed objects do
These functions are not available if the inte- not hit the windows.
rior lights were switched off manually.
The light functions may depend on the am-
bient brightness.
Opening
After locking, wait 10 seconds before press- Press and hold the button on the ve-
ing the button again. hicle key for approx. 1 second.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
Tailgate upward.
General information Panic mode
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi- You can trigger the alarm system if you find
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo yourself in a dangerous situation.
area.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, it is possible to specify
64
– Press the button on the vehicle 3. Slide the integrated key in the cover of
key and hold for at least 3 sec- the battery compartment and raise the
onds. cover.
– Briefly press the button on the vehicle
key three times in succession.
Replacing the battery
NOTE
Improper batteries in the vehicle key can
damage the vehicle key. There is a danger 4. Push battery in arrow direction using a
of damage to property. Always replace the pointed object and lift it out.
discharged battery with a battery with the
same voltage, the same size and the same
specification.
1. Remove the integrated key from the ve-

hicle key, refer to page 67.
2. Slide the integrated key into the open-
ing and raise the cover.
The battery compartment is accessible.
5. Insert a type CR 2032 3V battery with
the positive side facing up.
6. Insert lid and cover.
7. Push the integrated key into the vehicle
key until it engages.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
dealer’s service center or another
qualified service center or specialist
workshop or take them to a collection point.
Additional vehicle keys

Additional vehicle keys are available from a
service center or another qualified service
center or repair shop.
Loss of vehicle keys

A lost vehicle key can be blocked and re-
placed by a dealer’s service center or an-
65
other qualified service center or repair Starting the engine via emergency
shop. detection of the Vehicle key
Malfunction
General information
A Check Control message is displayed.
Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
malfunction under the following circum-
stances:
– The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
charged. For replacing the battery, refer It is not possible to start the engine if the
to page 65. vehicle key has not been detected.
– Interference of the radio connection Proceed as follows in this case:
from transmission towers or other
equipment with high transmitting 1. Hold the vehicle key against the mark
power. on the steering column as shown. Pay
attention to the display in the instru-
– Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal ment cluster.
objects.
2. If the vehicle key is detected:
Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gether with metal objects. Start the engine within 10 seconds.
– Interference of the radio connection If the vehicle key is not recognized, slightly
from mobile phones or other electronic change the position of the vehicle key and
devices in direct proximity to the vehi- repeat the procedure.
cle key.
Do not carry the vehicle key in close Frequently Asked Questions
proximity to other electronic devices. What precautions can be taken to be able to
– Interference of radio transmission by a open a vehicle with an accidentally locked
charging process of mobile devices, for in vehicle key?
instance charging of a mobile phone. – The options provided by the Remote
– The vehicle key is in direct proximity of Services of the MINI Connected app in-
the wireless charging tray. clude the ability to lock and unlock a ve-
hicle.
Place the vehicle key in a different loca-
tion. This requires an active MINI Connected
contract and the MINI Connected app
In the case of interference, the vehicle can must be installed on a smartphone.
be unlocked and locked from the outside
with the integrated key, refer to page 67. – Unlocking the vehicle can be requested
via the MINI Connected Call Center.
An active MINI Connected contract is
required.
66
Integrated key Removing
General information
The driver's door can be locked and un-
locked without the vehicle key using the
integrated key.
Safety information
Warning Press the button, arrow 1, and pull out the

Unlocking from the inside is only possible integrated key, arrow 2.
with special knowledge.
Persons who spend a lengthy time in the Locking/unlocking via the door
vehicle while being exposed to extreme
temperatures are at risk of injury or death. lock
Do not lock the vehicle from the outside 1. Remove lid on the door lock.
when there are people in it. To do this, slide the integrated key into
the opening from below and remove the
lid.
NOTICE
The door lock is permanently joined with
the door. The door handle can be moved.
When pulling the door handle with the
integrated key inserted, paint or the
integrated key can be damaged. There is a
risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Remove the integrated
key before pulling the external door han-
dle.
2. Unlock or lock the door lock using the
integrated key.
The other doors must be unlocked or locked
from the inside.
Alarm system
The alarm system is not switched on if the
vehicle is locked with the integrated key.
The alarm system is triggered when the
door is opened, if the vehicle has been un-
locked via the door lock.
67
Buttons for the central locking – Back doors: pull twice on the door han-
dle on the door to be opened; the first
system time unlocks the door, the second time
opens it. The other doors remain locked.
General information
In the event of a severe accident, the vehi-
cle is automatically unlocked. The hazard Comfort Access
warning system and interior lights come on.
Concept
Overview The vehicle can be accessed without operat-
ing the vehicle key.
Carrying the vehicle key with you, e.g., in
your pants pocket, is sufficient.
The vehicle automatically detects the vehi-
cle key when it is in close proximity or in
the car's interior.
General information
Comfort Access supports the following
Buttons for the central locking system. functions:
– Unlocking and locking the vehicle.
Locking – Convenient closing.
Press the button with the front – Open the tailgate.
doors closed.
– The fuel filler flap remains unlocked.
– The vehicle is not secured against theft – To lock the vehicle, the vehicle key must
when locking. be outside of the vehicle near the doors.
– The next unlocking and locking cycle is
Unlocking not possible until after approx. 2 sec-
onds.
Press the button.
Opening
– Press button to unlock the doors
together, and then pull the door handle
above the armrest.
– Front doors: pull the door handle on the
door to open the door. The other doors
remain locked.
68
Unlocking Convenient closing

Safety information
Warning
With convenient closing, body parts can
be jammed. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the
doors is clear during convenient closing.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button. Closing
Depending on the settings, refer to
page 74, only the driver's door and the
fuel filler flap may be unlocked. Unlike
when unlocking using the vehicle key,
pressing the button on the outer door han-
dle again does not unlock the other vehicle
access points. Rather, the vehicle is locked
again.
If the vehicle was locked automatically after
driving off or with the button of the central Press and hold down the button on the driv-
locking system from the inside, note the fol- er's or front passenger's outer door handle.
lowing: if a door on a locked vehicle is
In addition to locking, the windows and
opened from the inside with the door
glass sunroof will be closed.
opener, pressing the button on the outer
door handle will first lock the vehicle again.
To unlock, the button on the outer door han- To open the tailgate
dle must be pressed again.
General information
Locking If the tailgate is opened via Comfort Access,
locked doors are not unlocked.
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
area.
On the driver's or front passenger's outer

door handle, press the button.
69
Safety information Malfunction

Vehicle key recognition by the vehicle may
Warning malfunction under the following circum-
Body parts can be jammed when operating stances:
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make – The battery of the vehicle key is dis-
sure that the area of movement of the tail- charged. For replacing the battery, refer
gate is clear during opening and closing. to page 65.
– Interference of the radio connection
from transmission towers or other
NOTICE equipment with high transmitting
power.
The tailgate swings back and up when it
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- – Shielding of the vehicle key due to metal
erty, among other potential damage. Make objects.
sure that the area of movement of the tail- Do not transport the vehicle key to-
gate is clear during opening and closing. gether with metal objects.
– Interference of the radio connection
from mobile phones or other electronic
NOTICE devices in direct proximity to the vehi-
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the cle key.
windows and heat conductors while driv- Do not carry the vehicle key in close
ing. There is a risk of damage to property, proximity to other electronic devices.
among other potential damage. Cover the Wet or snowy conditions may disrupt the
edges and ensure that pointed objects do locking request recognition function on the
not hit the windows. door handles.
In the case of a malfunction, unlock and
Opening lock the vehicle using the buttons of the ve-
hicle key or use the integrated key, refer to
page 67.
Tailgate
General information
To avoid locking the vehicle key in the vehi-
cle, do not place the vehicle key in the cargo
Press button next on tailgate. area.
The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung country version, it is possible to specify
upward. whether the tailgate can be unlocked with
the vehicle key and how the vehicle doors
will respond to this. To perform settings, re-
fer to page 74.
70
Safety information – Press and hold the button on the

vehicle key for approx. 1 second.
Warning Depending on the setting, the doors may
also be unlocked. Unlocking using the
Body parts can be jammed when operating vehicle key, refer to page 64.
the tailgate. There is a risk of injury. Make
sure that the area of movement of the tail- The tailgate is unlocked and can be swung
gate is clear during opening and closing. upward.
Opening from the inside

NOTICE With Steptronic transmission:
The tailgate swings back and up when it With the vehicle stationary, press
opens. There is a risk of damage to prop- the button in the driver's floor area.
erty, among other potential damage. Make If the vehicle is locked, selector lever posi-
sure that the area of movement of the tail- tion P must be engaged first.
gate is clear during opening and closing.
With manual transmission:
With the vehicle stationary, press
NOTICE the button in the driver's floor area twice in
Sharp-edged or pointed objects can hit the quick succession.
windows and heat conductors while driv-
ing. There is a risk of damage to property, Closing
among other potential damage. Cover the
edges and ensure that pointed objects do
not hit the windows.
Opening and closing

Opening from the outside
Recessed grips on the interior trim of the

tailgate can be used to conveniently pull
down the tailgate.
Driver profiles
– Without Comfort Access: unlock vehicle. Concept
With Comfort Access: unlock the vehi- In the driver profiles, individual settings for
cle or have the vehicle key with you. several drivers can be stored and called up
Press button next on tailgate. again when required.
71
General information Settings

There are three driver profiles with which The settings, for instance for the following
personal vehicle settings can be stored. Ev- systems and functions, are stored in the ac-
ery vehicle key has been assigned one of tive profile. The scope of storable settings
these driver profiles. depends on country and equipment.
If the vehicle is unlocked using the vehicle – Unlocking and locking.
key, the assigned personal driver profile will – Lights.
be activated. All settings stored in the
– Radio.
driver profile are automatically applied.
– Instrument cluster.
If several drivers use their own vehicle
keys, the vehicle will apply the personal set- – Programmable memory buttons.
tings as it is being unlocked. These settings – Volumes, sound.
are also restored, if the vehicle has been – Control Display.
used in the meantime by a person with a
different vehicle key. – Climate control.
Changes to the settings are automatically – Navigation.
stored in the driver profile currently acti- – PDC Park Distance Control.
vated. – Rearview camera.
If another driver profile is selected via the – Head-up Display.
Central Information Display (CID), the set- – MINI Driving Modes.
tings stored in it will be applied automati-
cally. The new driver profile is assigned to – Intelligent Safety.
the vehicle key that is currently in use.
There is an additional guest profile available Profile management
that is not assigned to any vehicle key: it
can be used to apply settings in the vehicle Selecting a driver profile
without changing the personal driver pro- Regardless of the vehicle key in use, a dif-
files. ferent driver profile may be activated. This
allows you to call up personal vehicle set-
Functional requirements tings, even if you did not unlock the vehicle
with your own vehicle key.
For the system to be able to identify the
driver profile associated to a particular Via the Central Information Display (CID):
driver, the detected vehicle key must be 1. "My MINI"
clearly allocated to the driver.
2. "Driver profiles"
This is the case when:
– The driver is only carrying his or her 3. Select driver profile.
own vehicle key. 4. "OK"
– The driver unlocks the vehicle. – All settings stored in the selected driver
– The driver gets into the vehicle through profile are automatically applied.
the driver's door. – The called-up driver profile is assigned
to the vehicle key being used at the
time.
72
– If the driver profile is already assigned The driver profile marked with this
to a different vehicle key, this driver icon can be reset.
profile will apply to both vehicle keys. 4. "Reset driver profile"
Using a guest profile 5. "OK"
The guest profile is for individual settings Exporting driver profiles
that are stored in none of the three personal
driver profiles. Most settings of the active driver profile
can be exported.
Exporting is helpful when storing and re-
1. "My MINI" trieving personal settings, for instance be-
2. "Driver profiles" fore delivering the vehicle to a workshop.
The stored driver profiles can be taken into
3. "Drive off (guest)" another vehicle.
4. "OK" Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The guest profile cannot be renamed. It is
not assigned to the vehicle key currently in 1. "My MINI"
use. 2. "Driver profiles"
3. Select driver profile.
Renaming a driver profile
The driver profile marked with this
A personal name can be assigned to the ac- icon can be exported.
tive driver profile to avoid confusion be-
4. "Export driver profile (USB)"
tween the driver profiles.
Select USB storage device as needed.
1. "My MINI" Importing driver profiles
2. "Driver profiles" Profiles stored on a USB device can be im-
3. Select driver profile. ported via the USB port.
The driver profile marked with this The existing settings of the active driver
icon can be renamed. profile are overwritten with the settings of
the imported driver profile.
4. "Change driver profile name"
5. Enter profile name.
1. "My MINI"
6. Select the icon.
2. "Driver profiles"
Resetting a driver profile 3. Select the driver profile to overwrite.
The settings of the driver profile currently The driver profile marked with this
in use are reset to their factory settings. icon can be overwritten.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 4. "Import driver profile (USB)"
1. "My MINI" Select USB storage device as needed.
2. "Driver profiles" 5. Select the driver profile to be imported.
3. Select driver profile.
73
Displaying driver profiles during start 3. "Doors/Key"

The driver profiles can be displayed at each 4. "Driver's door" or "All doors"
startup to select the desired profile. 5. Select the desired setting:
Via the Central Information Display (CID): – "Driver's door only"
1. "My MINI" Only the driver's door and the fuel
2. "Driver profiles" filler flap are unlocked. Pressing
again unlocks the entire vehicle.
3. "Show driver profiles at startup"
– "All doors"
System limits The entire vehicle is unlocked.
A clear assignment between the vehicle key
Tailgate
and driver may not be possible in the fol-
lowing cases, for example. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
– The passenger unlocks the vehicle with 1. "My MINI"
his or her own vehicle key, but another
2. "Vehicle settings"
person is driving.
– The driver unlocks the vehicle via Com- 3. "Doors/Key"
fort Access and has multiple vehicle 4.
keys with him or her. The text next to the icon indicates the
– The driver changes, but the vehicle is current setting.
not locked and unlocked. 5. Select the desired setting:
– Multiple vehicle keys are located out- – "Tailgate"
Only the tailgate is unlocked.
– "Tailgate and door(s)"
Settings The tailgate and the doors are un-
locked.
General information – "Tailgate opens after unlocking"
Depending on the package and country ver- The vehicle must be unlocked before
sion, various settings are available for the the tailgate can be used with the ve-
vehicle key functions. hicle key.
These settings are stored for the driver pro- – "Button lock"
file, refer to page 71, currently used. It is not possible to use the tailgate
via the vehicle key.
Unlocking Depending on the vehicle equipment and
country version, this setting may not be of-
Doors fered.
Automatic locking
1. "My MINI"
74
1. "My MINI" Alarm system

3. "Doors/Key" General information
4. Select the desired setting: When the vehicle is locked, the vehicle
alarm system reacts to the following
– "Lock automatically" changes:
The vehicle locks automatically after – Unauthorized opening of a door, the
a while if no door is opened after un- hood or the tailgate.
locking.
– Movements in the vehicle interior.
– "Lock after starting to drive"
– Changes in the vehicle tilt, for instance,
The vehicle locks automatically after during attempts at stealing a wheel or
you drive off. when towing the vehicle.
– Disconnected battery voltage.
Automatic unlocking
– Improper use of the socket for Onboard
Diagnosis.
1. "My MINI" – Locking the vehicle while a device is
2. "Vehicle settings" connected to the socket for the OBD On-
board-Diagnosis. For socket for the OBD
3. "Doors/Key" Onboard Diagnosis, refer to page 278.
4. "Unlock at end of trip" The alarm system signals these changes vis-
After the engine is switched off by ually and acoustically:
pressing the Start/Stop button, the – Acoustic alarm:
locked vehicle is automatically un-
locked. Depending on local regulations, the
acoustic alarm may be suppressed.
Confirmation signals from the – Visual alarm:
vehicle By flashing of the hazard warning sys-
tem and headlights, where required.
Do not modify the system to ensure func-
1. "My MINI" tion of the alarm system.
3. "Doors/Key"
4. Deactivate or activate the desired con-
firmation signals.
– "Flash for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by two flashes,
locking by one.
– With alarm system:
"Acoustic signal for lock/unlock"
Unlocking is signaled by one honk of
the horn.
75
Overview – Briefly press the button on the vehicle

key three times in succession.
Signals of the indicator light

– The indicator light flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
The alarm system is switched on.
– Indicator light flashes for approx.
Indicator light on the interior mirror. 10 seconds, then it flashes briefly every
2 seconds:
Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
Switching on/off sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
The alarm system is switched on or off as tailgate are not correctly closed. Cor-
soon as the vehicle is locked with the vehi- rectly closed access points are secured.
cle key or unlocked or locked via Comfort Interior motion sensor and tilt alarm
Access. sensor are not active, as doors, hood, or
trunk lid are not correctly closed. Cor-
Opening the doors with the alarm rectly closed access points are secured.
system switched on When the still open access points are
The alarm system is triggered when a door closed, the interior motion sensor and
is opened if the door was unlocked using tilt alarm sensor will be switched on.
the integrated key in the door lock. – The indicator light goes out after un-
Switching off the alarm, refer to page 77. locking:
The vehicle has not been tampered with.
Opening the tailgate with the alarm – The indicator light flashes after unlock-
system switched on ing until the engine ignition is switched
The tailgate can be opened even when the on, but no longer than approx. 5 mi-
alarm system is switched on. nutes:
After the tailgate is closed, it is locked and An alarm has been triggered.
monitored again provided the doors are
locked. The hazard warning system flashes Tilt alarm sensor
once. The tilt of the vehicle is monitored.
The alarm system responds in situations
Panic mode such as attempts to steal a wheel or when
You can trigger the alarm system if you find the vehicle is towed.
yourself in a dangerous situation.
– Press the button on the vehicle Interior motion sensor
key and hold for at least 3 sec- The windows and the glass sunroof must be
onds. closed for the system to function properly.
76
Avoiding unintentional alarms Power windows

General information
General information
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
If an accident of a certain severity occurs,
sensor can trigger an alarm, although no un-
the windows are automatically closed ex-
authorized action occurred.
cept a gap.
Possible situations for an unwanted alarm:
– In automatic car washes. Safety information
– In duplex garages.
– During transport on trains carrying ve- Warning
hicles, at sea or on a trailer. When operating the windows, body parts
– With animals in the vehicle. and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
– When the vehicle is locked after start of of injury or risk of damage to property.
fueling. Make sure that the area of movement of
The tilt alarm sensor and the interior mo- the windows is clear during opening and
tion sensor can be switched off in such sit- closing.
uations.
Switching off the tilt alarm sensor and

Overview
interior motion sensor On 3-door models
Press the button on the vehicle key
within 10 seconds as soon as the
vehicle is locked.
The indicator light lights up for approx.
2 seconds and then continues to flash.
The tilt alarm sensor and interior motion
sensor are switched off until the vehicle is
locked again.
Switching off the alarm Power windows

– Unlock the vehicle with the vehicle key.
– Unlock the vehicle with the integrated
key and switch on the ignition using the
emergency detection of the vehicle key,
refer to page 66.
– With Comfort Access: if you have the
vehicle key with you, unlock the vehicle
using the button on the driver's side or
passenger side door.
77
On 5-door models Closing via Comfort Access, refer to

page 69.
Jam protection system

Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts becoming jammed between the door
frame and window while a window is being
closed.
Power windows General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
Safety switch a window is being closed, the closing action
is interrupted.
Opening Safety information
– Press the switch to the resistance

Warning
point.
Accessories on the windows such as an-
The window opens while the switch is
tennas can impact jam protection. There is
being held.
a risk of injury. Do not install accessories
– Press the switch beyond the resist- in the area of movement of the windows.
ance point.
The window opens automatically. Press- Closing without the jam protection
ing the switch again stops the motion. system
Convenient opening with the vehicle key, In case of danger from the outside or if ice
refer to page 63. might prevent normal closing, proceed as
follows:
Closing
1. Pull the switch past the resistance
– Pull the switch to the resistance point and hold it there.
point.
The window closes with limited jam pro-
The window closes while the switch is tection. If the closing force exceeds a
being held. specific threshold, closing is inter-
rupted.
– Pull the switch beyond the resist-
ance point. 2. Pull the switch past the resistance
The window closes automatically if the point again within approx. 4 seconds
door is closed. Pulling the switch again and hold it there.
stops the motion. The window closes without jam protec-
Convenient closing with the vehicle key, re- tion.
fer to page 64.
78
On 5-door models: safety switch During initialization, the affected window

closes without jam protection.
General information
The safety switch can be used to prevent Warning
children, for instance from opening and When operating the windows, body parts
closing the rear windows using the and objects can be jammed. There is a risk
switches in the rear. of injury or risk of damage to property.
If an accident of a certain severity occurs, Make sure that the area of movement of
the safety function is switched off automati- the windows is clear during opening and
cally. closing.
Switching on/off 1. Open the affected window completely.

Press the button.
2. Pull the switch to the resistance
The LED lights up if the safety func- point and hold.
tion is switched on.
The window closes.
Malfunction 3. Continue holding the switch pulled

to the resistance point.
General information The window opens and closes once or
In certain situations a window can only be twice after approx. 15 seconds, depend-
operated to a limited extent. ing on the vehicle's equipment.
– After a power failure during the opening 4. Release switch.
or closing process, the a window can
only be operated to a limited extent. The
system must be initialized in this case. Panoramic glass sunroof
– The power window motors are equipped
with overheating protection. If a win- General information
dow is opened and closed several times
In the event of a severe accident, the glass
within a short period of time, the over-
sunroof is automatically closed.
heating protection switches the motor
off temporarily. Depending on the de-
gree of overheating, it may only be pos- Safety information
sible to close the window or it may not
be possible to operate it at all. Warning
In this case: allow the power window Body parts can be jammed when operating
motor to cool down. the glass sunroof. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement of
Initializing the system the glass sunroof is clear during opening
The system can be initialized when the ve- and closing.
hicle is stationary and the engine is run-
ning.
79
Overview Comfort position

In some models, the wind noises in the car's
interior are lowest when the glass sunroof
is not fully open. In these models, the auto-
matic function initially only opens the glass
sunroof up to this comfort position.
Pressing the switch again opens the glass
sunroof fully.
Closing glass sunroof

Tilting the glass sunroof With the glass sunroof open
Press back the switch up to or – Slide switch forward to the
beyond the resistance point resistance point and hold.
and release it. The glass sunroof is closed
The glass sunroof is raised. as long as the switch is
pressed and stops in the
raised position.
Opening glass sunroof – Press the switch forward beyond the re-
sistance point and release it.
When the glass sunroof is closed The glass sunroof is closed and stops in
Press the switch back beyond the raised position.
the resistance point and re- Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
lease it twice. tion.
The glass sunroof is opened. – Press the switch forward beyond the re-
Pressing the switch again sistance point and release it twice.
stops the motion. The glass sunroof is closed.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
With the glass sunroof completely tion.
raised
With the glass sunroof completely
– Slide switch back to the re-
raised
sistance point and hold.
The glass sunroof is Press the switch forward be-
opened as long as the yond the resistance point and
switch is pressed. release it.
– Press the switch back beyond the resist- The glass sunroof is closed.
ance point and release it.
The glass sunroof is opened.
Pressing the switch again stops the mo-
tion.
80
Opening/closing the sun protection 2. Push the switch forward again past the
resistance point and hold until the glass
sunroof closes without jam protection.
Make sure that the closing area is clear.
Initializing after a power

interruption
After a power failure during the opening or
closing process, the glass sunroof can only
be operated to a limited extent. The system
must be initialized in this case. MINI rec-
Use the handle to slide the sun protection
ommends having this work performed only
into the desired position.
by a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop.
Jam protection system
Concept
The jam protection prevents objects or body
parts from becoming jammed between the
roof and glass sunroof while the glass sun-
roof is closing.
General information
If resistance or a blockage is detected while
the glass sunroof is being closed, the clos-
ing action is interrupted.
The glass sunroof opens slightly.
Closing without the jam protection

system
If there is an external danger, proceed as
follows:
1. Push the switch forward past the resist-

ance point and hold it.
The glass sunroof closes with limited
jam protection. If the closing force ex-
ceeds a specific threshold, closing is in-
terrupted.
81
CONTROLS Seats, mirrors and steering wheel
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel

Vehicle features and options
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- With a backrest inclined too far to the
specific and optional features offered with rear, the efficacy of the safety belt can no
the series. It also describes features and longer be ensured. There is a risk of slid-
functions that are not necessarily available ing under the safety belt in an accident.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
tions or country versions. This also applies Adjust the seat prior to starting the trip.
to safety-related functions and systems. Adjust the backrest so that it is in the
When using these functions and systems, most upright position as possible and do
the applicable laws and regulations must be not adjust again while driving.
observed.
Warning
Sitting safely There is a risk of jamming when moving
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
An ideal seat position that meets the needs of damage to property. Make sure that the
of the occupants can make a vital contribu- area of movement of the seat is clear prior
tion to relaxed, fatigue-free driving. to any adjustment.
In the event of an accident, the correct seat
position plays an important role. Follow the
information in the following chapters:
Adjusting seats
– Seats, refer to page 82. Overview
– Safety belts, refer to page 85.
– Head restraints, refer to page 87.
– Airbags, refer to page 151.
Front seats
Safety information
1 Forward/backward
Warning
2 Thigh support
Seat setting while driving can lead to un-
3 Height
expected movements of the seat. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of ac- 4 Backrest tilt
cident. Only adjust the seat on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
82
Seats, mirrors and steering wheel CONTROLS
Forward/backward Backrest tilt
Warning
Unexpected movements of the seat while
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked.
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a
risk of accident. After adjusting, move the
seat forward or back slightly, making sure
the seat engages properly.
Pull the lever, and apply your weight to the

backrest or lift it off, as necessary.
Lumbar support
The curvature of the seat backrest can be
adjusted in a way that it supports the lum-
bar region of the spine. The lower back and
the spine are supported for upright posture.
Pull the lever and slide the seat in the de-
sired direction.
Height
Turn the wheel in order to increase or de-

crease the curvature.
Pull the lever up or press it down as often as

needed to reach the desired height.
83
Thigh support gages correctly by slightly moving forward

and back.
Fold the seat backrest forward

1. Pull lever up to the stop.
Pull the lever at the front of the seat and ad-

just the thigh support.
In 3-door models: entering the rear

2. Fold the seat backrest forward.
Safety information
3. Push the seat forward.
Warning Original position

There is a risk of jamming when moving The driver's seat features a mechanical
the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk memory function for forward/back and
of damage to property. Make sure that the backrest adjustment.
area of movement of the seat is clear prior
to any adjustment. 1. Push the seat back into the original po-
sition.
2. Fold back the backrest to lock the seat.
Warning If the backrest is folded back when the seat
Unexpected movements of the seat while is not yet in the original position, the seat
driving may occur if the seat is unlocked. engages in the current position. In this
Vehicle control could be lost. There is a case, manually adjust longitudinal direction,
risk of accident. After adjusting, move the refer to page 83.
seat forward or back slightly, making sure
the seat engages properly.
Warning
Unexpected movements of the rear seat
backrest while driving may occur if the
rear seat backrest is unlocked. Vehicle
control could be lost. There is a risk of in-
jury. Fold back and lock the backrests be-
fore driving. Make sure the backrest en-
84
Front seat heating Although airbags enhance safety by provid-

ing added protection, they do not replace
Overview safety belts.
If needed, disengage the safety belt in the
rear from the belt buckle on the side.
All belt fastening points are designed to
achieve the best possible protective effect
of the safety belts with proper use of the
safety belts and correct seat setting. Follow
notes on sitting safely, refer to page 82.
The two outer safety belt buckles of the rear
seat are intended for the persons sitting on
the left and right.
Seat heating
The center safety belt buckle of the rear
seat is intended for the person sitting in the
middle.
Switching on
Press the button once for each tem- Safety information
perature level.
The maximum temperature is reached when Warning
three LEDs are lit.
Use of a safety belt to buckle more than
If the trip is continued within approx. one person will potentially defeat the abil-
15 minutes after a stop, seat heating is ity of the safety belt to serve its protective
switched on automatically with the temper- function. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
ature selected last. ger to life. Do not allow more than one per-
When GREEN Mode is activated, refer to son to wear a single safety belt. Infants
page 236, the heating output is reduced. and children are not allowed on an occu-
pant's lap, but must be transported and se-
Switching off cured in designated child restraint sys-
tems.
Press and hold the button until the
LEDs go out.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
Safety belts safety belts, can be limited or lost when
safety belts are fastened incorrectly. An
General information incorrectly fastened safety belt can cause
additional injuries, for instance in the
The vehicle is fitted with four or five safety event of an accident, braking or evasive
belts to ensure occupants' safety. However, maneuvers. There is a risk of injuries or
they can only unfold their protective effect danger to life. Make sure that all occu-
when adjusted correctly. pants are wearing safety belts correctly.
Always make sure that safety belts are be-
ing worn by all occupants before driving off.
85
Buckling the safety belt

Warning 1. Guide the safety belt slowly over
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the shoulder and hip to put it on.
protective function of the middle safety
2. Insert the tongue plate into the safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
belt buckle. The safety belt buckle must
injuries or danger to life. If you are using
engage audibly.
the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
seat backrest.
Warning
The efficacy of safety gear, including
safety belts, may not be fully functional or
fail in the following situations:
– The safety belts or safety belt buckles
are damaged, soiled, or changed in
any other way. Unbuckling the safety belt
– Belt tensioners or belt retractors
1. Hold the safety belt firmly.
were modified.
Safety belts can be imperceptibly damaged 2. Press the red button in the belt buckle.
in the event of an accident. There is a risk 3. Guide the safety belt back into its roll-
of injuries or danger to life. Do not modify up mechanism.
safety belts, safety belt buckles, belt ten-
sioners, belt retractors or belt anchors and Safety belt reminder for driver's
keep them clean. Have the safety belts seat and front passenger seat
checked after an accident at the dealer’s
service center or another qualified service Display in the instrument cluster
The indicator light lights up and a
signal sounds. Make sure that the
Correct use of safety belts safety belts are positioned correctly.
– Wear the safety belt twist-free and tight The safety belt reminder can also be acti-
to your body over your lap and should- vated if objects are placed on the front pas-
ers. senger seat.
– Wear the safety belt deep on your hips
over your lap. The safety belt may not Safety belt reminder for rear seats
press on your stomach.
– Do not rub the safety belt against sharp General information
edges, or guide it or jam it in across The safety belt reminder is automatically
hard or fragile objects. activated each time the engine starts.
– Avoid thick clothing. The safety belt reminder is also activated
– Re-tighten the safety belt frequently up- when a passenger unbuckles a rear seat
ward around your upper body. safety belt during the trip.
86
Display in the instrument cluster – Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
The indicator light in the instrument cluster ers.
illuminates after the engine is started. – Do not hang objects, for instance
clothes hangers, directly on the head
Icon Description restraint.
Green: the safety belt is buckled – Only use accessories that have been
on the corresponding rear seat. determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
Red: the safety belt is not buckled – Do not use any accessories, for in-
on the corresponding rear seat. stance pillows, while driving.
Adjusting the height: John Cooper

Front head restraints Works sport seat
The height of the head restraints cannot be
Safety information set.
Warning Adjusting the height

Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head
restraint is as close as possible to the – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
back of the head. Adjust the distance push the head restraint down.
via the backrest tilt as needed. – To raise: push the head restraint up.
After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving Removing: John Cooper Works
the head restraint. There is a risk of injury.
Make sure that the area of movement is sport seat
clear when moving the head restraint. The head restraints cannot be removed.
Removing
Warning Only remove the head restraint if no one
Objects on the head restraint reduce the will be sitting in the seat in question.
protective effect in the head and neck
area. There is a risk of injury.
87
Warning
Body parts can be jammed when moving
Make sure that the area of movement is
clear when moving the head restraint.
Warning
1. If necessary, fold the rear seat backrest
Objects on the head restraint reduce the
forward.
protective effect in the head and neck
2. Pull head restraint up as far as possible. area. There is a risk of injury.
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the – Do not use seat or head restraint cov-
head restraint out completely. ers.
– Do not hang objects, for instance
Installing clothes hangers, directly on the head
Proceed in the reverse order to install the restraint.
head restraint. – Only use accessories that have been
determined to be safe for attachment
to a head restraint.
Rear head restraints – Do not use any accessories, for in-
stance pillows, while driving.
Safety information
Adjusting the height
Warning
Removal or incorrect adjustment of head
restraints can cause injuries in the head
and neck area. There is a risk of injury.
– Before driving, install the removed
head restraints on the occupied seats.
– Adjust the head restraint so its center
supports the back of the head at as
close to eye level as possible.
– Adjust the distance so that the head – To lower: press the button, arrow 1, and
restraint is as close as possible to the push the head restraint down.
back of the head. Adjust the distance – To raise: push the head restraint up.
via the backrest tilt as needed. After setting the height, make sure that the
head restraint engages correctly.
88
Fold down Mirrors

Exterior mirrors
General information
The mirror on the front passenger side is
more curved than the driver's side mirror.
Safety information
– To fold down: press the button, arrow 1,
and press down the head restraint, ar- Warning
row 2. Objects reflected in the mirror are closer
– Forward: fold the head restraint toward than they appear. The distance to the traf-
the front as far as it will go. Make sure fic behind could be incorrectly estimated,
that the head restraint engages cor- for instance while changing lanes. There is
rectly. a risk of accident. Estimate the distance to
the traffic behind by looking over your
shoulder.
Removing
Only remove the head restraint if no one
will be sitting in the seat in question. Overview
1 Adjusting
1. Fold down the rear seat backrest, refer
to page 226, in question. 2 Selecting a mirror, Automatic Curb Mon-
itor
2. Pull head restraint up against the resist-
ance. 3 Folding in and out
3. Press the button, arrow 1, and pull the
head restraint out completely. Selecting a mirror
To change over to the other mirror:
Installing
Slide the switch.
Proceed in the reverse order to install the
head restraint.
89
Adjusting electrically Interior mirror, manually dimmable

Press the button.
Flip lever
The mirror movement follows the
button movement.
Malfunction
In case of an electrical malfunction, adjust
the mirror by pressing the edges of the mir-
ror glass.
Automatic heating
Both exterior mirrors are automatically To reduce the blinding effect of the interior
heated as needed and when the ignition is mirror, flip the lever forward.
switched on.
Automatic dimming feature Turn button

The exterior mirror on the driver's side is
automatically dimmed. Photocells in the
car's interior mirror, refer to page 91, are
used to control this.
Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior

mirror
Concept
If reverse gear is engaged, the mirror glass Turn the button to reduce the blinding ef-
on the front passenger side is tilted down- fect by the interior mirror.
ward. This improves your view of the curb
and other low-lying obstacles when parking,
for instance.
Activating
1. slide the switch to the driver's
side mirror position.
2. Engage selector lever position R.
Deactivating
Slide the switch to the passenger's side mir-
ror position.
90
Interior mirror, automatic dimming Adjusting

feature
Overview
1. Fold the lever down.

2. Move the steering wheel to the prefer-
red height and angle to suit your seat
Photocells are used for control: position.
– In the mirror glass. 3. Fold the lever back up.
– On the back of the mirror.
Heated steering wheel
Overview
– Keep the photocells clean.
– Do not cover the area between the inte-
rior mirror and the windshield.
Steering wheel
Safety information
Warning Heated steering wheel

Steering wheel adjustments while driving
can lead to unexpected steering wheel
movements. Vehicle control could be lost. Switching on/off
There is a risk of accident. Adjustng the Press the button.
steering wheel while the vehicle is sta-
tionary only.
– On: the LED lights up.
– Off: the LED goes out.
If the trip is resumed within approx. 15 mi-
nutes after an intermediate stop, the heated
steering wheel switches on automatically if
the function was switched on at the end of
the last trip.
91
CONTROLS Transporting children safely
Transporting children safely

Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- A heated vehicle may result in death to
specific and optional features offered with persons, especially children, or animals.
the series. It also describes features and There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
functions that are not necessarily available Do not leave persons, especially children,
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- or animals unattended in the vehicle.
When using these functions and systems, Warning
the applicable laws and regulations must be Exposure to intense sunlight can cause
observed. child restraint systems and their compo-
nents to become very hot. Persons may
sustain burn injuries when touching the
The right place for children hot components. There is a risk of injury.
Do not expose the child restraint system to
Safety information direct sunlight or cover where necessary.
If necessary, let the child restraint system
cool down before transporting a child. Do
Warning not leave children unattended in the vehi-
Unattended children or animals in the ve- cle.
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
stance due to the following actions: Transport children in the rear seat
General information
– Releasing the parking brake.
Accident research shows that the safest
– Opening and closing the doors or place for children is in the rear seat.
windows.
Children younger than 13 years of age or
– Engaging selector lever position N. shorter than 5 ft/150 cm should be trans-
– Using vehicle equipment. ported in the rear seat in suitable child re-
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do straint systems designed for the age, weight
not leave children or animals unattended and size of the child. Children 13 years of
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with age or older must wear a safety belt as soon
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. as a suitable child restraint system can no
longer be used due to their age, weight, or
size.
92
Transporting children safely CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
Warning The stability of the child restraint system
is limited or compromised with incorrect
The safety belt cannot be fastened cor- seat setting or improper installation of the
rectly on children shorter than 5 ft, child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
150 cm without suitable additional child danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
restraint systems. The efficacy of safety straint system fits securely against the
gear, including safety belts, can be limited backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
or lost when safety belts are fastened in- tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
correctly. An incorrectly fastened safety adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
belt can cause additional injuries, for in- backrests are securely engaged or locked.
stance in the event of an accident, braking If possible, adjust the height of the head
or evasive maneuvers. There is a risk of in- restraints or remove them.
juries or danger to life. Secure children
shorter than 5 ft, 150 cm using suitable
child restraint systems.
Installing child restraint sys-
Children on the front passenger tems
seat
General information
General information Pay attention to the specifications of the
Before using a child restraint system on the child restraint system manufacturer when
front passenger seat, ensure that the front, selecting, installing, and using child re-
knee, and side airbags on the front passen- straint systems.
ger side are deactivated. For automatic de- In order to facilitate the installation of a
activation of front-seat passenger airbags, back-facing child restraint system in the
refer to page 153. rear:
Safety information Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
Warning Safety information

Active front-seat passenger airbags can in-
jure a child in a child restraint system Warning
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- The protective effect of child restraint sys-
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and tems and their fastening systems which
that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica- have been damaged or exposed to an acci-
tor light lights up. dent can be limited or lost. A child cannot
be properly restrained in the event of an
accident, braking or evasive maneuvers.
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
93
Do not use child restraint systems which that the PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF indica-
have been damaged or exposed to an acci- tor light lights up.
dent.
If a child restraint system and its fasten- Before installing a child restraint system in
ing system has been damaged or exposed the front passenger seat, make sure that the
to an accident, have these systems front, knee and side airbags on the front
checked and replaced by the dealer's serv- passenger side are deactivated.
ice center or another qualified service cen- Deactivate the front-seat passenger airbags
ter or repair shop. automatically, refer to page 153.
Seat position and height

Warning After installing a child restraint system,
The stability of the child restraint system move the front passenger seat as far back as
is limited or compromised with incorrect possible and adjust its height to the highest
seat setting or improper installation of the and thus best possible position for the belt
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or and to offer optimal protection in the event
danger to life. Make sure that the child re- of an accident.
straint system fits securely against the If the upper anchorage of the safety belt is
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest located in front of the belt guide of the child
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly seat, move the front passenger seat care-
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and fully forward until the best possible belt
backrests are securely engaged or locked. guide position is reached.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them. Child seat security
On the rear seats

In order to facilitate the installation of a
back-facing child restraint system:
Move the front passenger seat as far up as
possible before folding down the backrest.
On the front passenger seat

The rear safety belts and the front passen-
Deactivating airbags ger safety belt can be permanently locked to
fasten child restraint systems.
Warning
Active front-seat passenger airbags can in- Locking the safety belt
jure a child in a child restraint system
1. Pull out the belt strap completely.
when the airbags are activated. There is a
risk of injury. Make sure that the front- 2. Secure the child restraint system with
seat passenger airbags are deactivated and the safety belt.
94
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in and and that the LATCH child restraint fixing
pull it tight against the child restraint system fits securely against the backrest.
system. The safety belt is disabled.
Unlocking the safety belt Warning

1. Unbuckle the safety belt buckle. The attachment points for child restraint
2. Remove the child restraint system. systems in the vehicle are intended for at-
taching child restraint systems only.
3. Allow the belt strap to be pulled in com- When other objects are mounted, the an-
pletely. chors can be damaged. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. At-
tach only child restraint systems at the
LATCH child restraint fixing corresponding attachment points.
system
Position
General information
LATCH: Lower Anchors and Tether for Chil- Icon Meaning
dren.
The corresponding icon
Pay attention to the operating and safety in- shows the mounts for the
formation from the child restraint system lower LATCH anchors.
manufacturer when installing and using
Seats equipped with lower
LATCH child restraint fixing systems.
anchors are marked with a
pair, (2), of LATCH symbols.
Mounts for the lower LATCH
For vehicles equipped with
anchors a middle seat:
General information It is not recommended to
use the inner lower anchors
The lower anchors may be used to attach of standard outer LATCH
the CRS to the vehicle seat up to a com- positions to fasten a child
bined child and CRS weight of 65 lbs/30 kg restraint system on the
when the child is restrained by the internal middle seat. Use the vehicle
harnesses. safety belt instead for the
middle seat.
Safety information
Before installing LATCH child
Warning restraint fixing systems
If the LATCH child restraint fixing sys- Pull the safety belt away from the area of
tems are not correctly engaged, the protec- the child restraint system.
tive effect of the LATCH child restraint
fixing system is limited. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. Make sure that
the lower anchors are securely engaged
95
Assembly of LATCH child restraint Anchors

fixing systems The respective icon shows the an-
1. Install child restraint system, see manu- chor for the upper retaining strap.
facturer's information. Seats with an upper top tether are
2. Ensure that both LATCH anchors are marked with this icon. It can be found on
properly engaged. the rear seat backrest or the rear window
shelf.
Child restraint systems with tether
strap Routing the retaining strap
Safety information
Warning
If the upper retaining strap is incorrectly
used for the child restraint system, the
protective effect is reduced. There is a risk
of injury. Make sure that the upper retain-
ing strap does not run over sharp edges
and is not twisted as it passes the upper 1 Direction of travel
anchor. 2 Head restraint
3 Hook for upper retaining strap
4 Anchor
Warning
5 Seat backrest
If the rear backrest is not locked, the pro-
tective effect of the child restraint system 6 Upper retaining strap
is limited or there is none. In certain situa-
tions, for instance braking maneuvers or Attaching the upper retaining strap to
in case of an accident, the rear backrest the anchor
can fold forward. There is a risk of injuries
1. Raise the head restraint, if needed.
or danger to life. Make sure that the rear
backrests are locked. 2. On the rear seat: Guide the upper retain-
ing strap between or along both sides of
the supports of the head restraint to the
Warning anchor.
The attachment points for child restraint 3. Attach the hook of the retaining strap to
systems in the vehicle are intended for at- the anchor on the rear seat.
taching child restraint systems only. 4. Tighten the retaining strap by pulling it
When other objects are mounted, the an- down.
chors can be damaged. There is a risk of
injury or risk of damage to property. At-
tach only child restraint systems at the
corresponding attachment points.
96
ON 5-door models: Locking

the doors and windows
Doors
Push the locking lever on the rear doors up.

The door can now be opened from the out-
side only.
Safety switch for the rear

Press the button on the driver's
door if children are being trans-
ported in the rear.
This locks various functions so that they
cannot be operated from the rear: safety
switch, refer to page 79.
97
CONTROLS Driving
Driving
Vehicle features and options To save battery power when the engine is
off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electrical consumers.
Ignition off
functions that are not necessarily available Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- button again without stepping on the clutch
tions or country versions. This also applies pedal.
to safety-related functions and systems. Steptronic transmission: shift to selector
When using these functions and systems, lever position P, press the Start/Stop button
the applicable laws and regulations must be again without stepping on the brake.
observed. All indicator lights in the instrument cluster
go out.
To save battery power when the engine is
Start/Stop button off, switch off the ignition and any unneces-
sary electrical consumers.
Concept
Pressing the Start/Stop button Safety measures
switches the ignition on or off The ignition is switched off automatically in
and starts the engine. the following situations while the vehicle is
Steptronic transmission: the stationary and the engine is off:
engine starts in selector lever – When locking the vehicle, even if the
position P or N with the brake pedal pressed low beams are switched on.
when you press the Start/Stop button. – Shortly before the battery is discharged
Manual transmission: the engine starts with completely, so that the engine can still
the clutch pedal pressed when the Start/ be started. This function is only availa-
Stop button is pressed. ble when the low beams are switched
off.
– When opening or closing the driver
Ignition on door, if the driver's safety belt is un-
Manual transmission: press the Start/Stop buckled and the low beams are switched
button without stepping on the clutch off.
pedal.
– While the driver's safety belt is unbuck-
Steptronic transmission: press the Start/ led with driver's door open and low
Stop button, but do not press on the brake beams off.
pedal at the same time.
– When the front doors are opened if
All vehicle systems are ready for operation. there is no other person sitting in the
Most of the indicator/warning lights in the front seats.
instrument cluster light up for a varied
length of time.
98
Driving CONTROLS
– The low beams switch to parking lights – Shortly before the battery is discharged
after some minutes of no use. completely, so that the engine can still
Steptronic transmission: when switching off be started.
the ignition, the selector lever position P is
engaged automatically if the selector lever
position R, D or M/S is engaged. Starting the engine
Radio-ready state Safety information
General information
DANGER
In the radio-ready state, certain electrical
consumers remain ready for operation. If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
Activating can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
With the engine running, press the Start/ less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
Stop button. haust gases can also accumulate outside of
If the engine is not running and the ignition the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
is switched on: the system automatically ac- the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
tivates radio-ready state when the door is ventilation.
opened if the lights are switched off or the
daytime running lights are switched on.
Radio-ready state remains active if, for in- Warning
stance the ignition is automatically An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
switched off for the following reasons: and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
– Opening or closing the driver's door. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
– Unfastening of the driver's safety belt. cle against rolling.
– When automatically switching from low In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
beams to parking lights. cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
lowing:
Switching off automatically – Set the parking brake.
The radio-ready state is switched off auto- – On uphill grades or on a downhill
matically in the following situations: slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
– If the driver's or front passenger door is rection of the curb.
opened when exiting the vehicle, with – On uphill grades or on a downhill
the engine switched off manually. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
– If the ignition is switched off manually stance with a wheel chock.
with the Start/Stop button.
– After approx. 8 minutes.
NOTICE
– When the vehicle is locked using the
central locking system. Repeated attempts to start the vehicle or
repeated starting of the vehicle in rapid
succession can cause the starter to over-
heat. This also results in unburned or inad-
99
CONTROLS Driving
equately burned fuel, and can cause the Engine stop

catalytic converter to overheat. There is a
potential damage. Avoid repeated starting Safety information
of the vehicle, particularly repeated start-
ing in rapid succession. Warning
Unattended children or animals in the ve-
Gasoline engine hicle can cause the vehicle to move and
Depending on the motorization, the full stance due to the following actions:
drive power may not be available for ap-
proximately 30 seconds after starting the – Pressing the Start/Stop button.
engine. In this case, the vehicle will not ac- – Releasing the parking brake.
celerate as usual. – Opening and closing the doors or
windows.
Steptronic transmission – Engaging selector lever position N.
Starting the engine
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do
1. Depress the brake pedal. not leave children or animals unattended
2. Engage selector lever position P or N. in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with
3. Press the Start/Stop button. you when exiting and lock the vehicle.
The ignition is activated automatically for a
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en-
gine starts. Warning
An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Manual transmission and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
Starting the engine cle against rolling.
1. Depress the brake pedal. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift to lowing:
neutral.
– Set the parking brake.
– On uphill grades or on a downhill
The ignition is activated automatically for a slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
brief time and is stopped as soon as the en- rection of the curb.
gine starts.
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
stance with a wheel chock.
100
Driving CONTROLS
Steptronic transmission Engine stop

Switching off the engine Functional requirements
1. When the vehicle is stationary, apply The engine is switched off automatically
the parking brake. during a stop under the following condi-
2. Engage selector lever position P. tions:
Manual transmission:
– Neutral is engaged and the clutch pedal
The engine is switched off.
is not pressed.
The radio-ready state is switched on.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
driver's door is closed.
Manual transmission
Steptronic transmission:
Switching off the engine – The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
1. With the vehicle at a standstill, press
the Start/Stop button. – The brake pedal remains depressed
while the vehicle is stopped.
The engine is switched off.
– The driver's safety belt is buckled or the
The radio-ready state is switched on.
driver's door is closed.
2. Shift into first gear or reverse. In order to be able to release the brake
3. Set the parking brake. pedal, engage the selector lever in position
P. The engine remains off.
To continue driving depress the brake
Auto Start/Stop function pedal. When a gear is engaged, the engine
starts automatically.
Concept The air flow from the air conditioner is re-
The Auto Start/Stop function helps save duced when the engine is switched off.
fuel. The system switches off the engine
during a stop, for instance in traffic jam or Steptronic transmission: manual
at traffic lights. The ignition remains engine stop
switched on. The engine starts automati- Depending on the vehicle equipment and
cally for driving off. country version, the engine can be switched
After each engine start using the Start/Stop off manually, if the engine was not switched
button, the Auto Start/Stop function is off automatically when the vehicle stopped:
ready and is activated at speeds faster than – Press the brake pedal forcefully again
about 3 mph/5 km/h. from the current pedal position.
Depending on the selected drive mode, refer – Engage selector lever position P.
to page 177, the system is automatically ac- If all functional preconditions are fulfilled,
tivated or deactivated. the engine switches off.
101
CONTROLS Driving
Displays in the instrument cluster – Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
Instrument cluster without enhanced – The vehicle battery charge is very low.
features: display
– At higher elevations.
The display indicates that the – The hood is unlocked.
Auto Start/Stop function is
ready for an Automatic engine – The parking assistant is activated.
start. – Stop-and-go traffic.
– Selector lever in selector lever position
R, N or M/S.
The display indicates that the
conditions for an automatic
engine stop have not been Starting the engine
met. The engine starts automatically under the
following conditions:
– Manual transmission: clutch pedal is
Instrument cluster with enhanced pressed.
features: display – Steptronic transmission: by releasing
The display indicates that the the brake pedal.
Auto Start/Stop function is After the engine starts, accelerate as usual.
ready for an Automatic engine
start. Safety mode
After the engine switches off automatically,
The display indicates that the it will not start again automatically if any
conditions for an automatic one of the following conditions are met:
engine stop have not been – The driver's safety belt is unbuckled and
met. the driver's door is open.
– The hood was unlocked.
Functional limitations Some indicator lights light up for a varied
length of time.
The engine is not switched off automatically
in the following situations: The engine can only be started via the
Start/Stop button.
– Outside temperature too low.
– The outside temperature is high and au- Functional limitations
tomatic climate control is running. Even if driving off was not intended, the de-
– The car's interior has not yet been activated engine starts up automatically in
heated or cooled to the required level. the following situations:
– The engine is not yet at operating tem- – Excessive warming of the car's interior
perature. when air conditioning is switched on.
– The wheels are at a sharp angle or the – When the steering wheel is turned.
steering wheel is being turned. – Steptronic transmission: change from
– After driving in reverse. selector lever position D to R, N or M/S.
102
Driving CONTROLS
– Steptronic transmission: change from Switching the system on/off

selector lever position P to R, N, D or
M/S. Using the button
– The vehicle begins rolling.
– Fogging of the windows when the auto-
matic climate control is switched on.
– The vehicle battery charge is very low.
– Excessive cooling of the car's interior
when the heating is switched on.
– Manual transmission: low brake vacuum
pressure; this can occur, for instance if
the brake pedal is depressed a number
of times in succession. Press the button.
Additional Auto Start/Stop – LED comes on: auto Start/Stop function

function is deactivated.
Depending on the vehicle equipment and The engine is started during an auto-
country-specific version, the vehicle fea- matic engine stop.
tures a variety of sensors for assessing the The engine can only be stopped or
traffic situation. The Auto Start/Stop func- started via the Start/Stop button.
tion uses this information to adapt to vari-
ous traffic situations in a proactive manner. – LED goes out: auto Start/Stop function
is activated.
For instance, this applies to the following
situations: Switching off the vehicle during an
– When a situation is detected in which automatic engine stop
the stopping time is expected to be very
short, the engine is not switched off au- During an automatic engine stop, the vehi-
tomatically. A message appears on the cle can be switched off permanently, for in-
Control Display, depending on the situa- stance when leaving it.
tion. Steptronic transmission:
– When a situation is detected in which 1. Engage selector lever position P.
the vehicle needs to drive off immedi-
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
ately, the engine is started automati-
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
cally.
The function may be restricted if the navi-
gation data is invalid, outdated or not avail- 3. Set the parking brake.
able, for example. Manual transmission:
1. Press the Start/Stop button. The ignition
is switched off. The Auto Start/Stop
2. Shift into first gear or reverse.
3. Set the parking brake.
103
CONTROLS Driving
Engine start as usual via Start/Stop button. The indicator light lights up red. The
parking brake is set.
Automatic deactivation Lower light: indicator light in Cana-
In certain situations, the Auto Start/Stop dian models
function is deactivated automatically for
safety reasons, for instance if no driver is If for once use during driving is required,
detected. engage the parking brake slightly and hold
the button down.
Malfunction To prevent corrosion and one-sided brake
The Auto Start/Stop function no longer action, lightly apply the parking brake peri-
switches off the engine automatically. A odically while coasting, if traffic conditions
Check Control message is displayed. It is permit.
possible to continue driving. Have the sys- The brake lights will not light up if the park-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or ing brake is set.
another qualified service center or repair
shop.
Releasing
Parking brake, manual

Safety information
Warning
and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi- Raise lever slightly, press the button and
cle against rolling. guide the lever down.
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-
lowing: Parking brake, electric
– On uphill grades or on a downhill Concept
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- The parking brake is used to prevent the ve-
rection of the curb. hicle from rolling when it is parked.
slope, also secure the vehicle, for in- Safety information
Warning
Applying An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
The lever automatically engages after being and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
pulled up. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
cle against rolling.
104
Driving CONTROLS
In order to ensure that the vehicle is se- Setting

lowing: With a stationary vehicle
Pull the switch.
The LED lights up.
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb. The indicator light lights up red. The
– On uphill grades or on a downhill parking brake is set.
stance with a wheel chock. Depending on the stopping situation, the
parking brake is engaged automatically.
Steptronic transmission: in some parking
Warning situations, the parking brake is automati-
Unattended children or animals in the ve- cally engaged, when selector lever posi-
hicle can cause the vehicle to move and tion P is engaged. In these cases, the park-
endanger themselves and traffic, for in- ing brake is released automatically when
stance due to the following actions: you leave the selector lever position P.
– Releasing the parking brake. While driving
– Opening and closing the doors or To use as emergency brake while driving:
windows. Pull the switch and hold it. The vehicle
– Engaging selector lever position N. brakes hard while the switch is being
pulled.
There is a risk of accidents or injuries. Do The indicator light lights up red, a
not leave children or animals unattended signal sounds and the brake lights
in the vehicle. Take the vehicle key with light up.
you when exiting and lock the vehicle. A Check Control message is displayed.
If the vehicle is decelerated to a complete
Overview stop, the parking brake is engaged.
Releasing
Releasing manually
1. Switch on the ignition.
2. Manual transmission: press the

switch while the brake pedal is pressed.
Steptronic transmission: press the

Parking brake switch while the brake is pressed or se-
lector lever position P is set.
105
CONTROLS Driving
The parking brake is released.

2. Press the switch while stepping on
Automatic release in cars with the brake pedal or selector lever posi-
tion P is set.
Steptronic transmission
It may take several seconds for the brake to
For automatic release, step on the accelera-
be reactivated. Some mechanical sounds as-
tor pedal.
sociated with this process are normal.
The indicator light in the instrument
The parking brake is automatically released cluster goes out as soon as the park-
when you step on the accelerator under the ing brake is ready for operation.
following conditions:
– Engine on.
– Gear position engaged.
Turn signal, high beams, head-
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
light flasher
Automatic release in cars with manual
transmission Turn signal
Drive off as usual. The parking brake disen-
gages when the clutch pedal is released. Using turn signals
Under the following conditions, the parking
brake is automatically released:
– Engine on.
– Gear engaged.
– Driver buckled in and doors closed.
– Engine power is sufficient to drive off.
Malfunction Press the lever past the resistance point.

If the parking brake fails or malfunctions, Canada: the lever returns into its starting
secure the vehicle against rolling before ex- position after actuation. To switch off man-
iting. ually, slightly tap the lever to the resistance
A Check Control message is displayed. point.
Secure the vehicle against rolling away, for
instance with a wheel chock, after exiting Triple turn signal activation
the vehicle. Lightly tap the lever up or down.
The triple turn signal duration can be ad-
After a power failure justed.
Re-activating the parking brake
1. Switch on the ignition. 1. "My MINI"
106
Driving CONTROLS
3. "Lighting" Safety information

4. "Exterior lighting"
5. "One-touch turn signal" Warning
6. Select the desired setting. If the wipers start moving in the folded
away state, body parts can be jammed or
Settings are stored for the profile currently
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle.
used.
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is
Signaling briefly switched off when the wipers are in the
Press the lever to the resistance point and folded away state and the wipers are
hold it there for as long as you want the folded in when switching on.
turn signal to flash.
Malfunction NOTICE
Unusually rapid flashing of the indicator If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
light indicates that a turn signal bulb has the wiper blades can be torn off and the
failed. wiper motor can overheat when switching
on. There is a risk of damage to property,
High beams, headlight flasher among other potential damage. Defrost the
Press the lever forward or pull it backward. windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Switching on
– High beams on, arrow 1.

The high beams light up when the low
– High beams off/headlight flasher, ar- Press the lever up until the desired position
row 2. is reached.
– Resting position of the wipers, posi-
tion 0.
Wiper system – Intermittent operation or rain sensor,
position 1.
General information – Normal wiper speed, position 2.
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is – Fast wiper speed, position 3.
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
107
CONTROLS Driving
When travel is interrupted with the wiper Safety information

system switched on: when travel continues,
the wipers resume at their previous speed.
NOTICE
Switching off and brief wipe If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating

– Switching off: press the lever down until
it reaches its standard position.
– Brief wipe: press the lever down from
the standard position.
The lever automatically returns to its in-
itial position when released. Press the lever up once from its standard
position, arrow 1.
Interval mode or rain sensor Wiping is started.
The LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Concept In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
The rain sensor automatically controls the not start.
time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
Deactivating
General information Press the lever back into the standard posi-
tion.
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
108
Driving CONTROLS
Setting the frequency or sensitivity of Cleaning the windshield

the rain sensor
Pull the lever.

Turn the thumbwheel. The system sprays washer fluid on the
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter- windshield and activates the wipers briefly.
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen- Windshield washer nozzles
sor sensitivity.
The washer jets are automatically heated
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the whenever the ignition is switched on.
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the Rear window wiper
rain sensor.
Overview
Windshield washer system
Safety information
Warning
The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti- Switching on
freeze, if needed.
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi-
NOTICE tion 0.
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty, – Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re-
the wash pump cannot work as intended. verse gear is engaged, the system
There is a risk of damage to property, switches to continuous operation.
among other potential damage. Do not use
the washer system when the washer fluid Clean the rear window
reservoir is empty. Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
109
CONTROLS Driving
– In resting position: turn the switch Folding away the wipers

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto- 1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
matically returns to its idle position
when released. 2. Press and hold the wiper lever down, un-
til the wipers stop in a close to vertical
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
position.
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Fold-away position of the wipers

Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
to be folded away from the windshield. 3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield.
General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
under frosty conditions, for instance.
Safety information
Warning
If the wipers start moving in the folded
damage may occur to parts of the vehicle. Folding down the wipers
to property. Make sure that the vehicle is After the wipers are folded back down, the
switched off when the wipers are in the wiper system must be reactivated.
folded away state and the wipers are 1. Fold the wipers back down onto the
folded in when switching on. windshield.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return
NOTICE
to their resting position and are ready
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, again for operation.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the
wiper motor can overheat when switching
among other potential damage. Defrost the
windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
110
Driving CONTROLS
Canada: wiper system – Normal wiper speed: tap up once.

– Fast wiper speed: tap up twice or tap
once beyond the resistance point.
General information
The lever automatically returns to its initial
Do not use the wipers if the windshield is
position when released.
dry, as this may damage the wiper blades or
cause them to become worn more quickly.
Safety information
Warning
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are Press the lever down.
folded in when switching on. – To switch off from fast wiper speed:
press down twice.
– To switch off from normal wiper speed:
NOTICE press down once.
If the wipers are frozen to the windshield, – Brief wipe: press down once.
the wiper blades can be torn off and the The lever automatically returns to its initial
wiper motor can overheat when switching position when released.
among other potential damage. Defrost the Interval mode or rain sensor
windshield prior to switching the wipers
on. Concept
The rain sensor automatically controls the
Switching on time between wipes depending on the in-
tensity of the rainfall.
General information
The sensor is located on the windshield, di-
rectly in front of the interior mirror. With-
out the rain sensor, the frequency of the
wiper operation is preset.
Tap up the lever or press it past the resist-

ance point.
111
CONTROLS Driving
Safety information Setting the frequency or sensitivity of

the rain sensor
NOTICE
If the rain sensor is activated, the wipers
can accidentally start moving in vehicle
washes. There is a risk of damage to prop-
erty, among other potential damage. Deac-
tivate the rain sensor in vehicle washes.
Activating/deactivating
Turn the thumbwheel.
With deactivated rain sensor: set the inter-
val.
With activated rain sensor: set the rain sen-
sor sensitivity.
Up: short interval or high sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Down: long interval or low sensitivity of the
rain sensor.
Press the button on the wiper lever.
Wiping is started.
If the vehicle is equipped with a rain sensor:
Windshield washer system
the LED in the wiper lever is illuminated.
Safety information
In frosty conditions, wiper operation may
not start.
If a journey is interrupted with the rain sen- Warning
sor switched on: if the trip is resumed The washer fluid can freeze onto the win-
within approx. 15 minutes, the rain sensor dow at low temperatures and obstruct the
is automatically activated again. view. There is a risk of accident. Only use
the washer systems, if the washer fluid
cannot freeze. Use washer fluid with anti-
freeze, if needed.
NOTICE
When the washer fluid reservoir is empty,
the wash pump cannot work as intended.
There is a risk of damage to property,
the washer system when the washer fluid
reservoir is empty.
112
Driving CONTROLS
Cleaning the windshield – In resting position: turn the switch

downward, arrow 3. The switch auto-
matically returns to its idle position
when released.
– In intermittent mode: turn the switch
further, arrow 2. The switch automati-
cally returns to its interval position
when released.
The function is deactivated if the washer
fluid reservoir level is low.
Pull the lever.
Fold-away position of the wipers
The system sprays washer fluid on the
windshield and activates the wipers briefly. Concept
The fold-away position enables the wipers
Windshield washer nozzles to be folded away from the windshield.
The washer jets are automatically heated
whenever the ignition is switched on. General information
Helpful when changing the wiper blades or
Rear window wiper under frosty conditions, for instance.
Overview Safety information
Warning
switched off when the wipers are in the
folded away state and the wipers are
folded in when switching on.
Switching on
Turn the outer switch upward.
– Resting position of the wiper, posi- NOTICE
tion 0. If the wipers are frozen to the windshield,
– Intermittent mode, arrow 1. When re- the wiper blades can be torn off and the
verse gear is engaged, the system wiper motor can overheat when switching
switches to continuous operation. on. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Defrost the
Clean the rear window windshield prior to switching the wipers
on.
Turn the outer switch in the desired direc-
tion.
113
CONTROLS Driving
Folding away the wipers Washer fluid

1. Switch the ignition on and off again.
2. Press the wiper lever up past the point General information
of resistance and hold it for approx. All washer nozzles are supplied from one
3 seconds, until the wipers remain in a reservoir.
nearly vertical position.
Use a mixture of tap water and windshield
washer concentrate. If desired, a windshield
washer concentrate containing antifreeze
can be used.
Recommended minimum fill quantity:
0.2 US gal/1 liter.
Safety information
Warning
3. Fold the wipers all the way away from
the windshield. Some antifreeze agents can contain harm-
ful substances and are flammable. There is
a risk of fire and a risk of injury. Follow
the instructions on the containers. Keep
antifreeze away from ignition sources. Do
not refill operating materials into different
bottles. Store operating materials out of
reach of children.
United States: the washer fluid mixture ra-
tio is regulated by the U.S. EPA and many
individual states; do not exceed the allow-
able washer fluid dilution ratio limits that
Folding down the wipers apply. Follow the usage instructions on the
After the wipers are folded back down, the washer fluid container.
wiper system must be reactivated. Use of BMW’s Windshield Washer Con-
1. Fold the wipers back down onto the centrate or the equivalent is recom-
windshield. mended.
3. Push wiper lever down. Wipers return Warning
to their resting position and are ready
again for operation. Washer fluid can ignite and catch fire on
contact with hot engine parts. There is a
risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only add washer fluid when the en-
gine is cooled down. Next, fully close the
lid of the washer fluid reservoir.
114
Driving CONTROLS
Manual transmission
NOTICE
Silicon-containing additives in the washer Safety information
fluid for the water-repelling effect on the
windows can lead to damage to the wash-
ing system. There is a risk of damage to Warning
property, among other potential damage. An unsecured vehicle can begin to move
Do not add silicon-containing additives to and possibly roll away. There is a risk of
the washer fluid. accident. Before exiting, secure the vehi-
NOTICE cured against rolling away, follow the fol-
Mixing different windshield washer con- lowing:
centrates or antifreeze can damage the – Set the parking brake.
washing system. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential dam-
slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
age. Do not mix different windshield
rection of the curb.
washer concentrates or antifreeze. Follow
the information and mixing ratios pro- – On uphill grades or on a downhill
vided on the containers. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
Overview
NOTICE
When shifting to a lower gear, excessive
speeds can damage the engine. There is a
potential damage. When shifting into 5th
or 6th gear, press the gearshift lever to the
right.
Schematic diagram
The washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment.
Malfunction
The use of undiluted windshield washer
concentrate or alcohol-based antifreeze can
lead to incorrect readings at temperatures
below +5 ℉/-15 ℃.
– 1–6: forward gears.
115
CONTROLS Driving
– R: reverse gear. In order to ensure that the vehicle is se-

lowing:
Shifting
General information – On uphill grades or on a downhill
Depending on the motorization, the engine slope, turn the front wheels in the di-
rection of the curb.
speed during a shifting operation is ad-
justed automatically as required for harmo- – On uphill grades or on a downhill
nious gear shifting. slope, also secure the vehicle, for in-
Reverse gear
Select only when the vehicle is stationary. Selector lever version
To overcome the resistance push the gear-
shift lever dynamically to the left and en- Selector lever
gage reverse gear with a forward shifting
movement.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power, for instance in a car
wash, or be pushed.
2. Press on the clutch pedal and shift out
The selector lever positions R, N, and D are
of a forward gear or reverse.
selected by tapping the selector lever for-
3. Release the parking brake. ward or back. The selector lever automati-
cally returns to the center position when re-
leased.
Steptronic transmission The selector lever position P is engaged by
pressing the P button on the selector lever
Concept or, in certain situations, automatically, refer
to page 117.
The Steptronic transmission combines the
functions of an automatic transmission with
the possibility of manual shifting, if needed. Selector lever positions
Safety information Drive mode D
Selector lever position for normal vehicle
Warning operation. All gears for forward travel are
activated automatically.
116
Driving CONTROLS
R is reverse Engaging selector lever positions

Engage selector lever position R only when
the vehicle is stationary. General information
To prevent the vehicle from creeping after
Neutral N you select a gear position, maintain pres-
The vehicle may be pushed or roll without sure on the brake pedal until you are ready
engine power in selector lever position N, to start.
for instance in vehicle washes, refer to
page 118. Functional requirements
Only when the brake pedal is depressed is it
Parking position P possible to change from selector lever posi-
tion P to another selector lever position.
General information Depending on the transmission version, the
Selector lever position, for instance for engine may have to be running too.
parking the vehicle. The selection lever position P cannot be
The transmission blocks the drive wheels in changed until all technical requirements are
selector lever position P. met.
Engage selector lever position P only when
the vehicle is stationary. Engaging selector lever position D, N,
Before exiting the vehicle, make sure that R
selector lever position P is set. Otherwise, A selector lever lock prevents the following
the vehicle may begin to move. faulty operation:
– Unintentional shifting into selector
Automatic parking position lever position R.
Selector lever position P is engaged auto- – Unintentional shifting from selector
matically in situations such as the follow- lever position P into another selector
ing: lever position.
– After the engine is switched off when 1. Press and hold the button to release the
the vehicle is in the radio-ready state, selector lever lock.
refer to page 99, or when the ignition is
switched off, refer to page 98, while se-
lector lever position R, D or M/S is en-
gaged.
– If the driver's safety belt is unbuckled,
the driver's door is opened, and the
brake pedal is not pressed while the ve-
hicle is stationary and selector lever po-
sition D, M/S or R is engaged.
– After the ignition has been switched off
while selector lever position N is en- 2. With the driver's safety belt fastened,
gaged. briefly push the selector lever in the de-
sired direction, past a resistance point,
if needed. The selector lever automati-
117
CONTROLS Driving
cally returns to the center position when 1. Start the engine while pressing on the
released. brake pedal.
2. If necessary, release the parking brake.
4. Touch the selector lever lock and en-
gage selector lever position N.
5. Switch the engine off.
In this way, the ignition remains
switched on, and a Check Control mes-
sage is displayed.
The vehicle can roll.
Engaging selector lever position P
Irrespective of the ignition, the selector
lever position P is automatically engaged af-
ter approx. 15 minutes.
If there is a malfunction, you may not be
able to change the selector lever position.
Electronically unlock the transmission lock,
if needed, refer to page 120.
Kickdown
Press button P. Kickdown is used to achieve maximum driv-
ing performance. Step on the accelerator
pedal beyond the resistance point at the full
Rolling or pushing the vehicle throttle position.
General information Sport program M/S

In some situations, the vehicle is to roll
without its own power for a short distance, Concept
for instance in a car wash, or be pushed. The shifting points and shifting times in the
Sport program are designed for a sportier
Engaging selector lever position N driving style. The transmission, for instance
shifts up later and the shifting times are
NOTICE shorter.
Selector lever position P is automatically
engaged when the ignition is switched off.
among other potential damage. Do not
switch ignition off in car washes.
118
Driving CONTROLS
Activating the Sport program Manual mode M/S becomes active and the
gear is changed.
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster, for instance M1.
Shifting
– To shift down: press the selector lever
forward.
– To shift up: pull the selector lever rear-
wards.
Press the selector lever to the left from se- The Steptronic transmission continues
lector lever position D. shifting automatically in certain situations,
The engaged gear is displayed in the instru- for instance when certain engine speed lim-
ment cluster, for instance S1. its are reached.
The sport program of the transmission is ac- When M2 is set manually while the vehicle
tivated. is stationary, the transmission will no lon-
ger shift back to M1. This shifting behavior
is retained until you engage M1 manually or
Ending the Sport program exit M.
Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Avoiding automatic upshifting
Once a particular engine speed is attained,
Manual mode M/S M/S manual mode is automatically up-
shifted as needed.
Concept John Cooper Works: once particular engine
Manual gear-shifting is possible in manual speeds are attained, upshifting is not auto-
mode. matically performed in M/S manual mode.
For vehicles with Steptronic Sport transmis-
Activating manual mode sion, automatic shift operations are not per-
1. Press the selector lever to the left from formed if one of the following conditions is
selector lever position D, arrow 1. met:
– DSC is deactivated.
– TRACTION is activated.
In addition, there is no downshifting for
kickdown.
With the appropriate transmission version,
the lowest possible gear can be selected by
simultaneously activating kickdown and op-
erating the left shift paddles. This is not
possible by switching briefly via the shift
2. Press the selector lever forward or pull paddles from selector lever position D to
it backward, arrows 2. manual mode M/S.
119
CONTROLS Driving
Ending the manual mode Shifting

Press the selector lever to the right.
D is displayed in the instrument cluster.
Shift paddles for Steptronic Sport

transmission
Concept
The shift paddles on the steering wheel al-
low you to shift gears quickly while keeping
both hands on the steering wheel. – Shifting up: pull the right shift paddle.
– Shifting down: pull left shift paddle.
General information – Downshifting to the lowest possible
gear: keep the left shift paddle pulled.
Shifting The selected gear is briefly displayed in the
Gears will only be shifted at appropriate en- instrument cluster, followed by the current
gine and road speeds, for instance down- gear.
shifting is not possible if the engine speed
is too high.
Displays in the instrument cluster
Short-term manual mode The selector lever position is
In selector lever position D, actuating a displayed, for example P.
shift paddle switches into manual mode
temporarily.
After conservative driving in manual mode
without acceleration or shifting via the shift Releasing the transmission lock
paddles for a certain amount of time, the electronically
transmission switches back to automatic
mode.
General information
It is possible to switch into automatic mode
as follows: Electronically unlock the transmission lock
to maneuver vehicle from a danger area.
– Keep the right shift paddle pulled until
D is displayed in the instrument cluster. Before unlocking the transmission lock, set
the parking brake to prevent the vehicle
– In addition to the pulled right shift pad- from rolling away.
dle, pull the left shift paddle.
Engaging selector lever position N
Continuous manual mode
Unlocking is possible, if the starter can spin
In selector lever position S, actuating a shift the engine.
paddle switches into manual mode perma-
nently. 1. Press and hold down brake pedal.
2. Press the Start/Stop button. The starter
must audibly start.
120
Driving CONTROLS
3. Press the button on the selector lever, Functional requirements

arrow 1, and press and hold the selector Launch Control is available as soon as the
lever into selector lever position N, ar- engine and transmission are at operating
row N, until selector lever position N is temperature.
displayed in the instrument cluster.
Depending on the outside temperature and
A Check Control message is displayed. driving style, the engine and transmission
require an interrupted trip of up to
30 miles/50 km in order to reach the oper-
ating temperature needed for Launch Con-
trol.
Start with launch control

While the engine is running:
1. Press button and select SPORT

4. Release the selector lever. with the MINI Driving Modes switch.
5. Release brake, as soon as the starter The instrument cluster displays TRAC-
stops. TION in combination with SPORT. The
DSC OFF indicator light lights up.
6. Maneuver the vehicle from the danger
area and secure it against moving on its 2. Engage selector lever position S.
own. 3. With the left foot, forcefully press down
For additional information, see the chapter on the brake.
on tow-starting and towing. 4. Press and hold down the accelerator
pedal beyond the resistance point at the
Steptronic Sport transmission: full throttle position, kickdown.
Launch Control A destination flag is displayed in the in-
strument cluster.
Concept 5. The starting engine speed adjusts. Wait
Launch Control enables optimum accelera- briefly until the engine speed is con-
tion on surfaces with good traction under stant. Keep accelerator pedal in this po-
dry surrounding conditions. sition.
6. Release the brake within 3 seconds after
General information the destination flag illuminates.
The use of Launch Control causes prema- The vehicle accelerates.
ture component wear since this function
Upshifting occurs automatically as long
represents a very heavy load for the vehicle.
as the destination flag is displayed and
Do not use Launch Control during the the accelerator pedal is not released.
break-in, refer to page 230, period.
Do not turn the steering wheel when driv- Repeated use during a trip
ing away with Launch Control. After Launch Control has been used, the
transmission must cool down for approx.
121
CONTROLS Driving
5 minutes before Launch Control can be

used again.
After using Launch Control

To increase driving stability, activate DSC
Dynamic Stability Control again.
System limits
An experienced driver may be able to ach-
ieve better acceleration values in DSC OFF
mode.
122
Displays CONTROLS
Displays
Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster without enhanced features: overview
1 Tachometer 131 4 Fuel gauge 130

2 Indicator/warning lights 5 Display/reset miles 131
3 Speedometer 6 Electronic displays 125
123
CONTROLS Displays
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: overview
1 Tachometer 131 4 Vehicle speed

2 Display/reset miles 131 5 Indicator/warning lights
3 Electronic displays 126 6 Fuel gauge 130
124
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster without additional functions: electronic displays
1 Driver assistance systems Trip computer 136

Messages, for instance Check Control 2 Selector lever position 116
Time 132 Gear shift indicator 134
Outside temperature 131 3 MINI Driving Modes switch sta-
Selection lists 136 tus 177
Total miles/trip odometer 131
125
CONTROLS Displays
Instrument cluster with enhanced features: electronic displays
1 Selector lever position 116 5 Messages, for instance Check Control

Gear shift indicator 134 Selection lists 136
2 Time 132 Navigation instructions
MINI Driving Modes switch sta- 6 Total miles/trip odometer 131
tus 177 Trip computer 136
3 Driver assistance systems
4 Outside temperature 131
Range 132
Check Control In addition, an acoustic signal may be out-

put and a text message may appear on the
Control Display.
Concept
The Check Control system monitors func- Indicator/warning lights
tions in the vehicle and notifies you of mal-
functions in the monitored systems. General information
The indicator/warning lights can light up in
General information a variety of combinations and colors.
A Check Control message is displayed as a Several of the lights are checked for proper
combination of indicator or warning lights functioning and light up temporarily when
and text messages in the instrument cluster the engine is started or the ignition is
and in the Head-up Display. switched on.
126
Displays CONTROLS
Red lights Forward Collision Warning

Indicator light illuminates: advance
Safety belt reminder warning is issued, for example when
Indicator light flashes or is illumi- there is the impending danger of a
nated: safety belt on the driver or collision or the distance to the vehicle
passenger side is not buckled. The ahead is too small.
safety belt reminder can also be activated if Increase the distance.
objects are placed on the front passenger Indicator light flashes: acute warning of the
seat. imminent danger of a collision when the ve-
Make sure that the safety belts are posi- hicle approaches another vehicle at a rela-
tioned correctly. tively high differential speed.
Intervene by braking or make an evasive
Airbag system maneuver.
Airbag system and belt tensioner
may not be working. Pedestrian Warning
Have the vehicle checked immedi- If a collision with a detected person
ately by a dealer's service center or another is imminent, the icon lights up and a
qualified service center or repair shop. signal sounds.
Parking brake, manual Instrument cluster without enhanced

The parking brake is set. features: orange lights
For releasing the parking brake, re-
fer to page 104. Active Cruise Control
The number bars shows the selected
distance from the vehicle driving
ahead.
Parking brake, electric Camera-based cruise control, refer to
The parking brake is set. page 179.
For releasing the parking brake, re-
fer to page 105. Vehicle detection, Active Cruise Control
Indicator light illuminates: a vehicle
Brake system has been detected ahead of you.
Braking system impaired. Continue Indicator light flashes: the condi-
to drive moderately. tions are not adequate for the system to
work.
Have the vehicle checked immedi-
ately by a dealer's service center or The system was deactivated but applies the
another qualified service center or brakes until the driver actively resumes
repair shop. control of the vehicle by pressing on the
brake pedal or accelerator pedal.
127
CONTROLS Displays
Yellow lights Tire Pressure Monitor TPM

The indicator light illuminates: the
Antilock Braking System ABS Tire Pressure Monitor reports a low
The Brake Assistant function may tire inflation pressure or a flat tire.
not activate. Avoid abrupt braking. Follow the information in the Check Control
Take the longer braking distance message.
into account. The indicator light flashes and is then illu-
Have the system immediately minated continuously: flat tires or tire pres-
checked by a dealer's service center sure losses cannot be detected.
or another qualified service center or repair – Interference caused by systems or devi-
shop. ces with the same radio frequency: after
leaving the area of the interference, the
DSC Dynamic Stability Control system automatically becomes active
again.
The indicator light flashes: DSC con-
– TPM was unable to complete the reset.
trols the drive and braking forces.
Reset the system again.
The vehicle is stabilized. Reduce
speed and modify your driving style to the – A wheel without TPM wheel electronics
driving circumstances. is mounted: have it checked by a deal-
er’s service center or another qualified
The indicator light lights up: DSC has mal-
service center or repair shop as needed.
functioned.
– Malfunction: have the system checked
Have the system checked by a dealer's serv-
by a dealer’s service center or another
ice center or another qualified service cen-
qualified service center or repair shop.
ter or repair shop.
Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to page 155.
DSC, refer to page 175.
Steering system
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is
deactivated or DTC Dynamic Traction Steering system may not be working.
Control is activated Have the system checked by a deal-
DSC is deactivated or DTC is acti- er's service center or another quali-
vated. fied service center or repair shop.
DSC, refer to page 175, and DTC, re-
fer to page 176. Emissions
– The warning light lights up:
Flat Tire Monitor FTM Emissions are deteriorating.
The FTM signals a loss of tire infla- Have the vehicle checked as soon
tion pressure in a tire. as possible.
Reduce your speed and stop cau- – The warning light flashes under certain
tiously. Avoid sudden braking and steering circumstances:
maneuvers. This indicates that there is excessive
Flat Tire Monitor, refer to page 160. misfiring in the engine.
128
Displays CONTROLS
Reduce the vehicle speed and have the the control elements on the steering wheel.
system checked immediately; otherwise,
serious engine misfiring within a brief
Speed Limiter
period can seriously damage emission
control components, in particular the The indicator light illuminates: the
catalytic converter. system is switched on.
Socket for Onboard Diagnosis, refer to The indicator light flashes: the set
page 278. speed limit has been exceeded. If this hap-
pens, a signal sounds.
Green lights Reduce speed or deactivate system.
Turn signal Lane departure warning

Turn signal switched on. The indicator light lights up: the sys-
Unusually rapid flashing of the indi- tem is activated. At least one lane
cator light indicates that a turn sig- marking was detected and warnings
nal bulb has failed. can be issued.
Turn signal, refer to page 106. Lane departure warning, refer to page 169.
Parking lights, headlight Blue lights

Parking lights or headlights are High beams
switched on.
Parking lights/low beams, headlight High beams are switched on.
control, refer to page 145. High beams, refer to page 107.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Hiding Check Control messages

features: bad weather light
Bad weather light is switched on.
Bad weather light, refer to page 148.
High-beam Assistant
High-beam Assistant is switched on.
High beams are switched on and off
automatically depending on the traf-
fic situation. Press the button on the turn signal lever.
High-beam Assistant, refer to page 147.
Continuous display
Cruise control Some Check Control messages are displayed
The system is switched on. It main- continuously and are not cleared until the
tains the speed that was set using malfunction is eliminated. If several mal-
129
CONTROLS Displays
functions occur at once, the messages are Depending on the Check Control message,
displayed consecutively. further help can be selected.
The messages can be hidden for approx. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
8 seconds. After this time, they are dis-
played again automatically. 1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
Temporary display 3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
Some Check Control messages are hidden 4. "Check Control"
automatically after approx. 20 seconds. The
Check Control messages are stored and can 5. Select the desired text message.
be displayed again later. 6. Select the desired setting.
Displaying stored Check Control Messages after trip completion

messages Certain messages displayed while driving
Via the Central Information Display (CID): are displayed again after the ignition is
switched off.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. Fuel gauge
4. "Check Control"
Concept
5. Select the text message.
The current fill level of the fuel tank is dis-
Display played.
Check Control General information

Vehicle tilt position may cause the display
At least one Check Control message to vary.
is displayed or stored.
Information on refueling, refer to page 242.
Text messages Instrument cluster without

Text messages in combination with a icon enhanced features: display
in the instrument cluster explain a Check The arrow beside the fuel
Control message and the meaning of the in- pump icon shows which side
dicator/warning lights. of the vehicle the fuel filler
flap is on.
Supplementary text messages
Additional information, such as on the
cause of an error or the required action, can
be called up via Check Control.
With urgent messages the added text will
be automatically displayed on the Control
Display.
130
Displays CONTROLS
Instrument cluster with enhanced Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display features: reset trip distance
The arrow beside the fuel Press the button.
pump icon shows which side – The odometer is displayed
of the vehicle the fuel filler when the ignition is
flap is on. switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
Indicator light in the instrument ometer is reset.
cluster
The yellow indicator light illumi-
nates, once the fuel reserve is Outside temperature
reached.
General information
If the indicator drops to +37 ℉/+3 ℃, a sig-
Tachometer nal sounds.
Always avoid engine speeds in the red
warning field. In this range, the fuel supply There is an increased risk of ice on roads.
is reduced to protect the engine.
Safety information
Odometer and trip odometer Warning

Even at temperatures above +37 ℉/+3 ℃
Concept there can be a risk of icy roads, for in-
The total mileage driven and the mileage stance on bridges or shady sections of the
driven since the last reset are displayed in road. There is a risk of accident. Modify
the instrument cluster. your driving style to the weather condi-
tions at low temperatures.
Instrument cluster without
additional functions: reset trip Display
distance The outside temperature is
Press the button. displayed in the instrument
– The odometer is displayed cluster.
when the ignition is
switched off.
– When the ignition is
switched on, the trip od-
ometer is reset.
131
CONTROLS Displays
Time damage to property, among other potential

damage. Refuel promptly.
The time is displayed in the
instrument cluster. Display
Set the time on the Central In-
The current range is displayed
formation Display (CID), refer
in the instrument cluster.
to page 48.
Date
Displaying the cruising range
The date is displayed in the in- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
strument cluster.
1. "My MINI"
Set the date on the Central In-
formation Display (CID), refer 2. "System settings"
to page 48. 3. "Displays"
4. "Instrument panel"
5. "Range"
Range
General information Current consumption
When the remaining range is low:
– A Check Control message is displayed Concept
briefly. Displays the current fuel consumption.
– The remaining range is shown on the Check whether you are currently driving in
trip computer. an efficient and environmentally-friendly
– With a sporty driving style, for instance manner.
fast cornering, the engine function is
not always ensured. Displaying the current
The Check Control message appears contin- consumption
uously below a range of approx. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
30 miles/50 km.
1. "My MINI"
Safety information 2. "System settings"
3. "Displays"
NOTICE 4. "Instrument panel"
With a driving distance of less than 5. "Current consumption"
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of
132
Displays CONTROLS
Service notifications Symbols
Symbols Description
Concept
No service is currently re-
The function displays the service notifica-
quired.
tions and the corresponding maintenance
scopes.
The time for recommended
maintenance or a legally
General information mandated inspection is ap-
After the ignition is switched on the instru- proaching.
ment cluster briefly displays available driv-
ing distance or time to the next scheduled Service interval is exceeded.
maintenance.
A service advisor can read out the current
service notifications from your vehicle key. Entering appointment dates
Enter the dates for the mandatory vehicle
Display inspections.
Detailed information on service Make sure that the vehicle's date and time
notifications are set correctly.
More information on the type of service re-
quired may be displayed on the Control Dis- 1. "My MINI"
play.
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
1. "My MINI" 4. "Service required"
2. "Vehicle status" 5. "Vehicle inspection"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. 6. "Date:"
4. "Service required" 7. Select the desired setting.
Maintenance work and legally mandated
inspections are displayed. Automatic Service Request
5. Select an entry to call up detailed infor- Data regarding the service status or legally
mation. mandated vehicle inspections is automati-
cally transmitted to your dealer’s service
center before your vehicle is due for serv-
ice.
You can check when your dealer’s service
center was notified.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
133
CONTROLS Displays
3. Tilt the Controller to the left. Speed Limit Info

4. "Teleservice Call"
Speed Limit Info
Gear shift indicator Concept
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
Concept mum permitted speed in the instrument
The system recommends the most efficient cluster.
gear for the current driving situation.
General information
General information The camera at the base of the interior mir-
Depending on the vehicle equipment and ror detects traffic signs at the edge of the
country version, the gear shift indicator is road as well as overhead sign posts. Traffic
active in the manual mode of the Steptronic signs with extra symbols for wet road con-
transmission and with manual transmission. ditions, etc., are also detected and compared
with the vehicle's onboard data, such as
Suggestions to shift up or down are dis- from the rain sensor, and will be displayed
played in the instrument cluster. depending on the situation.
With the navigation system, the system
Manual transmission: displaying takes into account the information stored in
the navigation data and also displays speed
Example Description
limits present on routes without signs.
Efficient gear is set.
Safety information
Depending on the equipment
version, shift to a more effi- Warning
cient gear. The system cannot serve as a substitute
for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
Steptronic transmission: displaying closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
Example Description
Efficient gear is set.
Depending on the equipment

version, shift to a more effi-
cient gear.
134
Displays CONTROLS
Overview With navigation system:

Speed Limit Info is not availa-
Camera ble.
Speed Limit Info can also be displayed in

the Head-up Display.
System limits
The system may not be fully functional and
may provide incorrect information in the
following situations:
The camera is installed near the interior – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
mirror. fall.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior – When traffic signs are fully or partially
mirror clean and clear. concealed by objects, stickers or paint.
– When driving very close to the vehicle
Display in front of you.
– When driving toward bright lights or
Depending on the vehicle equipment, Speed
strong reflections.
Limit Info is displayed permanently in the
instrument cluster or via the trip computer. – When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
ered by a sticker, etc.
– In the event of incorrect detection by
the camera.
– If the speed limits stored in the naviga-
tion system are incorrect.
– In areas not covered by the navigation
system.
– When roads differ from the navigation,
Press button on the turn signal lever several such as due to changes in road routing.
times, if needed. – When passing buses or trucks with a
speed sticker.
Speed Limit Info is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster. – If the traffic signs are non-conforming.
– When traffic signs that are valid for a
Speed Limit Info parallel road are detected.
The last speed limit detected. – During calibration of the camera imme-
diately after vehicle delivery.
135
CONTROLS Displays
Selection lists Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display
General information
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
buttons on the steering wheel and the dis-
play in the instrument cluster can be used
to display or use the following:
– Current audio source.
– Phone redial.
– Turn on voice activation system.
Activating a list and adjusting the

setting Trip computer
Button on the Function
steering wheel Concept
The trip computer displays different vehicle
Move selection up. data in the instrument cluster, such as aver-
age values.
Move selection
down. Calling up information
Confirm the selec-
tion.
Instrument cluster without

enhanced features: display
Press the button on the turn signal lever.

Information is displayed in the instrument
cluster.
Information at a glance
Repeatedly pressing the but-
ton on the turn signal lever
calls up the following informa-
tion:
– Range.
136
Displays CONTROLS
– GREEN Info. 4. "Instrument panel"

When GREEN Mode is activated. 5. Select the desired setting.
– Average consumption, fuel. Settings are stored for the profile currently
– Average consumption since delivery used.
from the factory.
– Current consumption, fuel. Information in detail
– Average speed.
Range
– Date.
Displays the estimated cruising range avail-
– Engine temperature display. able with the remaining fuel.
– With equipment version with Head-up The range is calculated based on your driv-
Display and navigation: ing style over the last 20 miles/30 km.
Distance to destination.
When destination guidance is activated GREEN info
in the navigation system. The achieved range extension may be dis-
– With equipment version with Head-up played as a bonus range.
Display and navigation:
Arrival time. Average consumption
When destination guidance is activated The average consumption is calculated for
in the navigation system. the period while the engine is running.
– Instrument cluster without enhanced The average consumption is calculated for
features: the distance traveled since the last reset by
the trip computer.
Speed Limit Info.
– Vehicle speed. Average speed
– Trip odometer. Periods in which the vehicle is parked with
The unit of some information can be the engine manually stopped are not in-
changed. cluded in the calculation of the average
Setting units, refer to page 49. speed.
Selecting information Resetting average values

Depending on the vehicle equipment, you
can select what information from the trip
computer can be accessed in the instrument
cluster.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
Press and hold the button on the turn signal
lever.
137
CONTROLS Displays
Engine temperature display Instrument cluster with enhanced

features: display
Concept
The current engine temperature, based on a
combination of coolant and engine oil tem-
perature is displayed. As soon as the opti-
mum operating temperature has been at-
tained, the indicator is in the center
position.
General information
If the engine oil or coolant, and thus the en-
gine, become too hot, a Check Control mes- Distance to destination
sage is displayed too. Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
When the engine temperature is too distance remaining to the destination is dis-
high, a red indicator light is displayed if a destination is entered in the nav-
played. igation system before the trip is started.
The distance to the destination is adopted
When the engine oil temperature is automatically.
too high, a red indicator light is dis-
played. Time of arrival
To check the coolant level, refer to Depending on the vehicle equipment, the
page 275. estimated time of arrival is displayed if a
destination is entered in the navigation sys-
Instrument cluster without enhanced tem before the trip is started.
features: display The time must be correctly set.
Instrument cluster without additional

functions: Speed Limit Info
Speed Limit Info shows the current maxi-
mum permitted speed in the instrument
cluster.
Trip computer on the Control

Display
Concept
The trip computer displays different vehicle
data on the Control Display, such as average
values.
138
Displays CONTROLS
General information Driving Excitement

Two types of trip computers are available
on the Control Display: Concept
– "Onboard info": average values, such as On the Control Display, sport instruments
the consumption, are displayed. The val- can be displayed, and the vehicle state can
ues can be reset individually. be checked before the use of the SPORT
– "Trip computer": the values deliver an program.
overview of a specific route and can be
reset as often as necessary. Sport instruments
Calling up the trip computer or General information
onboard computer
On the Control Display, values for power
Via the Central Information Display (CID): and torque are displayed.
1. "My MINI"
Displaying sport instruments
2. "Driving information"
3. "Onboard info" or "Trip computer"
1. "My MINI"
Resetting the trip computer 2. "Technology in action"
Via the Central Information Display (CID): 3. "Sport displays"
1. "My MINI" 4. "Sports instruments"
2. "Driving information" Via MINI Driving Modes switch:
3. "Onboard info" 1. Activate SPORT.
4. "Consumption" or "Speed" 2. "Sport displays"
5. "OK" 3. "Sports instruments"
Resetting the trip computer Vehicle state

General information
1. "My MINI"
The following vehicle and surrounding area
2. "Driving information" data is automatically checked and evaluated
3. "Trip computer" in succession:
4. Move the Controller to the left, if – Range.
needed. – Engine temperature.
– "Reset": all values are reset. – Outside temperature.
– "Automatic reset": all values are – SPORT program state.
reset approx. 4 hours after the vehi-
Finally, a total evaluation of the vehicle
cle has come to a standstill.
state is displayed.
5. If necessary, "OK"
139
CONTROLS Displays
Checking vehicle state 1. "My MINI"

Via the Central Information Display (CID): 2. "Vehicle settings"
1. "My MINI" 3. "Speed warning"
2. "Technology in action" 4. "Speed warning"
3. "Sport displays"
4. "Vehicle and surroundings" Setting your current speed as the
speed warning
Via the MINI Driving Modes switch:
1. Activate SPORT.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Sport displays"
3. "Vehicle and surroundings"
3. "Speed warning"
4. "Select current speed"
Speed warning
Concept LED ring on the central in-
The system can be used to set a speed limit. strument cluster
A warning will be issued when this speed
limit is exceeded. Concept
The LED ring displays light animations to
General information represent specific functions.
The warning is repeated if the vehicle speed
exceeds the set speed limit again, after it Basic displays
has dropped below it by 3 mph/5 km/h. Basic functions, for instance the tachome-
ter, can be set to be displayed continually if
Adjusting so desired.
Event displays
1. "My MINI"
Functions that are only displayed tempora-
2. "Vehicle settings" rily, for instance the volume or temperature
3. "Speed warning" settings, can be set as event displays.
4. "Warning at:" Several vehicle assistance functions can
also be displayed on the LED ring. This dis-
play corresponds with the displays of the
speed is displayed.
function in the respective display.
Example: tachometer
Activating/deactivating Like the tachometer in the instrument clus-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): ter, the light animations of the tachometer's
basic display show the current RPMs and
the respective RPM warning thresholds.
140
Displays CONTROLS
Display 3. "Displays"
4. "Center Instrument"
5. "Brightness at night"
brightness is set.
currently used.
– Arrow 1: current RPM.

– Arrow 2: prewarning field. Head-up Display
– Arrow 3: warning field.
Concept
Switching on/off LED ring This system projects important information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): into the driver's field of vision, for instance
the speed.
1. "My MINI" The driver can get information without
2. "System settings" averting his or her eyes from the road.
3. "Displays"
General information
4. "Center Instrument"
Follow the instructions for cleaning the
5. "Center Instrument" Head-up Display. For additional informa-
tion, see the chapter on care.
Adjusting the LED ring
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Safety information
1. "My MINI"
2. "System settings" Warning
When extending and retracting the projec-
3. "Displays"
tion screen of the Head-up Display, body
4. "Center Instrument" parts can be jammed. There is a risk of in-
5. "Basic display" or "Event display" jury. Make sure that the area of movement
of the projection screen is clear during
6. Select the desired setting. opening and closing.
Setting the brightness
The brightness can be adjusted when night NOTICE
lighting is active in the instrument cluster.
The Head-up Display consists of sensitive
Via the Central Information Display (CID): components that can easily be scraped or
1. "My MINI" damaged. There is a risk of damage to
2. "System settings" Do not place any objects on the Head-up
141
CONTROLS Displays
Display, attach to system components or Some of this information is only displayed

plug into the system. Do not move the briefly as needed.
moving parts manually.
Selecting displays in the Head-up
Display
Overview Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Displayed information"
6. Select the desired displays in the Head-
up Display.
Settings are stored for the driver profile
Switching the Head-up Display currently used.
on/off
When switching on, the projection lens of Setting the brightness
the Head-up Display is extended. When The brightness is automatically adjusted to
switching off, the projection lens of the the ambient brightness.
Head-up Display is retracted again. The basic setting can be adjusted manually.
3. "Displays" 3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display" 4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Head-Up Display" 5. "Brightness"
Display 6. Turn the Controller until the desired
brightness is set.
Overview 7. Press the Controller.
The following information is displayed on When the low beams are switched on, the
the Head-up Display: brightness of the Head-up Display can be
– Vehicle speed. additionally influenced using the instru-
ment lighting, refer to page 149.
– Navigation instructions.
– Check Control messages. currently used.
– Selection list from the instrument clus-
ter. Adjusting the height
– Driver assistance systems. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
142
Displays CONTROLS
1. "My MINI" John Cooper Works: sport dis-

2. "System settings" plays in the Head-up Display
3. "Displays"
4. "Head-Up Display" General information
5. "Height" The sport displays in the Head-up Display
assist with a sporty driving style.
height is reached. Switching on
7. Press the Controller. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
currently used. 1. "My MINI"
Setting the rotation 3. "Displays"
The screen of the Head-up Display can be 4. "Head-Up Display"
rotated around its own axis.
5. "Displayed information"
6. "Sport displays"
1. "My MINI"
With navigation system: if the sport dis-
2. "System settings" plays are switched on, no navigation con-
3. "Displays" tent will be displayed on the Head-up Dis-
play.
4. "Head-Up Display"
5. "Rotation" Display
6. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is selected.
currently used.
Display visibility
The visibility of the displays in the Head-up
Display is influenced by the following fac-
tors: 1 Vehicle speed
– Certain seat positions. 2 Shift point indicator
– Objects on the cover of the Head-up Dis- 3 Gear display
play. 4 Current engine speed
– Sunglasses with certain polarization fil- 5 Warning field, speed
ters.
– Wet roads.
– Unfavorable light conditions.
143
CONTROLS Displays
Shift point indicator Information at a glance

Concept Symbols Description
The shift point indicator in the Head-up "Flat Tire Monitor": status of
Display indicates the optimum shifting the run-flat tires, refer to
point. Thus, with a sporty driving style, the page 160.
best possible vehicle acceleration is ach-
ieved. "Tire Pressure Monitor": sta-
tus of the Tire Pressure
Functional requirements Monitor TPM, refer to
page 155.
– Steptronic Sport transmission:
Manual mode M/S and, if necessary, Dy- "Engine oil level": electronic
namic Traction Control DTC are acti- engine oil level check, refer
vated. to page 271.
– Press the accelerator pedal all the way "Check Control": Check Con-
down. trol messages are stored in
the background and can be
Display displayed on the Control
Display. Displaying stored
Successive gray illuminated fields indicate
Check Control messages, re-
the upcoming shift moment.
fer to page 130.
Shift up immediately when the red fields
light up. "Service required": display-
ing service notifications, re-
When the maximum speed is reached, the fer to page 133.
entire display flashes red and the fuel sup-
ply is interrupted in order to protect the en- "Teleservice Call": Tele-
gine. service Call.
Vehicle status
General information
The status can be displayed and actions per-
formed for several systems.
Going to the vehicle status

1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
3. Tilt the Controller to the left.
144
Lights CONTROLS
Lights
Vehicle features and options Icon Function
Parking lights.
the series. It also describes features and Low beams.
tions or country versions. This also applies Instrument lighting.
observed.
Parking lights, low beams and
roadside parking lights
Overview
General information
Switches in the vehicle
Position of switch: , ,
If the driver's door is opened when the igni-
tion is switched off, the exterior lighting is
automatically switched off.
Parking lights
Position of switch:
The vehicle is illuminated on all sides.
Do not use the parking lights for extended
The light switch element is located next to periods; otherwise, the battery may become
the steering wheel. discharged and it would then be impossible
to start the engine.
Icon Function When parking, switch on the one-sided
Bad weather light. roadside parking light, refer to page 146.
Low beams
Automatic headlight control. Position of switch:
Cornering light. The low beams light up when the ignition is
switched on.
Lights off.
Daytime running lights.
145
CONTROLS Lights
Canada: roadside parking light 3. "Lighting"

Concept
5. "Welcome lights"
The vehicle can be illuminated on one side.
currently used.
Switching on
Pathway lighting
General information
The low beams stay lit for a short while if
the headlight flasher is switched on after
the vehicle's radio-ready state is switched
off.
Setting the duration

With radio-ready state switched off, press Via the Central Information Display (CID):
the lever either up or down past the resist-
ance point for approx. 2 seconds. 1. "My MINI"
Switching off 3. "Lighting"
Briefly press the lever to the resistance 4. "Exterior lighting"
point in the opposite direction.
5. "Pathway lighting"
6. Set length of time.
Welcome lights and pathway The setting is stored for the driver profile
lighting currently used.
Welcome lights Automatic headlight control

General information
Concept
the ambient brightness, individual light The low beams are switched on and off au-
functions may be switched on briefly when tomatically depending on the ambient
the vehicle is unlocked. brightness, for example in tunnels, in twi-
light or if there is precipitation.
Position of switch: , General information
Via the Central Information Display (CID): A blue sky with the sun low on the horizon
can cause the lights to be switched on.
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle settings" Activating
Position of switch:
146
Lights CONTROLS
The indicator light in the instrument cluster Cornering light

is illuminated when the low beams are
switched on.
General information
System limits Position of switch:
The automatic headlight control cannot In tight curves, for instance on mountain-
serve as a substitute for your personal judg- ous roads or when turning, an additional,
ment of lighting conditions. cornering light is switched on that lights up
For example, the sensors are unable to de- the inside of the curve when the vehicle is
tect fog or hazy weather. In these situa- moving below a certain speed.
tions, switch the lights on manually. The cornering light is automatically
switched on depending on the steering an-
gle or, where applicable, the use of turn sig-
Daytime running lights nals.
When driving in reverse, the cornering
lights may be automatically switched on re-
General information gardless of the steering angle.
Switch position:
– ,
– Depending on the national-market ver- Adaptive headlight range con-
sion: trol
The daytime running lights light up when
the ignition is switched on. The adaptive headlight range control fea-
Depending on the national-market version: ture balances out acceleration and braking
after switching off the ignition, the parking processes as well as the vehicle load condi-
lights will illuminate in position . tions in order to avoid dazzling oncoming
traffic. Illumination of the road is optimized.
In some countries, daytime running lights
are mandatory, so it may not be possible to High-beam Assistant
deactivate the daytime running lights.
Via the Central Information Display (CID): Concept
1. "My MINI" The high-beam Assistant detects other traf-
fic participants early on and automatically
2. "Vehicle settings" switches the high beams on or off depend-
3. "Lighting" ing on the traffic situation.
General information
The high-beam Assistant ensures that the
Settings are stored for the currently used high beams are switched on, whenever the
vehicle key. traffic situation allows. In the low speed
range, the high beams are not switched on
by the system.
147
CONTROLS Lights
The system responds to light from oncom- The system is not fully functional in the fol-
ing traffic and traffic driving ahead of you, lowing situations, and driver intervention
and to ambient lighting, for instance in may be necessary:
towns and cities. – In very unfavorable weather conditions,
The high beams can be switched on and off such as fog or heavy precipitation.
manually at any time. – When detecting poorly-lit road users
such as pedestrians, cyclists, horseback
Activating/deactivating riders and wagons; when driving close
to train or ship traffic; or at animal
crossings.
– In tight curves, on hilltops or in depres-
sions, in crossing traffic or half-ob-
scured oncoming traffic on highways.
– In poorly-lit towns and cities or in the
presence of highly reflective signs.
– When the windshield in front of the in-
terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
Position of switch, depending on the vehicle ered with stickers, etc.
equipment: ,
Press the button on the turn signal lever.
Fog lights
cluster is illuminated when the low Bad weather light
The headlights are automatically switched Concept
between low beams and high beams. The bad weather light ensures optimized il-
The blue indicator light in the instru- lumination of the roadway in poor visibility,
ment cluster lights up when the sys- such as fog or rain. The light distribution of
tem switches on the high beams. the low beams is adapted to the visibility.
The high-beam Assistant is deactivated Functional requirement

when manually switching the high beams The automatic headlight control must be ac-
on and off, refer to page 107. tivated before switching on the bad weather
To reactivate the high-beam Assistant, light.
press the button on the turn signal lever.
Switching on/off
System limits Press the button.
The high-beam Assistant cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver's personal judg-
Instrument cluster with enhanced features:
ment of when to use the high beams. In sit-
uation that require this, therefore switch off The indicator light in the instrument
manually. cluster is illuminated when the bad
weather light is switched on.
148
Lights CONTROLS
Instrument lighting Switching the interior lights on/off

Press the button.
The parking lights or low beams must be To switch off permanently: press the button
switched on to set the brightness. and hold for approx. 3 seconds.
Adjusting Switching the reading lights on and

Adjust the brightness with the off manually
thumbwheel. Press the button.
The reading lights are located in the front

next to the interior light.
Ambient light
Interior lights
General information
General information Depending on the equipment version, light-
Depending on the equipment, the interior ing can be adjusted for some lights in the
lights, footwell lights, entry lights, and cour- car's interior.
tesy lights are controlled automatically.
The thumbwheel for the instrument lighting Activating/deactivating
controls brightness of some of these fea- Via the Central Information Display (CID):
tures.
1. "My MINI"
Overview 2. "Vehicle settings"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Ambient lighting"
Settings are stored for the profile currently
used.
Changing color
1 Interior lights Push the switch forward or back:
2 Reading lights manual color change.
3 Ambient light Press the switch forward or back-
ward and hold for approx. 3 seconds
until the Ambient Light flashes sev-
149
CONTROLS Lights
eral times: automatic color change. Push the

switch again to end color changes.
The colors of the Ambient Light depend on
the respectively set color world, refer to
page 50.
Setting the brightness

Depending on the equipment, the bright-
ness of the ambient light can be adjusted
via the thumbwheel for the instrument
lighting or on the Control Display.
1. "My MINI"
3. "Lighting"
4. "Interior lighting"
5. "Brightness"
6. Adjust the brightness.
150
Safety CONTROLS
Safety
Airbags
1 Front airbag, driver 4 Side airbag

2 Front airbag, front passenger 5 Knee airbag
3 Head airbag
Front airbags Side airbag

Front airbags help protect the driver and In the event of a side impact, the side air-
the front passenger by responding to frontal bag protects the side of the body in the
impacts in which safety belts alone would chest and lap area.
not provide adequate protection.
151
CONTROLS Safety
Head airbag shoulder rests against the backrest

In the event of a side impact, the head air- when crossing the hands and the upper
bag protects the head. body is as far back as possible while still
maintaining a comfortable grip on the
steering wheel.
Ejection Mitigation
– Make sure that the front passenger is
The head airbag system is designed as an
sitting correctly, i.e., keeps his or her
ejection mitigation countermeasure to re- feet and legs in the floor area and does
duce the likelihood of ejections of vehicle not support them on the dashboard.
occupants through side windows during
rollovers or side impact events. – Make sure that occupants keep their
heads away from the side airbag.
Knee airbag – There should be no additional persons,
animals or objects between an airbag
The knee airbag protects the legs in the
and a person.
event of a frontal impact.
– Dashboard and windshield on the front
Protective effect passenger side must stay clear - do not
attach adhesive labels or coverings and
Airbags are not triggered in every impact do not attach brackets or cables, for in-
situation, for instance in less severe acci- stance for GPS devices or mobile
dents or rear-end collisions. phones.
Information on optimum effect of the – Do not apply adhesive materials to the
airbag cover panels, do not cover them
airbags or modify them in any way.
– Do not use the cover of the front airbag
Warning on the front passenger side as a storage
If the seat position is incorrect or the de- area.
ployment area of the airbags is impaired, – Do not attach slip covers, seat cushions
the airbag system cannot provide protec- or other objects to the front passenger
tion as intended and may cause additional seat that are not specifically suited for
injuries due to triggering. There is a risk seats with integrated side airbags.
of injuries or danger to life. Follow the in-
– Do not hang pieces of clothing, such as
formation on achieving the optimum pro-
jackets, over the backrests.
tective effect of the airbag system.
– Never modify either the individual com-
– Keep a distance from the airbags. ponents or the wiring in the airbag sys-
tem. This also applies to steering wheel
– Always grasp the steering wheel on the covers, the dashboard, and the seats.
steering wheel rim. Hold your hands at
the 3 o'clock and 9 o'clock positions, to – Do not remove the airbag system.
keep the risk of injury to your hands or Even when you follow all instructions very
arms as low as possible when the airbag closely, injury from contact with the airbags
is triggered. cannot be fully ruled out in certain situa-
– Adjust seat and steering wheel so that tions.
hands can be crossed over the steering
wheel. Select the settings so that the
152
Safety CONTROLS
The ignition and inflation noise may lead to Airbag system malfunctioning
short-term and, in most cases, temporary – Warning light does not come on when
hearing impairment in sensitive occupants. the ignition is switched on.
Vehicle modifications for a person with dis- – The warning light lights up continu-
abilities may affect the air bag system; con- ously.
tact MINI Customer Relations for further in-
formation.
Automatic deactivation of the
Warnings and information on the airbags front-seat passenger airbags
are also found on the sun visors.
Concept
Functional readiness of the airbag
The system reads if the front passenger seat
system is occupied by measuring the human body's
resistance.
Safety information
Front, knee, and side airbag on the front
passenger's side are activated or deacti-
Warning vated.
Individual components can be hot after
triggering of the airbag system. There is a General information
risk of injury. Do not touch individual Before transporting a child on the front pas-
components. senger seat, refer to the safety information
and instructions for children on the front
passenger seat, see Children.
Warning
Improperly executed work can lead to fail- Safety information
ure, malfunction or unintentional trigger-
ing of the airbag system. In the case of a Warning
malfunction, the airbag system might not
To ensure the front-seat passenger airbag
trigger as intended despite the accident
function, the system must be able to de-
severity. There is a risk of injuries or dan-
tect whether a person is sitting in the
ger to life. Have the airbag system
front passenger seat. The entire seat cush-
checked, repaired, dismantled and scrap-
ion area must be used for this purpose.
ped by a dealer’s service center or another
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
Make sure that the front passenger keeps
his or her feet in the floor area.
Correct function
When the ignition is switched on, Malfunction of the automatic
the warning light in the instrument deactivation system
cluster lights up briefly and thereby When transporting older children and
indicates the operational readiness of the adults, the front-seat passenger airbags may
entire airbag system and the belt tensioner. be deactivated in certain seat positions. In
this case, the indicator light for the front-
seat passenger airbags lights up.
153
CONTROLS Safety
In this case, change the seat position so – The indicator light does not light up
that the front-seat passenger airbags are ac- when, for instance a correctly seated
tivated and the indicator light goes out. person of sufficient size is detected on
If it is not possible to activate the airbags, the seat. The airbags on the front pas-
have the person sit in the rear. senger side are activated.
To enable correct recognition of the occu-
pied seat cushion.
Detected child restraint systems
The system generally detects children
– Do not attach covers, cushions, ball mats
seated in a child restraint system, particu-
or other items to the front passenger
larly in child restraint systems required by
seat unless they are specifically deter-
NHTSA at the point in time when the vehi-
mined to be safe for use on the front
cle was manufactured. After installing a
passenger seat.
child restraint system, make sure that the
– Do not place any electronic devices on indicator light for the front-seat passenger
the front passenger seat if a child re- airbags lights up. This indicates that the
straint system is to be installed on it. child restraint system has been detected
– Do not place objects under the seat that and the front-seat passenger airbags are not
could press against the seat from below. activated.
– No moisture in or on the seat.
Strength of the driver's and front-
Indicator light for the front-seat seat passenger airbag
passenger airbags The explosive power that activates driver's/
front-seat passenger airbags very much de-
pends on the positions of the driver's/front
passenger seat.
To maintain the accuracy of this function
over the long-term, calibrate the front seats
as soon as a relevant Check Control mes-
sage is displayed. A message also appears
on the Control Display.
The indicator light for the front-seat passen-

Calibrating the front seats
ger airbags indicates the operating state of
the front-seat passenger airbags. Warning
The light indicates whether the airbags are There is a risk of jamming when moving
either activated or deactivated. the seats. There is a risk of injury or risk
of damage to property. Make sure that the
– The indicator light lights area of movement of the seat is clear prior
up when a child is properly to any adjustment.
seated in a child restraint
system or when the seat is An appropriate Check Control message is
empty. The airbags on the displayed.
front passenger side are
not activated.
154
Safety CONTROLS
1. Move the respective seat all the way for- – After the tire inflation pressure was ad-
ward. justed to a new value, a reset was per-
formed.
2. Move the respective seat forward again.
The seat moves forward briefly. – Wheels with TPM wheel electronics.
3. Readjust the seat to the desired posi-
tion.
Status display
The calibration procedure is completed Current status
when the Check Control message disap-
pears. The system status can be displayed on the
Control Display, e.g., whether or not the sys-
If the message continues to be displayed, tem is active.
repeat the calibration.
If the message does not disappear after a re-
peat calibration, have the system checked 1. "My MINI"
as soon as possible. 2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
Tire Pressure Monitor TPM The current status is displayed.
Tire conditions
Concept
The system monitors tire inflation pressure General information
in the four mounted tires. The system warns
Tire and system status are indicated by the
you if there is a significant loss of pressure
color of the wheels and a text message on
in one or more tires.
the Control Display.
General information All wheels green
Sensors in the tire valves measure the tire System is active and will issue a warning re-
inflation pressure and, depending on the lated to the tire inflation pressures stored
model, the tire temperature. during the last reset.
Further information and instructions on us-
ing the system can also be found under Tire One to four yellow wheels
inflation pressure, refer to page 246.
A flat tire or major drop in the tire inflation
pressure has occurred in the indicated tires.
The following conditions must be met for Gray wheels
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a It may not be possible to identify tire infla-
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: tion pressure losses.
– After a tire or wheel replacement, a re- Possible causes:
set was performed with the correct tire
inflation pressure. – Malfunction.
– The system is being reset.
155
CONTROLS Safety
Additional information Safety information

The status control display additionally
shows the current tire inflation pressures. Warning
The values shown are instantaneous meas-
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
urements and may vary depending on driv-
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
ing style or weather conditions.
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
Resetting the system stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not
Via the Central Information Display (CID): continue driving if the vehicle is equipped
with normal tires. Follow the information
1. "My MINI"
on run-flat tires and continued driving
2. "Vehicle status" with these tires.
3. "Tire Pressure Monitor"
4. Start the engine but do not drive off. If a tire inflation pressure check is
5. Reset tire inflation pressure: "Perform required
reset".
6. Drive away. Message
The wheels are displayed in gray and the A icon with a Check Control message ap-
following is displayed "Resetting Tire pears on the Control Display.
Pressure Monitor…". Icon Possible cause
After a travel time of several minutes, the The system has detected a wheel
set tire inflation pressures are accepted as change, but no reset was done.
reference values. The resetting process is
completed automatically while driving. No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a warn-
After successful completion of the reset, the ing based on the tire inflation
tires appear in green on the Control Display pressures stored during the last
and "Tire Pressure Monitor active. See label reset.
for recommended pressures." is displayed.
Inflation was not carried out ac-
You may interrupt this trip at any time. cording to specifications.
When you continue the reset resumes auto-
matically. The tire inflation pressure has
fallen below the level of the last
Messages reset.
General information Measure

A low tire inflation pressure may cause the 1. Check the tire pressure and correct as
DSC Dynamic Stability Control to be needed.
switched on. 2. Reset the system.
156
Safety CONTROLS
If the tire inflation pressure is too low Icon Possible cause
Message There is a flat tire or a major loss

in tire inflation pressure.
A yellow warning light is illuminated
No reset was performed for the
system. The system issues a warn-
ing based on the tire inflation
In addition, a icon with a Check Control
pressures stored during the last
message appears on the Control Display.
reset.
Icon Possible cause
There is a tire inflation pressure Measure
loss. 1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously.
No reset was performed for the Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
system. The system issues a warn- neuvers.
ing based on the tire inflation 2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with
pressures stored during the last normal tires or run-flat tires.
reset. Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are la-
beled with a circular icon containing the
Measure letters RSC marked on the tire's side-
1. Reduce your speed and drive moder- wall.
ately. Do not exceed a speed of
80 mph/130 km/h. Actions in the event of a flat tire
2. At the next opportunity, for instance gas
station, check and correct the tire infla- Normal tires
tion pressure in all four tires, if neces- 1. Identify the damaged tire.
sary. To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
3. Reset the system. sure in all four tires, for instance using
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit.
If there is a significant loss of tire If the tire inflation pressure in all four
inflation pressure tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni-
tor may not have been reset. In this
Message case, perform the reset.
A yellow warning light is illuminated If the tire inflation pressure in all four
in the instrument cluster. tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
may not have been initialized. In this
In addition, a icon with the affected tire ap- case, initialize the system.
pears in a Check Control message on the If identification of flat tire damage is
Control Display. not possible, please contact a dealer’s
service center or another qualified serv-
ice center or repair shop.
2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
157
CONTROLS Safety
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire ing distance may be less but may also be
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics. more if an economical driving style is used.
In this case, have the electronics checked If the vehicle is loaded with an average
and replaced at the next opportunity. weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to
Run-flat tires drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Safety information Vehicle handling with damaged tires

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
Warning handle differently, potentially leading to
The vehicle handles differently when a conditions such as the following:
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire – Greater likelihood of swerving off
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil- course.
ity when braking, braking distances are – Longer braking distances.
longer and the self-steering properties will
– Changed self-steering properties.
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
moderately and do not exceed a speed of Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt
50 mph/80 km/h. steering maneuvers or driving over obsta-
cles, for instance curbs or potholes.
Maximum speed Final tire failure

You may continue driving with a damaged Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h. indicate the final failure of a tire.
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
Continued driving with a flat tire the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
If continuing to drive with a damaged tire: dent.
1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s
neuvers. service center or another qualified service
2. Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h. System limits
3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires at the next opportunity. Temperature
If the tire inflation pressure in all four The tire inflation pressure depends on the
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- tire's temperature.
tor may not have been reset. In this
Driving or exposure to the sun will increase
case, perform the reset.
the tire's temperature, thus increasing the
tire inflation pressure.
Possible driving distance with a
depressurized tire The tire inflation pressure is reduced when
the tire temperature falls again.
The distance for which it may be possible to
drive safely varies depending on how the These circumstances may cause a warning
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road when temperatures fall very sharply.
conditions, outside temperature. The driv-
158
Safety CONTROLS
Sudden tire pressure loss bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different
The system cannot indicate sudden serious size than the size indicated on the vehicle
tire damage caused by external circumstan- placard or tire inflation pressure label, you
ces. should determine the proper tire inflation
pressure for those tires.) As an added safety
Failure performing a reset feature, your vehicle has been equipped
with a tire pressure monitoring system
The system does not function properly if a (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure
reset has not been carried out, for instance telltale when one or more of your tires is
a flat tire is reported though tire inflation significantly under-inflated. Accordingly,
pressures are correct. when the low tire pressure telltale illumi-
nates, you should stop and check your tires
Malfunction as soon as possible, and inflate them to the
The yellow warning light flashes and proper pressure. Driving on a significantly
is then illuminated continuously. A under-inflated tire causes the tire to over-
Check Control message is displayed. heat and can lead to tire failure. Under-infla-
It may not be possible to identify tire pres- tion also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
sure losses. tread life, and may affect the vehicle's han-
dling and stopping ability. Please note that
Examples and recommendations in the fol-
the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
lowing situations:
maintenance, and it is the driver's responsi-
– A wheel without TPM wheel electronics, bility to maintain correct tire pressure, even
for instance an emergency wheel, is if under-inflation has not reached the level
mounted: have it checked by a dealer’s to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire
service center or another qualified serv- pressure telltale. Your vehicle has also been
ice center or repair shop as needed. equipped with a TPMS malfunction indica-
– Malfunction: have system checked by a tor to indicate when the system is not oper-
dealer’s service center or another quali- ating properly. The TPMS malfunction indi-
fied service center or repair shop. cator is combined with the low tire pressure
– The system was unable to complete the telltale. When the system detects a mal-
reset. Perform a system reset again. function, the telltale will flash for approxi-
mately one minute and then remain contin-
– Interference caused by systems or devi- uously illuminated. This sequence will
ces with the same radio frequency: after continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups
leaving the area of the interference, the as long as the malfunction exists. When the
system automatically becomes active malfunction indicator is illuminated, the
again. system may not be able to detect or signal
low tire pressure as intended. TPMS mal-
Declaration according to NHTSA/ functions may occur for a variety of rea-
FMVSS 138 Tire Pressure Monitoring sons, including the installation of replace-
System ment or alternate tires or wheels on the
Each tire, including the spare (if provided) vehicle that prevent the TPMS from func-
should be checked monthly when cold and tioning properly. Always check the TPMS
inflated to the inflation pressure recom- malfunction telltale after replacing one or
mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the more tires or wheels on your vehicle to en-
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la- sure that the replacement or alternate tires
159
CONTROLS Safety
and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to Initialization required

function properly.
An initialization must be performed in the
Flat Tire Monitor FTM – After the tire inflation pressure has
been adjusted.
– After a tire or wheel replacement.
Concept
The system detects tire inflation pressure Performing initialization
loss on the basis of rotation speed differen-
When initializing, the set tire inflation
ces between the individual wheels while
pressures serve as reference values in order
driving.
to detect a flat tire. Initialization is started
In the event of a tire inflation pressure loss, by confirming the tire inflation pressures.
the diameter and therefore the rotational
Do not initialize the system when driving
speed of the corresponding wheel changes.
with tire chains.
The difference will be detected and reported
as a flat tire. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
The system does not measure the actual in- 1. "My MINI"
flation pressure in the tires. 2. "Vehicle status"
Functional requirements 3. "Flat Tire Monitor"
The following conditions must be met for 4. Start the engine but do not drive off.
the system; otherwise, reliable message of a 5. Start the initialization with: "Perform
loss of tire inflation pressure is not assured: reset".
– After a tire or wheel replacement, an ini- 6. Drive away.
tialization was performed with the cor- The initialization is completed while driv-
rect tire inflation pressure. ing, which can be interrupted at any time.
– After the tire pressure was adjusted to a The initialization automatically continues
new value, an initialization was per- when driving continues.
formed.
Messages
Status display
The current status of the flat tire monitor General information
can be displayed, for instance whether the
When a flat tire is indicated, DSC Dynamic
RPA is active.
Stability Control is switched on, if needed.
1. "My MINI" Safety information
2. "Vehicle status"
3. "Flat Tire Monitor" Warning
A damaged regular tire with low or miss-
The status is displayed.
ing tire inflation pressure impacts han-
dling, such as steering and braking re-
sponse. Run-flat tires can maintain limited
160
Safety CONTROLS
stability. There is a risk of accident. Do not may not have been initialized. In this
continue driving if the vehicle is equipped case, initialize the system.
with normal tires. Follow the information If identification of flat tire damage is
on run-flat tires and continued driving not possible, please contact a dealer’s
with these tires. service center or another qualified serv-
Indication of a flat tire 2. Repair the flat tire, e.g., with a flat tire
kit or by changing the wheel.
A yellow warning light is illuminated
Use of sealant, for instance from the flat tire
kit, may damage the TPM wheel electronics.
In this case, have the electronics checked
In addition, a icon with a Check Control
and replaced at the next opportunity.
message appears on the Control Display.
Icon Possible cause Run-flat tires
There is a flat tire or a major loss
in tire inflation pressure. Safety information
Warning
Measure
The vehicle handles differently when a
1. Reduce your speed and stop cautiously. run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
Avoid sudden braking and steering ma- pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
neuvers. ity when braking, braking distances are
2. Check whether the vehicle is fitted with longer and the self-steering properties will
normal tires or run-flat tires. change. There is a risk of accident. Drive
Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are la- moderately and do not exceed a speed of
beled with a circular icon containing the 50 mph/80 km/h.
letters RSC marked on the tire's side-
wall. Maximum speed
You may continue driving with a damaged
Actions in the event of a flat tire tire at speeds up to 50 mph/80 km/h.
Normal tires Continued driving with a flat tire
1. Identify the damaged tire. If continuing to drive with a damaged tire:
To do this, check the tire inflation pres-
sure in all four tires, for instance using 1. Avoid sudden braking and steering ma-
the tire pressure gage of a flat tire kit. neuvers.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four 2. Do not exceed a speed of
tires is correct, the Tire Pressure Moni- 50 mph/80 km/h.
tor may not have been reset. In this 3. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
case, perform the reset. four tires at the next opportunity.
If the tire inflation pressure in all four If the tire inflation pressure in all four
tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor tires is correct, the Flat Tire Monitor
161
CONTROLS Safety
may not have been initialized. In this nized. Therefore, check the tire inflation
case, initialize the system. pressure regularly.
– Sudden serious tire damage caused by
Possible driving distance with a external circumstances cannot be recog-
depressurized tire nized in advance.
The distance for which it may be possible to – When the system has not been initial-
drive safely varies depending on how the ized.
vehicle is loaded and used, e.g., speed, road
– When driving on a snowy or slippery
conditions, outside temperature. The driv-
road surface.
ing distance may be less but may also be
more if an economical driving style is used. – Sporty driving style: spinning traction
wheels, high lateral acceleration (drift-
If the vehicle is loaded with an average
ing).
weight and used under favorable conditions,
the distance for which it may be safe to – When driving with tire chains.
drive may be up to 50 miles/80 km.
Vehicle handling with damaged tires Intelligent Safety

Vehicles driven with a damaged tire will
handle differently, potentially leading to Concept
conditions such as the following:
Intelligent Safety enables central operation
– Greater likelihood of swerving off of the driver assistance systems.
course.
The intelligent safety systems can help pre-
– Longer braking distances. vent an imminent collision.
– Changed self-steering properties. – Forward Collision Warning with city
Modify your driving style. Avoid abrupt collision mitigation, refer to page 163.
steering maneuvers or driving over obsta- – Pedestrian Collision Warning with City
cles, for instance curbs or potholes. Collision Mitigation, refer to page 167.
– Lane departure warning, refer to
Final tire failure
page 169.
Vibrations or loud noises while driving can
indicate the final failure of a tire. Safety information
Reduce speed and stop; otherwise, pieces of
the tire could come loose and cause an acci-
dent. Warning
Do not continue driving. Contact a dealer’s The system cannot serve as a substitute
service center or another qualified service for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
center or repair shop. sessing visibility and traffic situation.
System limits style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
The system could be delayed or malfunction propriate.
in the following situations:
– A natural, even tire inflation pressure
loss in all four tires will not be recog-
162
Safety CONTROLS
Press button briefly:

Warning – The menu for the Intelligent
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a Safety system is displayed. The
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- systems are individually
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not switched off according to their
issue warnings or reactions, or these may respective settings.
be issued late or in a manner that is not – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
consistent with their normal use. There is tive to their individual settings.
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Adjust the settings as needed. The individ-
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
ual settings are stored for the driver profile
and actively intervene where appropriate.
currently in use.
Press button again:

Warning – All Intelligent Safety systems
Due to system limits, individual functions are switched on.
can malfunction during tow-starting/ – The LED lights up green.
towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident. Hold down button:
Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
– All Intelligent Safety systems
prior to tow-starting/towing.
are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Overview
Button in the vehicle Forward Collision Warning
with city light braking func-
tion
Concept
The system may prevent some accidents. In
the event of an accident, the system may re-
duce impact speed.
The system sounds a warning before an im-
Intelligent Safety button minent collision and activates brakes inde-
pendently, if needed.
The Brake Intervention function activates
Switching on/off and applies the brakes with limited force
Some Intelligent Safety systems are auto- and duration.
matically active after every departure. Some A camera at the base of the interior mirror
Intelligent Safety systems activate accord- controls the system.
ing to the last setting. The Forward Collision Warning is available
even if cruise control has been deactivated.
163
CONTROLS Safety
With the vehicle approaching another vehi-

cle intentionally, the Forward Collision Warning
Warning and brake intervention are delayed Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
in order to avoid false system reactions. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
General information issue warnings or reactions, or these may
The system warns at two levels of an immi- be issued late or in a manner that is not
nent danger of collision at speeds from ap- consistent with their normal use. There is
prox. 3 mph/5 km/h. The timing of warn- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
ings may vary with the current driving traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
situation. and actively intervene where appropriate.
If necessary, a brake intervention will oc-
cur. Depending on the equipment and na-
tional-market version, the brake interven- Warning
tion will occur up to approx. Due to system limits, individual functions
35 mph/60 km/h or up to approx. can malfunction during tow-starting/
35 mph/60 km/h. towing with the Intelligent Safety systems
activated. There is a risk of accident.
Detection range Switch all Intelligent Safety systems off
Overview
Button in the vehicle
Objects that the system can detect are

taken into account.
Safety information
Warning Intelligent Safety button

The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing visibility and traffic situation.
style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
164
Safety CONTROLS
Camera – The LED goes out.
Setting the warning time

The warning time can be set via the Central
Information Display (CID).
1. "My MINI"
3. "Intelligent Safety"
4. "Warning time"
The camera is installed near the interior
mirror. 5. Select the desired setting.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior The selected warning time is stored for the
mirror clean and clear. driver profile currently in use.
Switching on/off Warning with braking function

Display
Switching on automatically
A warning symbol appears in the instru-
The system is automatically active when the
ment cluster and in the Head-up Display if a
vehicle is turned on.
collision with a detected vehicle is immi-
nent.
Icon Measure
Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent Icon lights up red: prewarning.
Safety system is displayed. The Brake and increase distance.
systems are individually
switched off according to their Symbol flashes red and an acous-
respective settings. tic signal sounds: acute warning.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec- Brake and make an evasive ma-
tive to their individual settings. neuver, if necessary.
ual settings are stored for the driver profile Prewarning
currently in use. This warning is provided, for instance when
there is impending danger of a collision or
Press button again: the distance to the vehicle ahead is too
– All Intelligent Safety systems small.
are switched on. If a prewarning is provided, respond by
– The LED lights up green. braking as warranted.
Hold down button: Acute warning with braking function

– All Intelligent Safety systems An acute warning is displayed when there
are switched off. is an imminent danger of collision due to
165
CONTROLS Safety
the vehicle approaching another object at a accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
high speed. tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
The driver must intervene actively when information in this Owner’s Manual re-
there is an acute warning. If necessary, the garding the scope of the system’s opera-
driver is assisted by a minor automatic tion and limitations.
brake intervention in a possible risk of colli-
sion.
Detection range
Acute warnings may be provided even when
there has been no prior warning. The system's detection potential is limited.
Thus, a system reaction might not come or
Brake intervention might come late.
The warning prompts the driver to inter- The following situations may not be de-
vene. While a warning is active, the maxi- tected, for example:
mum braking force is used when the brake – Slow moving vehicles when you ap-
is applied. In order to activate the Brake As- proach them at high speed.
sistant function, you must apply the brakes – Vehicles that suddenly swerve in front
quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of of you, or sharply decelerating vehicles.
collision, the system may assist with brak-
ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low – Vehicles with an unusual rear appear-
speed, the vehicle may come to a complete ance.
stop. – Two-wheeled vehicles ahead of you.
Manual transmission: during a brake inter-
vention up to a complete stop, the engine Functional limitations
may be shut down. The system may be limited in the following
The driver may interrupt the braking inter- situations:
vention function by stepping on the acceler- – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- fall.
ing wheel. – In tight curves.
The system’s ability to detect objects may – If the field of view of the camera or the
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to windshield is dirty or covered.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
– If the driving stability control systems
garding the limitations of the system and
are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
actively intervene as warranted.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
System limits engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
Safety information diately after vehicle delivery.
– If there are constant blinding effects be-
cause of oncoming light, for instance
Warning
from the sun low in the sky.
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to Warning sensitivity
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of The more sensitive the warning settings
are, the more warnings are displayed.
166
Safety CONTROLS
Therefore, there may also be an excess of – Expanded area, arrow 2, to the right and
premature or unjustified warnings and reac- left of the central area.
tions. A collision is imminent if pedestrians are lo-
cated within the central area. A warning is
issued about pedestrians who are located
Pedestrian Collision Warning within the extended area only if they are
with City Collision Mitigation moving in the direction of the central area.
Concept Safety information

The system may prevent some accidents
with pedestrians. Warning
When driving at city speeds, the system The system cannot serve as a substitute
will issue a warning if there is imminent for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
risk of a collision with pedestrians, and sup- sessing visibility and traffic situation.
port this with a light braking function. There is a risk of accident. Adjust driving
The camera at the base of the interior mir- style to traffic conditions. Watch traffic
ror controls the system. closely and actively intervene where ap-
propriate.
General information
In sufficiently bright conditions, the system
issues a warning of a possible risk of colli- Warning
sion with pedestrians in the speed range Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
from approx. 6 mph/10 km/h to approx. substitute for the driver’s personal judg-
35 mph/60 km/h ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
The system reacts to people who are within issue warnings or reactions, or these may
the detection range of the system. be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is
Detection range a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
Warning
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/
The detection area in front of the vehicle is prior to tow-starting/towing.
divided into two areas:
– Central area, arrow 1, directly in front of
the vehicle.
167
CONTROLS Safety
Overview switched off according to their

respective settings.
Button in the vehicle – LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
currently in use.
Press button again:

are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
Intelligent Safety button
Hold down button:
Camera are switched off.
– The LED goes out.
Warning with braking function

Display
If a collision with a detected person is im-
minent, a warning symbol appears on the
instrument cluster and in the Head-up Dis-
play.
The camera is installed near the interior The red icon is displayed and a sig-
mirror. nal sounds.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior Intervene immediately by braking or
mirror clean and clear. make an evasive maneuver.
Switching on/off Brake intervention

The warning prompts the driver to inter-
Switching on automatically vene. While a warning is active, the maxi-
The system is automatically active when the mum braking force is used when the brake
vehicle is turned on. is applied. In order to activate the Brake As-
sistant function, you must apply the brakes
Switching on/off manually quickly and forcefully. If there is a risk of
Press button briefly: collision, the system may assist with brak-
ing. When the vehicle is traveling at a low
– The menu for the Intelligent speed, the vehicle may come to a complete
Safety system is displayed. The stop.
168
Safety CONTROLS
Manual transmission: during a brake inter- – Pedestrians having a body size less than
vention up to a complete stop, the engine 32 in/80 cm.
may be shut down.
The driver may interrupt the braking inter- Functional limitations
vention function by stepping on the acceler- The system may be limited or may not be
ator pedal or by actively moving the steer- available in the following situations:
ing wheel. – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
The system’s ability to detect objects may fall.
be limited in some circumstances. Refer to – In tight curves.
the information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the limitations of the system and – If the field of view of the camera or the
actively intervene as warranted. windshield is dirty or covered.
– If the driving stability control systems
System limits are deactivated, for instance DSC OFF.
– Up to 10 seconds after the start of the
Safety information engine via the Start/Stop button.
– During calibration of the camera imme-
Warning diately after vehicle delivery.
The system is designed to operate in cer- – If there are constant blinding effects be-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to cause of oncoming light, for instance
conditions or other factors, the system from the sun low in the sky.
may not respond. There may be a risk of – When it is dark outside.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the
information in this Owner’s Manual re- Lane departure warning
garding the scope of the system’s opera-
tion and limitations.
Concept
The lane departure warning alerts when the
Detection range vehicle on roads with lane markings is
The detection potential of the camera is lim- about to leave the lane.
ited.
Thus, a warning might not be issued or be General information
issued late. Depending on the country version, the sys-
The following situations may not be de- tem issues a warning at speeds between
tected, for example: 35 mph/55 km/h and 45 mph/70 km/h.
– Partially covered pedestrians. Warnings are issued by means of a steering
wheel vibration. The time of the warning
– Pedestrians that are not detected as may vary depending on the current driving
such because of the viewing angle or situation.
contour.
The system does not provide a warning if
– Pedestrians outside of the detection the turn signal is set before leaving the
range. lane.
169
CONTROLS Safety
Safety information Camera
Warning
sessing road and traffic situation. There is
Do not jerk the steering wheel in response
to a warning. The camera is installed near the interior
mirror.
Keep the windshield in front of the interior
Warning mirror clean and clear.
Indicators and warnings cannot serve as a
substitute for the driver’s personal judg- Switching on/off
ment. Due to its limits, the system may not
issue warnings or reactions, or these may
be issued late or in a manner that is not
consistent with their normal use. There is The lane departure warning is automatically
a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to activated after departure, if the function
traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely was switched on the last time the engine
and actively intervene where appropriate. was stopped.

Overview Press button briefly:
– The menu for the Intelligent
Button in the vehicle
Safety system is displayed. The
switched off according to their
respective settings.
– LED lights up orange or goes out respec-
tive to their individual settings.
currently in use.
Intelligent Safety button Press button again:

are switched on.
– The LED lights up green.
170
Safety CONTROLS
Hold down button: garding the scope of the system’s opera-

– All Intelligent Safety systems tion and limitations.
are switched off.
– The LED goes out. Functional limitations
The system may be limited in the following
Display in the instrument cluster situations:
The icon illuminates green: at least – In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
one lane marking was detected and fall.
warnings can be issued. – In the event of missing, worn, poorly
visible, merging, diverging, or multiple
lane markings such as in construction
Issued warning areas.
If you leave the lane – When lane markings are covered in
snow, ice, dirt or water.
If you leave the lane and if a lane marking
has been detected, the steering wheel vi- – In tight curves or on narrow lanes.
brates. – When lane markings are covered by ob-
If the turn signal is switched on before jects.
changing the lane, a warning is not issued. – When driving very close to the vehicle
in front of you.
End of warning – When driving toward bright lights.
The warning is canceled in the following – When the windshield in front of the in-
situations: terior mirror is fogged over, dirty or cov-
– Automatically after approx. 3 seconds. ered with stickers, etc.
– When returning to your own lane. – During calibration of the camera imme-
– When braking hard.
– When using the turn signal.
Manual Speed Limiter
System limits
Safety information Concept
The system can be used to set a speed limit,
for instance to prevent the vehicle from ex-
Warning ceeding speed limits.
The system is designed to operate in cer-
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to General information
conditions or other factors, the system
may not respond. There may be a risk of The system can limit the speed, starting at a
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- value of 20 mph/30 km/h. The vehicle can
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the be driven at any speed below the set speed
information in this Owner’s Manual re- limit.
171
CONTROLS Safety
Exceeding the speed limit When the speed limit is switched on, DSC
When necessary, the speed limit can be in- Dynamic Stability Control is switched on as
tentionally overcome by stepping on the well, if needed.
gas.
Switching off
When the vehicle speed exceeds the set
speed limit, a warning is issued. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
No brake intervention
The system switches off automatically in
If the set speed limit is reached or uninten- the following situations, for example:
tionally exceeded, such as when driving
– When shifting into reverse gear.
downhill, the vehicle is not actively braked.
– When the engine is switched off.
When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the driving speed, the vehicle – When cruise control is switched on.
coasts until its driving speed drops below – On activation of Dynamic Traction Con-
the set speed limit. trol DTC or deactivation of DSC.
The displays go out.
Overview
Changing the speed limit
Steering wheel buttons, left or button: press up or down repeat-
edly until the desired speed limit is set.
Button Function
– or button: each time it is pressed
System on/off. to the resistance point, the speed limit
increases or decreases by 1 mph,
Increase the speed limit. 1 km/h.
Reduce the speed limit. past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Operation When the speed limit is set during a trip to
a value below the current speed, the vehicle
Switching on coasts until it drops to the set speed limit.
Press the button on the steering Exceeding the speed limit

wheel.
The speed limit can be exceeded intention-
The current speed is accepted as the speed ally. There is no acoustic warning in this
limit. case.
If the system is switched on while the vehi- Press the accelerator pedal all the way down
cle is stationary or driving at low speeds, to intentionally exceed the set speed limit.
20 mph/30 km/h is set as the speed limit. When the vehicle speed drops below the set
The set speed is displayed under the LIMIT speed limit, the limit is automatically reacti-
or LIM indicator. vated.
172
Safety CONTROLS
Warning when the speed limit is Fatigue alert

exceeded
Concept
Visual warning
The system can detect decreasing alertness
If the set speed limit is exceeded, the LIMIT or fatigue of the driver during long, monoto-
or LIM indicator flashes while the vehicle nous trips, for instance on highways. In this
speed is greater than the speed limit. situation, it is recommended that the driver
takes a break.
Acoustic warning
– If the speed limit is exceeded uninten- Safety information
tionally, a signal sounds.
– When the speed limit is reduced to be- Warning
low the vehicle speed while driving, a
signal sounds after approx. 30 seconds. The system cannot serve as a substitute
– When the speed limit is intentionally sessing one's physical state. An increasing
exceeded by stepping on the accelerator lack of alertness or fatigue may not be de-
pedal all the way down, there is no sig- tected or not be detected in time. There is
nal. a risk of accident. Make sure that the
driver is rested and alert. Adjust driving
Displays in the instrument cluster style to traffic conditions.
Instrument cluster without enhanced
features:
Function
The desired speed is displayed under
the LIMIT indicator. The system is switched on each time the en-
gine is started and cannot be switched off.
Instrument cluster with en- After travel has begun, the system monitors
hanced features: certain aspects of the driver's behavior, so
The desired speed is displayed that decreasing alertness or fatigue can be
under the LIM indicator. detected.
This procedure takes the following criteria
– The indicator does not light up: the sys- into account:
tem is switched off. – Personal driving style, for instance
– The indicator lights up green: the sys- steering behavior.
tem is active. – Driving conditions, for instance time,
– Display flashes green: set speed limit ex- length of trip.
ceeded. Starting at approximately 43 mph/70 km/h,
the system is active and can display a rec-
Displays in the Head-up Display ommendation to take a break.
The information from the Speed Limiter can
also be displayed in the Head-up Display. Break recommendation
If the driver becomes less alert or fatigued,
a message is displayed in the Control Dis-
173
CONTROLS Safety
play with the recommendation to take a At standstill

break.
After coming to a halt, the brake is released
A recommendation to take a break is dis- automatically. Secure the vehicle against
played only once during an uninterrupted rolling.
trip.
After a break, another recommendation to Harder vehicle braking
take a break cannot be displayed until after In certain situations, it can be necessary to
approximately 45 minutes. bring the vehicle to a halt more quickly than
the Brake Assistant allows.
System limits To do this, quickly apply extra force to the
The function may be limited in the follow- brake. For a brief period, the braking pres-
ing situations and may issue an incorrect sure will be higher than the braking pres-
warning or no warning at all: sure that is achieved by the automatic brak-
– When the time is set incorrectly. ing function. This interrupts automatic
– When the vehicle speed is mainly below braking.
about 43 mph/70 km/h.
– With a sporty driving style, such as dur-
Interrupting automatic braking
ing rapid acceleration or when corner- It can be necessary to interrupt automatic
ing fast. braking in certain situations, for instance
for an evasive maneuver.
– In active driving situations, such as
when changing lanes frequently. Interrupt automatic braking:
– When the road surface is poor. – By pressing the brake pedal.
– In the event of strong side winds. – By pressing the accelerator pedal.
The system is reset approx. 45 minutes af-
ter parking the vehicle, for instance in the
case of a break during longer trips on high-
ways.
PostCrash – iBrake
Concept
In the event of an accident, the system can
bring the vehicle to a halt automatically
without intervention by the driver in cer-
tain situations. This can reduce the risk of a
further collision and the consequences
thereof.
174
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
Driving stability control systems

Vehicle features and options DSC Dynamic Stability Control
This chapter describes all standard, country- Concept
specific and optional features offered with Within the physical limits, the system helps
the series. It also describes features and to keep the vehicle on a steady course by
functions that are not necessarily available reducing engine speed and by applying
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- brake intervention to the individual wheels.
When using these functions and systems, General information
the applicable laws and regulations must be DSC detects the following unstable driving
observed. conditions, for instance:
– Fishtailing, which can lead to oversteer-
ing.
Antilock Braking System ABS – Loss of traction of the front wheels,
which can lead to understeering.
ABS prevents locking of the wheels during Dynamic Traction Control DTC, refer to
braking. page 176, is a version of the DSC where
The vehicle maintains its steering power drive power is optimized.
even during full brake applications, which
increases the active safety. Safety information
ABS is ready when the drive-ready state is
switched on. Warning
Brake assistant sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
limits of the system, it cannot independ-
When you apply the brakes rapidly, this sys- ently react to all traffic situations. There is
tem automatically boosts the vehicle brak- a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
ing capability to the furthest possible ex- traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
tent. It reduces the braking distance to a and actively intervene where appropriate.
minimum during an emergency stop. This
system utilizes all of the capabilities pro-
vided by the Antilock Brake System ABS. Warning
Do not reduce the pressure on the brake When driving with a roof load, for in-
pedal for the duration of the emergency stance with roof-mounted luggage rack,
stop. the vehicle's center of gravity is higher,
which increases the risk of the vehicle tip-
ping in critical driving situations. There
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage
175
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
to property. Do not deactivate DSC Dy- Automatic activation

namic Stability Control when driving with
When DSC is deactivated, automatic activa-
roof load.
tion occurs in the following situations:
– The vehicle has a flat tire.
Indicator/warning lights – When activating cruise control in the
The indicator light flashes: DSC con- TRACTION or DSC OFF settings.
trols the drive and braking forces.
The indicator light lights up: DSC has
malfunctioned.
DTC Dynamic Traction Con-
trol
Deactivating DSC: DSC OFF
Concept
General information DTC is a version of the DSC Dynamic Stabil-
When DSC is deactivated, driving stability ity Control where drive power is optimized.
is reduced during acceleration and when The system ensures maximum drive power
driving in curves. on unusual road conditions, for instance
To increase driving stability, activate DSC unplowed snow covered roads, or loose road
again as soon as possible. surfaces, but with somewhat limited driving
stability.
Deactivating DSC When DTC is activated, the vehicle has
maximum traction. Driving stability is lim-
Press and hold this button but not ited during acceleration and when driving
longer than approx. 10 seconds, un- in curves.
til the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up in the instrument cluster and dis- Drive carefully.
plays DSC OFF. You may find it useful to briefly activate
DSC is switched off. DTC under the following special circum-
stances:
– When driving in slush or on uncleared,
Activating DSC snow-covered roads.
Press the button. – When driving off from deep snow or
DSC OFF and the DSC OFF indicator loose ground.
light go out. – When driving with tire chains.
Indicator/warning lights Deactivating/activating DTC

When DSC is deactivated, DSC OFF is dis- Dynamic Traction Control
played in the instrument cluster.
Activating DTC
The indicator light lights up: DSC is
deactivated. Press the button.
176
Driving stability control systems CONTROLS
TRACTION is displayed in the instrument Operating the programs

cluster and the indicator light for DSC OFF
lights up. Switch Program
SPORT
Deactivating DTC MID
Press the button again. GREEN
TRACTION and the DSC OFF indica-
tor light go out.
MID
MID provides balanced tuning.
Performance Control
With each starting operation, MID is acti-
vated using the Start/Stop button.
Performance Control enhances the agility of
the vehicle.
GREEN
To increase maneuverability, wheels are
braked individually when a sporty driving Concept
style is used.
GREEN provides consistent tuning to maxi-
mize range.
Adaptive chassis Activating GREEN
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch
Concept downward until GREEN is displayed in the
The system reduces undesired vehicle instrument cluster.
movements.
The driving dynamics and driving comfort Configuring GREEN
are enhanced depending on the road surface
condition and driving style. Via MINI Driving Modes switch
1. Activate GREEN.
2. "Configure GREEN"
MINI Driving Modes switch
3. Configure the program.
This configuration is retrieved when
Concept GREEN is activated.
The MINI Driving Modes switch helps to
fine-tune the vehicle's settings and features. Via the Central Information Display (CID)
Choose between three different programs. 1. "My MINI"
Pressing the MINI Driving Modes switch 2. "Vehicle settings"
will activate the particular program.
3. If necessary, "Driving mode"
4. "Configure GREEN"
177
CONTROLS Driving stability control systems
This configuration is retrieved when Driving off with the drive-off

GREEN is activated. assistant
SPORT 1. Hold the vehicle in place with the foot
brake.
Concept 2. Release the foot brake and drive off
without delay.
Consistently sporty tuning of the drivetrain
for greater driving agility. After the foot brake is released, the vehicle
is held in place for approx. 2 seconds.
Activating SPORT
Press the MINI Driving Modes switch up-
ward until SPORT is displayed in the instru- Servotronic
ment cluster.
Servotronic is a speed-dependent power
Configuring driving program steering function.
Settings can be made for the following driv- The system provides the steering force with
ing programs in Drive mode: more support at low speeds than at higher
ones. This makes it easier to park, for in-
– GREEN, refer to page 177. stance, and makes steering firmer when
driving at faster speeds.
Displays
Furthermore, the steering force adapts ac-
cording to the driving program, so that a
Program selection firm, sporty feel or a comfortable steering
Pressing the MINI Driving response is conveyed.
Modes switch displays a list of
programs, which can be se-
lected.
Selected program
The instrument cluster dis-
plays the selected program.
Drive-off assistant
Concept
This system supports driving off on uphill
grades. The parking brake is not required.
178
Driving comfort CONTROLS
Driving comfort
Vehicle features and options General information
A camera on the interior mirror is used to
This chapter describes all standard, country- detect vehicles driving ahead.
specific and optional features offered with Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
the series. It also describes features and trol settings may change under certain con-
functions that are not necessarily available ditions.
tions or country versions. This also applies Safety information
the applicable laws and regulations must be Warning
observed. The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
Camera-based cruise control limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
Concept traffic conditions. Watch traffic closely
Using this system, a desired speed and a and actively intervene where appropriate.
distance to a vehicle ahead can be adjusted
using the buttons on the steering wheel.
The system maintains the desired speed on Warning
clear roads. The vehicle accelerates or The desired speed can be incorrectly ad-
brakes automatically. justed or called up by mistake. There is a
If a vehicle is driving ahead of you, the sys- risk of accident. Adjust the desired speed
tem adjusts the speed of your vehicle so to the traffic conditions. Watch traffic
that the set distance to the vehicle ahead is closely and actively intervene where ap-
maintained. The speed is adjusted as far as propriate.
the given situation allows.
The distance can be adjusted in several
steps. For safety reasons, it depends on the Warning
respective speed.
Risk of accident due to too high speed dif-
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic ferences to other vehicles, for instance in
transmissions: if the vehicle ahead of you the following situations:
brakes to a halt, and then proceeds to drive
– When fast approaching a slowly mov-
again shortly thereafter, the system is able
ing vehicle.
to detect this within the given system lim-
its. – Vehicle suddenly swerving into own
lane.
– When fast approaching standing ve-
hicles.
179
CONTROLS Driving comfort
There is a risk of injuries or danger to life. Buttons are arranged according to vehicle's
Watch traffic closely and actively inter- series, optional features and country speci-
vene where appropriate. fications.
Camera
Warning
lowing:
– On uphill grades or on a downhill The camera is installed near the interior
slope, turn the front wheels in the di- mirror.
rection of the curb. Keep the windshield in front of the interior
– On uphill grades or on a downhill mirror clean and clear.
stance with a wheel chock. Functional requirements
The system is best used on well-constructed
Overview roads.
The system is functional at speeds begin-
Buttons on the steering wheel ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
Button Function transmissions: the system can also be acti-
Cruise control on/off, refer to vated while the vehicle is stationary.
page 181. The max. speed that can be set is
Pause cruise control, refer to 85 mph/140 km/h.
page 181. Manual transmission: Active Cruise Control
Continue cruise control with the is interrupted below a speed of approx.
last setting, refer to page 182. 20 mph/30 km/h. The system does not
brake to a stop.
Reduce distance, refer to If distance control is switched off, refer to
page 182. page 183, higher desired speeds can be se-
Increase the distance, refer to lected as well.
page 182.
Increase speed, refer to
page 181.
Reduce speed, refer to page 181.
180
Switching on/off and interrupting With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic
cruise control transmission: when canceling while station-
ary, depress the brake pedal simultaneously.
Switching on
Press the button on the steering Interrupting automatically
wheel. The system is automatically interrupted in
the following situations:
Instrument cluster without enhanced – When the driver applies the brakes.
features:
– Manual transmission: when the clutch
Display in the instrument cluster pedal is depressed for a few seconds or
lights up. released while a gear is not engaged.
Instrument cluster without enhanced – If selector lever position N is set.
features: – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
Display in the instrument cluster vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
lights up. The current speed is adopted as is deactivated.
desired speed and displayed with icon. – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
Instrument cluster with en- – If the detection range of the camera is
hanced features: impaired, for instance by soiling, heavy
Display in the instrument precipitation or glare effects from the
cluster lights up. The current sun.
speed is adopted as desired – Manual transmission: if the vehicle in
speed and displayed with icon. front decelerates below a speed of ap-
prox. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Cruise control is active and maintains the
set speed. – With the Stop&Go function for Step-
tronic transmissions: following a sta-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
tionary period of approx. 3 seconds, af-
on, if necessary.
ter the vehicle was braked to a stop by
the system.
Switching off
With the Stop&Go function for Steptronic Setting the speed
transmissions: when switching off while
stationary, depress the brake pedal simulta- Maintaining/storing the speed
neously.
Press or button in the interrupted
Press the button on the steering state.
wheel.
When the system is switched on, the cur-
The displays go out. The stored desired rent speed is maintained and stored as the
speed is deleted. desired speed.
Interrupting manually features:
wheel.
181
The stored speed is displayed by the icon in Reduce distance

the Info Display of the instrument cluster.
Press the button repeatedly until
Instrument cluster with en- the desired distance is set.
hanced features:
The stored speed is displayed. features:
The set distance is briefly displayed
in the left part of the Info Display of the in-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched strument cluster.
on, if necessary.
Changing the speed Increase the distance

or button: press until the desired Press the button repeatedly until
speed is set. the desired distance is set.
If active, the displayed speed is stored and
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when Instrument cluster without enhanced
the road is clear. features:
– or button: each time it is pressed The set distance is briefly displayed
to the point of resistance, the desired in the left part of the Info Display of the in-
speed increases or decreases by approx. strument cluster.
1 mph/1 km/h.
– or button: each time it is pressed Continuing cruise control
past the resistance point, the desired
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/ General information
10 km/h. An interrupted cruise control can be contin-
or button: hold down to repeat the ued by calling up the stored speed.
action. Make sure that the difference between cur-
rent speed and stored speed is not too large
Adjusting the distance before calling up the stored speed. Other-
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating
Safety information may occur.
In the following cases, the stored speed
Warning value is deleted and cannot be called up
The system cannot serve as a substitute again:
for the driver’s personal judgment. Due to – When the system is switched off.
the system limits, braking can be late. – When the ignition is switched off.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Be aware to the traffic Calling up the stored speed and
situation at all times. Adjust the distance distance
to the traffic and weather conditions and
maintain the prescribed safety distance, Press the button with the system in-
possibly by braking. terrupted. Cruise control is contin-
ued with the stored values. The in-
182
strument cluster briefly displays the – Display lights up green: system is active,
selected distance. the display indicates the desired speed.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
Switching distance control on/off terrupted, the display indicates the
stored speed.
Safety information – No display: system is switched off.
Instrument cluster with en-

Warning hanced features:
The system does not react to traffic driv- – Display lights up green:
ing ahead of you, but instead maintains system is active, the dis-
the stored speed. There may be a risk of play indicates the desired
accident or risk of damage to property. Ad- speed.
just the desired speed to the traffic condi-
– Speed value is illuminated gray: system
tions and brake as needed.
is interrupted.
– No display: system is switched off.
Switching distance control off
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that
Distance control can be switched off and on the conditions necessary for operation are
when driving with cruise control activated. not currently fulfilled.
Press and hold this button.
Distance to vehicle ahead of you
Or:
Distance display
Press and hold this button.
Distance 1

cluster lights up. Distance 2
To switch distance control back on, press

one of the two buttons again briefly. Distance 3
After changing over distance control, a
Check Control message is displayed.
Distance 4
Displays in the instrument cluster This value is set automatically af-
ter the system is switched on.
Desired speed and stored speed
Instrument cluster without enhanced Instrument clusters without enhanced fea-
features: tures: selected distance from the vehicle
driving ahead is briefly displayed in the left
In addition to the indicator light, the hand portion of the Info Display.
desired speed is displayed in the Info Dis-
play.
183
Detected vehicle System interrupted without detected

vehicle.
features:
System interrupted with detected ve-
Icon lights up orange: a vehicle has hicle.
been detected ahead of you.
Instrument cluster with en- Displays in the Head-up Display

hanced features:
The information from Active Cruise Control
Vehicle symbol is displayed: a can also be displayed in the Head-up Dis-
vehicle has been detected play.
ahead of you.
With the Stop&Go function for Step- System limits

tronic transmissions:
Detection range
Rolling bars: the detected vehicle
has driven away.
ACC does not accelerate. To accelerate, acti-
vate ACC as follows:
– By briefly pressing the accelerator
pedal.
– By pressing the RES CNCL button.
– By pressing the or button.
Indicator/warning lights The detection capacity of the system and

the automatic braking capacity are limited.
features: Two-wheeled vehicles for instance might
not be detected.
Icon flashes orange.
Instrument cluster with enhanced Deceleration

features: The system does not decelerate in the fol-
Vehicle symbol flashes. lowing situations:
– For pedestrians, cyclists or similarly
The conditions are not adequate for the sys-
slow-moving road users.
tem to work.
– For red traffic lights.
The system was deactivated but applies the
brakes until you actively resume control by – For cross traffic.
pressing on the brake pedal or accelerator – For oncoming traffic.
pedal. – Unlit vehicles or vehicles with nonwork-
Icon flashes red and a signal sounds: ing lighting at night.
Brake and make an evasive maneu-
ver, if necessary.
184
Merging vehicles Cornering
A vehicle driving in front of you is not de- When the desired speed is too high for a
tected until it is completely within the same curve, the speed is reduced slightly. Be-
lane as your vehicle. cause curves may not be anticipated in ad-
If a vehicle driving ahead of you suddenly vance, drive into a curve at an appropriate
merges into your lane, the system may not speed.
be able to automatically restore the selected The system has a limited detection range.
distance. It may not be possible to restore Situations can arise in tight curves where a
the selected distance in certain situations, vehicle driving ahead will not be detected
including if you are driving significantly or will be detected very late.
faster than vehicles driving ahead of you,
for instance when rapidly approaching a
truck. When a vehicle driving ahead of you
is reliably detected, the system requests
that the driver intervene by braking and
carrying out evasive maneuvers, if needed.
With Stop&Go function for Steptronic

transmission: driving off
In some situations, the vehicle cannot drive
When you approach a curve the system may
off automatically; for example:
briefly report vehicles in the next lane due
– On steep uphill grades. to the bend of the curve. If the system de-
– In front of bumps in the road. celerates you may compensate it by briefly
In these cases, press on the accelerator accelerating. After releasing the accelerator
pedal. pedal the system is reactivated and controls
speed independently.
Weather
The following restrictions can occur under
unfavorable weather or light conditions:
– Poorer vehicle recognition.
– Short-term interruptions for vehicles
that are already recognized.
185
Examples of unfavorable weather or light Cruise control

conditions:
– Wet conditions.
Concept
– Snowfall.
Using this system, a desired speed can be
– Slush. adjusted using the buttons on the steering
– Fog. wheel. The system maintains the desired
– Glare. speed. The system accelerates and brakes
automatically as needed.
Drive attentively, and react to the current
traffic situation. If necessary, intervene ac-
tively, for instance by braking, steering or General information
evading. The system is functional at speeds begin-
ning at approx. 20 mph/30 km/h.
Engine power Depending on the settings, the cruise con-
The desired speed may not be maintained trol settings may change under certain con-
on uphill grades if engine power is insuffi- ditions.
cient.
Safety information
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed if the Warning
system fails or was automatically deacti- The system cannot serve as a substitute
vated. for the driver’s personal judgment in as-
The system may be limited in the following sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
situations: limits of the system, it cannot independ-
– When an object was not correctly de- ently react to all traffic situations. There is
tected. a risk of accident. Adjust driving style to
– In heavy fog, wet conditions, or snow-
fall.
– In tight curves.
– If the field of view of the camera or the Warning
windshield is dirty or covered.
The use of the system can lead to an in-
– When driving toward bright lights. creased risk of accidents in the following
– Up to 20 seconds after the start of the situations, for instance:
engine, via the Start/Stop button. – On winding roads.
– During calibration of the camera imme- – In heavy traffic.
– On slippery roads, in fog, snow, or
wet conditions, or on a loose road
surface.
There may be a risk of accident or risk of
damage to property. Only use the system if
driving at constant speed is possible.
186
Overview Cruise control is active and maintains the

set speed.
Buttons on the steering wheel DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched
on, if necessary.
Button Function
Cruise control on/off, refer to
Switching off
page 187. Press the button on the steering
wheel.
Pause cruise control, refer to
page 187. The displays go out. The stored desired
Continue cruise control with the speed is deleted.
last setting, refer to page 188.
Interrupting manually
Increase speed, refer to
page 187. When active, press the button on
the steering wheel.
Reduce speed, refer to page 187.
Interrupting automatically
Switching on/off and interrupting The system is automatically interrupted in
cruise control the following situations:
– When the driver applies the brakes.
Switching on – If the clutch pedal is depressed for a few
Press the button on the steering seconds or released while a gear is not
wheel. engaged.
– If the gear engaged is too high for the
Instrument cluster without enhanced current speed.
features: – If selector lever position N is set.
The indicator light in the instrument – Dynamic Traction Control DTC is acti-
cluster lights up. vated or DSC Dynamic Stability Control
is deactivated.
features: – If DSC Dynamic Stability Control inter-
venes.
The current speed is adopted as the
desired speed and is displayed with the
symbol in the instrument cluster. Setting the speed
Instrument cluster with en- Maintaining/storing the speed

hanced features: Press or button in the interrupted
Display in the instrument state.
cluster lights up. The current When the system is switched on, the cur-
speed is adopted as the speed rent speed is maintained and stored as the
limit. desired speed.
The stored speed is displayed in the instru-
ment cluster.
187
DSC Dynamic Stability Control is switched Displays in the instrument cluster

on, if necessary.
Indicator light
Changing the speed
or button: press until the desired features:
speed is set.
Depending on how the vehicle is
If active, the displayed speed is stored and equipped, the indicator light in the instru-
the vehicle reaches the stored speed when ment cluster indicates whether the system
the road is clear. is switched on.
to the point of resistance, the desired Instrument cluster with en-
speed increases or decreases by approx. hanced features:
1 mph/1 km/h. The indicator in the instru-
– or button: each time it is pressed ment cluster lights up: the sys-
past the resistance point, the desired tem is switched on.
speed changes by a maximum of 5 mph/
10 km/h.
Desired speed and stored speed
– or button: press button to resist-
ance point and hold. The vehicle acceler- Instrument cluster without enhanced
ates or decelerates without pressure on features:
the accelerator pedal. After the button is The desired speed is displayed to-
released, the vehicle maintains its final gether with the symbol.
speed. Pressing the switch beyond the – Display lights up green: system is active,
resistance point causes the vehicle to the display indicates the desired speed.
accelerate more rapidly.
– Display lights up orange: system is in-
terrupted, the display indicates the
Continuing cruise control stored speed.
General information – No display: system is switched off.
An interrupted cruise control can be contin- Instrument cluster with en-
ued by calling up the stored speed. hanced features:
Make sure that the difference between cur- The desired speed is displayed
rent speed and stored speed is not too large together with the symbol.
before calling up the stored speed. Other- – Display lights up green:
wise, unintentional braking or accelerating system is active, the dis-
may occur. play indicates the desired
speed.
Calling up the stored speed
– Display lights up gray: system is inter-
Press the button on the steering rupted, the display indicates the stored
wheel. speed.
The stored speed is reached again and main- – No display: system is switched off.
tained.
188
Instrument cluster without enhanced fea- Safety information

tures:
If no speed is indicated, it is possible that Warning
the conditions necessary for operation are
not currently fulfilled. The system cannot serve as a substitute
System limits sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-
Engine power roundings closely and actively intervene
The desired speed is also maintained down- where appropriate.
hill, but may not be maintained on uphill
grades if engine power is insufficient.
Warning
PDC Park Distance Control Due to high speeds when PDC Park Dis-
tance Control is activated, the warning can
be delayed due to physical circumstances.
Concept There is a risk of injury or risk of damage
PDC is a support when parking. The system to property. Avoid approaching an object
detects objects behind the vehicle. If the ve- too fast. Avoid driving off fast while PDC
hicle is equipped with front PDC, objects in Park Distance Control is not yet active.
front of the vehicle are detected too. Ob-
jects that you are approaching slowly are in-
dicated by signal tones and a visual display. Overview
General information With front PDC: button in vehicle

The ultrasound sensors for measuring the
distances are located in the bumpers.
The range, depending on obstacles and en-
vironmental conditions, is approx. 6 ft/2 m.
An acoustic warning is first given in the fol-
lowing situations:
– By the front middle sensors and the two
corner sensors at approx. 24 in/60 cm
from the object.
Park assistance button
– By the rear middle sensors at ap-
prox. 5 ft/1.50 m from the object.
– When a collision is imminent. Ultrasound sensors
Ultrasound sensors of the
PDC, for instance in the bump-
ers.
189
Functional requirements – On: the LED lights up.

Ensure full functionality: – Off: the LED goes out.
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with The rearview camera image is displayed if
stickers, bicycle racks or similar. the reverse gear is engaged when pressing
– Keep the sensors clean and free of ice. the park assistance button.
Depending on the equipment version, the
Switching on/off system cannot be switched off manually if
the reverse gear is engaged.
Warning
The system switches on automatically in the
Signal tones
– If selector lever position R is engaged
An intermittent tone indicates when the ve-
when the engine is running.
hicle is approaching an object. E.g., when an
The rearview camera also switches on. object is detected to the left rear of the ve-
– With front PDC: when obstacles are de- hicle, a signal tone sounds from the left rear
tected behind or in front of the vehicle speaker.
by PDC and the speed is slower than ap- The shorter the distance to the object, the
prox. 2.5 mph/4 km/h. shorter the intervals.
With front PDC: automatic activation on ob- When the distance to a detected object is
stacle detection can be switched off. Via the less than approx. 10 inches/25 cm, a contin-
Central Information Display (CID): uous tone is sounded.
1. "My MINI" With front PDC: when objects are simulta-
2. "Vehicle settings" neously located both in front of and behind
the vehicle, an alternating continuous sig-
3. "Parking" nal is sounded.
4. "Automatic PDC Activation": depending The signal tone is switched off, when selec-
on the vehicle equipment. tor lever position P is engaged on vehicles
5. "Automatic PDC Activation" with Steptronic transmission.
The setting is stored for the driver pro-
file currently used. Volume
The ratio of the PDC signal tone volume to
Automatic deactivation during the entertainment volume can be adjusted.
forward travel 1. "My MINI"
The system switches off when a certain 2. "System settings"
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
3. "Tone"
Switch the system back on, if needed.
4. "Volume settings"
With front PDC: switching on/off 5. "PDC"
manually 6. Set the desired value.
Press the park assistance button. The setting is stored for the driver profile
currently used.
190
Visual warning – If cargo protrudes.

The approach of the vehicle to an object can – Under certain weather conditions such
be shown on the Control Display. Objects as high relative humidity, wet condi-
that are farther away are already displayed tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
on the Control Display before a signal wind.
sounds. – With tow bars and trailer couplings of
A display appears as soon as Park Distance other vehicles.
Control (PDC) is activated. – With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
The range of the sensors is represented in – With moving objects.
colors: red, green and yellow. – With elevated, protruding objects such
When the image of the rearview camera is as ledges or cargo.
displayed, the switch can be made to PDC: – With objects with corners and sharp
"Rear view camera" edges.
– With objects with a fine surface struc-
System limits ture such as fences.
– For objects with porous surfaces.
Safety information
– Low objects already displayed, for in-
stance curbs, can move into the blind
Warning area of the sensors before or after a con-
The system is designed to operate in cer- tinuous tone sounds.
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to
conditions or other factors, the system False warnings
may not respond. There may be a risk of The system may issue a warning under the
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac- following conditions even though there is
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the no obstacle within the detection range:
information in this Owner’s Manual re-
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – In heavy rain.
tion and limitations. – When sensors are very dirty or covered
with ice.
– When sensors are covered in snow.
Limits of ultrasonic measurement
– On rough road surfaces.
The detection of objects with ultrasonic
– On uneven surfaces, such as speed
measurements can run into physical limits,
bumps.
for instance under the following conditions:
– In large buildings with right angles and
– For small children and animals.
smooth walls, for instance in under-
– For persons with certain clothing, for in- ground garages.
stance coats.
– In automatic car washes.
– With external interference of the ultra-
– Due to heavy exhaust.
sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines. – Due to other ultrasound sources, for in-
stance sweeping machines, high pres-
– When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
sure steam cleaners or neon lights.
aged or out of position.
191
The malfunction is signaled by a contin- Overview

uous tone alternating between the front
and rear speakers. As soon as the mal- Depending on the vehicle equipment:
function due to other ultrasound sources button in the vehicle
is no longer present, the system is again
fully functional.
With front PDC: to reduce false alarms,
switch off automatic PDC activation on ob-
stacle detection, for instance in car washes;
see Switching on/off.
Malfunction
A Check Control message is displayed in the
instrument cluster.
Park assistance button
Red icon is displayed, and the range
of the sensors is dimmed on the Con-
trol Display.
Camera
PDC has failed. Have the system checked by
a dealer's service center or another qualified
service center or repair shop.
Rearview camera
Concept
The rearview camera provides assistance in
parking and maneuvering backwards. The The camera lens is located in the handle of
area behind the vehicle is shown on the the tailgate.
Control Display.
The image quality may be impaired by dirt.
If necessary, clean the camera lens.
Safety information
Switching on/off
Warning
The system cannot serve as a substitute Switching on automatically
for the driver’s personal judgment in as- The system is switched on automatically if
sessing the traffic situation. There is a risk selector lever position R is engaged when
of accident. Adjust driving style to traffic the engine is running.
conditions. Watch traffic and vehicle sur-
roundings closely and actively intervene Automatic deactivation during
where appropriate. forward travel
The system switches off when a certain
driving distance or speed is exceeded.
192
Switch the system back on, if needed. Obstacles are marked, depending on the
vehicle equipment.
Depending on the vehicle equipment:
switching on/off manually Lanes
Press the park assistance button.
– On: the LED lights up.

– Off: the LED goes out.
The parking assistance functions are shown
on the Control Display.
Switching the view via the Central

Information Display (CID) Lanes can be superimposed on the image of
If the rearview camera view is not dis- the rearview camera.
played, change the view via the Central In- Lanes help you to estimate the space re-
formation Display (CID): quired when parking and maneuvering on
"Rear view camera" level roads.
The rearview camera image is displayed. Lanes depend on the current steering angle
and are continuously adjusted to the steer-
Display on the Control Display ing wheel movements.
Functional requirements Turning radius lines

– The rearview camera is switched on.
– The tailgate is fully closed.
– Keep the recording range of the camera
open.
Protruding cargo or carrier systems that
are not connected to a trailer power
socket can lead to malfunctions.
Activating assistance functions

More than one assistance function can be Turning radius lines can be superimposed
active at the same time. on the image of the rearview camera.
– Parking aid lines Turning radius lines show the course of the
"Parking aid lines" smallest possible turning radius on a level
road.
Lanes and turning radius lines are indi-
cated. Only one turning radius line is displayed af-
ter the steering wheel is turned past a cer-
– Obstacle marking tain angle.
"Obstacle marking"
193
Obstacle marking 2. Turn the steering wheel to the point

where the lane covers the corresponding
turning radius line.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, obsta-

cle markings can be faded into the image of
the rearview camera.
The colored thresholds of the obstacle mark- Display settings
ings match the markings of the PDC Park
Distance Control. Brightness
With the rearview camera switched on:
Parking using lanes and turning 1. Select the icon.
radius lines 2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
1. Position the vehicle so that the turning ting is reached and press the Controller.
radius lines lead to within the limits of
the parking space. Contrast
With the rearview camera switched on:
1. Select the icon.
2. Turn the Controller until the desired set-
ting is reached and press the Controller.
System limits
Detection of objects
Very low obstacles or high, protruding ob-
jects such as ledges may not be recognized
by the system.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, some
assistance functions also consider data from
the PDC Park Distance Control.
Follow the notes in the PDC Park Distance
Control chapter.
The objects displayed on the Control Dis-
play may be closer than they appear. There-
194
fore, do not estimate the distance from the Safety information

objects on the display.
Warning
Parking assistant The system cannot serve as a substitute
sessing the traffic situation. Based on the
Concept limits of the system, it cannot independ-
ently react to all traffic situations. There is
NOTICE
The parking assistant can steer the vehicle
over or onto curbs. There is a risk of dam-
This system assists the driver in parking age to property, among other potential
parallel to the road. damage. Watch traffic closely and actively
intervene where appropriate.
General information
The safety information of the PDC Park Dis-
Parking assistant handling is divided into
tance Control applies in addition.
three steps:
– Switching on and activating. Overview
– Parking space search.
– Parking. Button in the vehicle
Ultrasound sensors measure parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
The parking assistant calculates the best
possible parking line and takes control of
steering during the parking operation.
System status and instructions on required
actions are displayed on the Control Dis-
play.
A component of the parking assistant is the
PDC Park Distance Control. Park assistance button
195
Ultrasound sensors – The parking brake is released.

– When parking in parking spaces on the
driver's side, the corresponding turn sig-
nal must be switched on.
Switching on and activating

Switching on with the button
Press the park assistance button.
The LED lights up.
The ultrasound sensors for measuring park-
ing spaces are located on the wheel hous- The current status of the parking space
ing. search is indicated on the Control Display.
Parking assistant is activated automati-
Functional requirements cally.
Ultrasound sensors Switching on with reverse gear

Ensure full functionality: Shift into reverse.
– Do not cover sensors, for instance with The current status of the parking space
stickers. search is indicated on the Control Display.
– Keep the sensors clean and unob- To activate: "Parking Assistant"
structed.
Display on the Control Display
For measuring parking spaces
System activated/deactivated
– Maximum speed while driving forward
approx. 22 mph/35 km/h. Icon Meaning
– Maximum distance to row of parked ve-
hicles: 5 ft/1.5 m. Gray: the system is not available.
White: the system is available but
Suitable parking space not activated.
– Gaps behind an object that has a min. The system is activated.
length of 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Gap between two objects with a mini-
mum length of approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
– Min. length of gap between two objects:
your vehicle's length plus approx.
3.3 ft/1.0 m.
– Minimum depth: approx. 5 ft/1.5 m.
For the parking operation

– Doors and tailgate are closed.
196
Parking space search and system and at a distance of maximum

status 5 ft/1.5 m.
The status of the parking space search
and possible parking spaces are dis-
played on the Control Display, refer to
page 196.
3. Follow the instructions on the Control
Display.
The parking assistant takes control of
steering during the parking operation.
The driver takes over braking and accel-
– Symbol P on the vehicle image: the park- erating.
ing assistant is activated and the park- The best possible parking position will
ing space search is active. come after gear change on the station-
– Control Display shows suitable parking ary vehicle - wait for the automatic
spaces at the edge of the road next to steering wheel move.
the vehicle symbol. When the parking The end of the parking operation is indi-
assistant is active, suitable parking cated on the Control Display.
spaces are highlighted. 4. Adjust the parking position yourself, if
– The parking operation is needed.
active. The system takes
over the steering. Interrupting manually
The parking assistant can be interrupted at
any time:
– Parking space search is always active – Press the park assistance button.
whenever the vehicle is moving forward
slow and straight, even if the system is
deactivated. When the system is deacti- – "Parking Assistant"
vated, the displays on the Control Dis-
play are shown in gray. Interrupting automatically
The system is interrupted automatically in
Parking using the parking assistant the following situations:
– If the driver grasps the steering wheel
Parking or takes over steering.
– If a gear is selected that does not match
1. Press the park assistance button or the instruction on the Control Display.
shift into reverse gear to switch on the
parking assistant, refer to page 196. Ac- – If the vehicle speed exceeds approx.
tivate the parking assistant, if needed. 6 mph/10 km/h.
Parking assistant is activated. – Possibly on snow-covered or slippery
road surfaces.
2. Pass the row of parked vehicles at a
speed of up to approx. 22 mph/35 km/h
197
– If a maximum number of parking at- Functional limitations

tempts or the time taken for parking is The system may be limited in the following
exceeded. situations:
– If the PDC Park Distance Control dis- – On bumpy road surfaces such as gravel
plays clearances that are too small. roads.
– When switching into other functions of – On slippery ground.
the radio.
– With accumulations of leaves/snow in
A Check Control message is displayed. the parking space.
Resuming – With a mounted emergency wheel.
An interrupted parking operation can be – With ditches or edges, for instance an
continued, if needed. edge of a port.
Reactivate the parking assistant, refer to Limits of ultrasonic measurement
page 196, and follow the instructions on the
Control Display. The detection of objects with ultrasonic
measurements can run into physical limits,
for instance under the following conditions:
Switching off
– For small children and animals.
The system can be switched off as follows:
– For persons with certain clothing, for in-
– Press the park assistance button.
stance coats.
– With external interference of the ultra-
– Switching off the ignition. sound, for instance from passing vehi-
cles or loud machines.
System limits – When sensors are dirty, iced over, dam-
aged or out of position.
Safety information
– If cargo protrudes.
– Under certain weather conditions such
Warning as high relative humidity, wet condi-
The system is designed to operate in cer- tions, snowfall, extreme heat, or strong
tain conditions and circumstances. Due to wind.
conditions or other factors, the system – With tow bars and trailer couplings of
may not respond. There may be a risk of other vehicles.
accident or risk of damage to property. Ac-
tively intervene as warranted. Refer to the – With thin or wedge-shaped objects.
information in this Owner’s Manual re- – With moving objects.
garding the scope of the system’s opera- – With elevated, protruding objects such
tion and limitations. as ledges or cargo.
– With objects with corners and sharp
No parking assistance edges.
The parking assistant does not offer assis- – With objects with a fine surface struc-
tance in the following situations: ture such as fences.
– In tight curves. – For objects with porous surfaces.
198
– Low objects already displayed, for in-

stance curbs, can move into the blind
area of the sensors before or after a con-
tinuous tone sounds.
– The parking assistant may identify park-
ing spaces that are not suitable for park-
ing.
Tire size
The parking position may vary depending
on the tire size.
Malfunction
The parking assistant failed. Have the sys-
tem checked by a dealer's service center or
shop.
199
CONTROLS Climate control
Climate control
Vehicle features and options – Emission tested passenger compart-
ment.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Microfilter.
specific and optional features offered with – Air conditioning system to control the
the series. It also describes features and temperature, air flow and recirculated-
functions that are not necessarily available air mode.
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Depending on the equipment specification:
– Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter.
When using these functions and systems, – Automatic climate control.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Parked-car ventilation.
observed.
Interior air quality

The air quality in the vehicle is improved by
the following components:
200
Climate control CONTROLS
Air conditioner
1 Air distribution settings 6 Air recirculation mode

2 Air flow 7 Rear window defroster
3 Temperature 8 Windshield defroster
4 Seat heating, right 85 9 Seat heating, left 85
5 Air conditioning
Climate control functions in detail Temperature
Switching the system on/off Concept

The system heats or cools, depending on the
Switching on set temperature.
Set any air flow.
Adjusting
Switching off Turn the wheel to set the de-
Turn the wheel for air flow all sired temperature.
the way to the left.
201
Air conditioning ter a certain amount of time, depending on

the outside temperature.
Concept With extended air recirculation mode, the
The air in the car's interior will be cooled air quality in the interior deteriorates and
and dehumidified and, depending on the window fogging increases.
temperature setting, warmed again. If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-
culation mode and increase the air flow, if
Functional requirement needed.
The car's interior can only be cooled with
the engine running. Air flow, manual
Switching on/off Concept

Press the button. The air flow for climate control can be ad-
justed manually.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
ditioning switched on.
Adjusting
Depending on the weather, the windshield Turn the ring to set the de-
may fog up briefly when the engine is sired air flow.
started.
The higher the air flow, the
The cooling mode produces condensation, more effective the heating or
refer to page 233, that will exit from below cooling will be.
the vehicle.
The air flow from the air conditioner may be
Air recirculation mode reduced automatically to save battery
power.
Concept
You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu- Manual air distribution
tants in the immediate environment by tem-
porarily suspending the supply of outside Concept
air. The system then recirculates the air The air distribution for climate control can
flow within the vehicle. be adjusted manually.
Operation Adjusting
Press the button: Turn the wheel to select the
The LED is illuminated when recir- desired program or the desired
culated-air mode is switched on. The supply intermediate setting.
of outside air is shut off.
When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte- – Windows.
rior. – Upper body region.
To prevent window condensation, recircu- – Floor area.
lated-air mode switches off automatically af- – Windows, upper body region, and
floor area.
202
To defrost windows and remove Rear window defroster

condensation Press the button. The LED lights up.
Make the following settings to defrost the The rear window defroster switches
windows and remove condensation: off automatically after a certain period of
– Direct the air distribution onto the win- time.
dows.
When GREEN drive mode is activated, the
– Increasing the air flow.
heating output is reduced.
– Increase the temperature.
– Switch on air conditioning if needed. Microfilter
In external and recirculated-air mode, the
Windshield defroster microfilter filters dust and pollen from the
Press the button. The LED lights up. air.
The front window defroster Have this filter changed during vehicle
switches off automatically after a certain maintenance, refer to page 277.
period of time.
Automatic climate control
1 Temperature, left 5 Air distribution, manual

2 Display 6 Display
3 Air flow, AUTO intensity 7 Temperature, right
4 AUTO program 8 Seat heating, right 85
203
9 Maximum cooling 13 Windshield defroster

10 Air conditioning 14 To defrost windows and remove conden-
11 Air recirculation mode sation
12 Rear window defroster 15 Seat heating, left 85
Climate control functions in detail Air conditioning
Switching the system on/off Concept

The air in the car's interior will be cooled
Switching on and dehumidified and, depending on the
Set any air flow. temperature setting, warmed again.
Switching off Functional requirement

Turn wheel for air flow to the The car's interior can only be cooled with
left until the control switches the engine running.
off.
Switching on/off
Press the button.
The LED is illuminated with air con-
Temperature ditioning switched on.
Concept Depending on the weather, the windshield

The automatic climate control achieves the may fog up briefly when the engine is
set temperature as quickly as possible, if started.
necessary by using the maximum cooling or Air conditioning is switched on automati-
heating power, and then keeps it constant. cally with the AUTO program.
The cooling mode produces condensation,
Adjusting refer to page 233, that will exit from below
Turn the wheel to set the de- the vehicle.
sired temperature.
Maximum cooling
Concept
Do not rapidly switch between different The system is set to the lowest temperature,
temperature settings. The automatic climate maximum air flow and recirculated-air
control will not have sufficient time to ad- mode.
just the set temperature.
The function is available at outside temper-
atures above approx. 32 ℉/0 ℃ and with
the engine running.
204
Switching on/off Turn the wheel to set the de-

Press the button. sired intensity from soft to in-
tensive.
The LED is illuminated with the
system switched on.
Air flows out of the vents to the upper body The set intensity is displayed via the posi-
region. The vents need to be open for this. tion of the illuminated LED segment.
The air flow can be adjusted when maxi-
mum cooling is switched on. Air recirculation mode
AUTO program Concept

You may react to unpleasant odors or pollu-
Concept tants in the immediate environment by tem-
The AUTO program cools, ventilates or porarily suspending the supply of outside
heats the car's interior automatically. air. The system then recirculates the air
flow within the vehicle.
For this, the air flow, air distribution and
temperature are regulated depending on the Operation
settings and the interior temperature.
Press the button:
Switching on/off The LED is illuminated when recir-
Press the button. culated-air mode is switched on. The supply
of outside air is shut off.
AUTO program switched on. When recirculated-air mode is switched off,
fresh air is directed into the vehicle's inte-
Depending on the selected temperature, rior.
AUTO intensity and outside influences, the
air is directed to the windshield, side win- To prevent window condensation, recircu-
dows, upper body, and into the floor area. lated-air mode switches off automatically af-
ter a certain amount of time, depending on
Point the side vents toward the side win- the outside temperature.
dows.
With extended air recirculation mode, the
The following features are switched on au- air quality in the interior deteriorates and
tomatically with the AUTO program: window fogging increases.
– Air conditioning, refer to page 204. If the windows fog over, switch off air recir-
To switch off the program: press the button culation mode and increase the air flow, if
again or manually adjust the air distribu- needed.
tion.
Air flow, manual
Controlling the intensity of the air flow
With the AUTO program switched on, the Concept
intensity can be adjusted. This changes the The air flow for climate control can be ad-
automatic control for the air mass. justed manually.
205
General information Switching on/off

To adjust the air flow manually switch off Press the button.
AUTO program first.
system switched on.
Adjusting
Turn the ring to set the de- The air flow can be adjusted with the pro-
sired air flow. gram active.
If there is window condensation, switch on
the climate control function as well.
The manually adjusted air flow is displayed Windshield defroster

via illuminated LED segments. Press the button. The LED lights up.
The air flow of the automatic climate con- The front window defroster
trol may be reduced automatically to save switches off automatically after a certain
battery power. period of time.
Manual air distribution

Rear window defroster
Concept Press the button. The LED lights up.
The air distribution for climate control can The rear window defroster switches
be adjusted manually. off automatically after a certain period of
time.
Adjusting
When GREEN drive mode is activated, the
Press the button repeatedly to se- heating output is reduced.
lect a program:
– Windows, upper body region, and floor Microfilter/activated-charcoal filter
area. In external and recirculated-air mode, the
– Upper body region and floor area. microfilter/activated charcoal filter filters
dust, pollen, and gaseous pollutants out of
– Floor area. the air.
– Windows and floor area. Have this filter changed during vehicle
– Windows. maintenance, refer to page 277.
– Windows and upper body region.
– Upper body region.
Ventilation
To defrost windows and remove
condensation Setting
The air flow directions can be individually
Concept adjusted:
Ice and condensation are quickly removed – Direct ventilation:
from the windshield and the front side win-
dows.
206
The air flow is directly pointed onto the Functional requirements

person. The air flow heats or cools no- – Direct operation: vehicle is in radio-
ticeably, depending on the adjusted tem- ready state.
perature.
– Direct operation or preset activation
– Indirect ventilation: time: does not depend on outside tem-
If the vents are fully or partly closed, the perature.
air is directly routed into the car's inte- – Battery is sufficiently charged.
rior.
If parked-car ventilation is switched on,
Front ventilation the vehicle battery will be discharged.
Thus, limit the maximum activation time
to save the vehicle battery. The system
will be available again after the engine
is started or after a short trip.
– Make sure that the vehicle's date and
time are set correctly.
– Open the vents to allow air to flow out.
Switching on/off directly

– Turn knob for continuous opening and Via the Central Information Display (CID):
closing of the vents. 1. "My MINI"
– Swivel the vents to alter the direction of 2. "Vehicle settings"
the vent flow, arrows.
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "Activate comfort ventilation now"
Parked-car ventilation The icon on the automatic climate con-
trol flashes if the system is switched on.
Concept Preselecting the activation time

The parked-car ventilation ventilates the Via the Central Information Display (CID):
car's interior and lowers its temperature, if
needed. 1. "My MINI"
General information 3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
The parked-car ventilation can be switched
4. "Comfort ventilation"
on and off directly or by using two preset
activation times. The system remains 5. Select the desired activation time.
switched on for 30 minutes. 6. Set the desired time.
The parked-car ventilation system is oper-
ated via the Central Information Display Activating the activation time
(CID).
207
1. "My MINI"
3. If necessary, "Climate functions"
4. "For start time at:"
Activate the desired activation time.
The icon on the automatic climate con-
trol lights up when the activation time is ac-
tivated.
The icon on the automatic climate con-
trol flashes when the system has been
switched on.
The system will only be switched on within
the next 24 hours. After that, it needs to be
reactivated.
208
Interior equipment CONTROLS
Interior equipment
Vehicle features and options Safety information
This chapter describes all standard, country- Warning

specific and optional features offered with The operation of remote-controlled sys-
the series. It also describes features and tems with the integrated universal remote
functions that are not necessarily available control, such as the garage door, may re-
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
tions or country versions. This also applies coming jammed in a garage door. There is
to safety-related functions and systems. a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
When using these functions and systems, erty. Make sure that the area of movement
the applicable laws and regulations must be of the respective system is clear during
observed. programming and operation. Also follow
the safety information of the hand-held
transmitter.
Integrated Universal Remote
Control
Compatibility
Concept If this symbol is printed on the pack-
aging or in the owner's manual of the
The integrated Universal Remote Control in system to be controlled, the system
the interior mirror can operate up to 3 func- is generally compatible with the integrated
tions of remote-controlled systems such as Universal Remote Control.
garage door drives, barriers, or lighting sys-
tems. Additional questions are answered by:
– A dealer's service center or another
General information qualified service center or repair shop.
The Integrated Universal Remote Control – www.homelink.com on the Internet.
replaces up to 3 different hand-held trans-
HomeLink is a registered trademark of Gen-
mitters. To operate the remote control, the
tex Corporation.
buttons on the interior mirror must be pro-
grammed with the desired functions. The
hand-held transmitter for the particular sys-
tem is required in order to program the re-
mote control.
Before selling the vehicle, delete the stored
functions for the sake of security.
If possible, do not install the antenna of the
remote-controlled system, e.g. the garage
door drive, near metal objects to ensure the
best possible operation.
209
CONTROLS Interior equipment
Overview down the interior mirror button and re-

peatedly press and release the hand-held
transmitter button for 2 seconds.
6. – The LED lights up green: program-
ming completed.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: programming
is not complete.
Press the button on the interior mir-
ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
1 LED form this procedure three times to
2 Programmable keys complete the programming proce-
dure.
3 Hand-held transmitters of the system
If the integrated universal remote
control remains nonoperational, con-
Programming tinue with the special features for
change code wireless systems.
General information – LED does not flash green after
The battery of the hand-held transmitter 60 seconds: programming not com-
must be fully charged at the time of pro- pleted.
gramming to ensure an optimal range of the Repeat steps 3 to 6.
integrated universal remote control.
To program other functions on other but-
1. Switch on the ignition. tons, repeat steps 3 to 5.
2. Initial setup:
Special feature of the rolling code
Press and hold the two outer buttons on wireless system
the interior mirror simultaneously for
approximately 10 seconds until the LED If you are unable to operate the system af-
flashes green rapidly. This erases all pro- ter repeated programming, please check if
gramming of the buttons on the interior the system to be controlled features a roll-
mirror. ing code radio system.
3. Press the interior mirror button to be Refer to the owner's manual for the system.
programmed. The LED on the interior For systems with a rolling code radio sys-
mirror will slowly begin flashing orange. tem, the integrated Universal Remote Con-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the trol and the system also have to be
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 synchronized.
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the Please read the owner's manual to find out
interior mirror. The required distance how to synchronize the system.
depends on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing is easier with the aid of a
5. Press and hold the button of the desired second person.
function on the hand-held transmitter. Synchronizing the universal remote control
Canada: if programming with the hand- with the system:
held transmitter was interrupted, hold
210
1. Park the vehicle within range of the re- Press the button on the interior mir-
mote-controlled system. ror for 2 seconds and release. Per-
form this procedure three times to
2. Program the relevant button on the inte- complete the programming proce-
rior mirror as described. dure.
3. Locate and press the synchronizing but- If the integrated universal remote
ton on the system being programmed, control remains nonoperational, con-
e.g. at the garage gate. You have approx. tinue with the special features for
30 seconds for the next step. change code wireless systems.
4. Hold down the programmed button on – LED does not flash green after
the interior mirror for approximately 60 seconds: programming not com-
3 seconds and then release it. If neces- pleted.
sary, repeat this step up to three times
Repeat steps 3 to 6.
in order to finish synchronization. Once
synchronization is complete, the pro- If the programming procedure is not com-
grammed function will be carried out. pleted, the previous programming will re-
main unchanged.
Reprogramming individual buttons
Operation
2. Press and hold the interior mirror but-
ton to be programmed. Warning
3. As soon as the LED on the interior mir- The operation of remote-controlled sys-
ror flashes orange after approx. 20 sec- tems with the integrated universal remote
onds, release the button. control, such as the garage door, may re-
sult in injury, for example, body parts be-
4. Hold the hand-held transmitter for the coming jammed in a garage door. There is
system to be used approx. 1 to 12 in/2.5 a risk of injury or risk of damage to prop-
to 30 cm away from the buttons on the erty. Make sure that the area of movement
interior mirror. The required distance of the respective system is clear during
depends on the hand-held transmitter. programming and operation. Also follow
5. Press and hold the button of the desired the safety information of the hand-held
function on the hand-held transmitter. transmitter.
Canada: if programming with the hand-
held transmitter was interrupted, hold The system, such as the garage door, can be
down the interior mirror button and re- operated using the button on the interior
peatedly press and release the hand-held mirror while the engine is running or when
transmitter button for 2 seconds. the ignition is started. To do this, hold down
the button within receiving range of the
6. The LED can light up in different ways.
system until the function is activated. The
– The LED lights up green: the pro- interior mirror LED stays lit while the wire-
gramming procedure is completed. less signal is being transmitted.
Release the button.
– The LED flashes fast: the hand-held Deleting stored functions
transmitter was detected but pro- All stored functions will be deleted. The
gramming is not complete. functions cannot be deleted individually.
211
Press and hold the two outer buttons on the Operating concept
interior mirror simultaneously for approxi-
Various functions can be called up by press-
mately 10 seconds until the LED on the in-
ing the control button with a pointed object,
terior mirror flashes green rapidly.
such as the tip of a ballpoint pen or similar
object. The following setting options are
displayed in succession, depending on how
Digital compass long the control button is pressed:
– Pressed briefly: turns display on/off.
Overview – 3 to 6 seconds: compass zone setting.
– 6 to 9 seconds: compass calibration.
– 9 to 12 seconds: left/right-hand steering
setting.
– 12 to 15 seconds: language setting.
Setting the compass zones

Sets the particular compass zones on the ve-
hicle so that the compass operates correctly;
1 Control button refer to World map with compass zones.
2 Mirror display
Mirror display
The compass shows the current driving di-
rection.
212
World map with magnetic zones
Procedure Procedure
1. Press and hold the control button for ap- 1. Make sure that there are no large metal-
prox. 3 to 4 seconds. The number of the lic objects or overhead power lines near
set compass zone appears in the mirror. the vehicle and that there is sufficient
2. To change the zone setting, press the room to drive around in a circle.
control button quickly and repeatedly 2. Set the currently applicable compass
until the number of the compass zone zone.
that corresponds with your location ap- 3. Press and hold the control button for ap-
pears in the mirror. prox. 6 to 7 seconds so that "C" appears
The set zone is stored automatically. The on the display. Next, drive in a complete
compass is ready for use again after approx- circle at least once at a speed of no more
imately 10 seconds. than 4 mph/7 km/h. If calibration is suc-
cessful, the "C" is replaced by the points
Calibrating the digital compass of the compass.
The digital compass must be calibrated in
the event of the following: Left/right-hand steering
– The wrong compass point is displayed. The digital compass is already set for right
or left-hand steering at the factory.
– The point of the compass displayed does
not change despite changing the direc-
tion of travel. Setting the language
– Not all points of the compass are dis- Press and hold the control button for ap-
played. prox. 12 to 13 seconds. Briefly press the
213
control button again to switch between Ashtray/cigarette lighter

English "E" and German "O".
Settings are stored automatically after ap-
proximately 10 seconds.
Overview
Sun visor
Glare shield
To provide protection against glare, fold the
sun visor down or pivot it to the side.
Vanity mirror The ashtray is located in one of the frontal

A vanity mirror is located in the sun visor cup holders, the cigarette lighter above it in
behind a cover. the center console.
When the cover is opened, the mirror light-
ing switches on. Ashtray
In order to empty the ashtray, remove the
ashtray from the cup holder.
Dashboard
Cigarette lighter
Decorative trim
Safety information
Warning
Contact with the hot heating element or
the hot socket of the cigarette lighter can
cause burns. Flammable materials can ig-
nite if the cigarette lighter falls down or is
held against the objects. There is a risk of
fire and injuries. There is a risk of damage
Customizable decorative trim is available to property, among other potential dam-
for the dashboard on the driver’s side and age. Take hold of the cigarette lighter by
on the passenger's side. its handle. Make sure that children do not
Follow the assembly instructions. use the cigarette lighter.
214
NOTICE NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they Battery chargers for the vehicle battery
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of can work with high voltages and currents,
damage to property, among other potential which means that the 12 volt electrical
damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or system can be overloaded or damaged.
socket cover again after using the socket. There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Only con-
nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-
Operation tery to the starting aid terminals in the en-
Push in the cigarette lighter. gine compartment.
The cigarette lighter can be
removed as soon as it pops
back out. NOTICE
If metal objects fall into the socket, they
can cause a short circuit. There is a risk of
damage to property, among other potential
Sockets damage. Replace the cigarette lighter or
socket cover again after using the socket.
Concept
The lighter socket can be used as a socket In the center console
for electrical equipment while the ignition
is switched on or the engine is running.
General information
The total load of all sockets must not exceed
140 watts at 12 volts.
Do not damage the socket by using non-
compatible connectors.
Safety information Remove the cover or cigarette lighter.
Warning
Devices and cables in the unfolding area of
the airbags, such as portable navigation
devices, can hinder the unfolding of the
airbag or be thrown around in the car's in-
terior during unfolding. There is a risk of
injury. Make sure that devices and cables
are not in the airbag's area of unfolding.
215
In the cargo area Properties of lower USB port:

– USB port Type C.
– For charging mobile devices and for
data transfer.
– Charge current: max. 3 A.
Wireless charging tray

Concept
The socket is located on the right side in
the cargo area. The wireless charging tray enables the fol-
lowing functions to be performed without
cables:
– Charging the rechargeable battery of a
USB port mobile phone with Qi capability and of
other mobile devices, which support the
General information Qi standard.
Follow the information regarding the con- – Connect the mobile phone to the exter-
nection of mobile devices to the USB port in nal antenna.
the section on USB connections, refer to Depending on the country, this provides
page 55. for better network reception and a con-
sistent reproduction quality.
In the center console
General information
When inserting the mobile phone, make
sure there are no objects between it and the
wireless charging tray.
During charging, the surface of the tray and
the mobile phone may become warm.
Higher temperatures may lead to a reduc-
tion in the charge current through the mo-
bile phone, and in isolated cases the charg-
Depending on the equipment version, a USB ing process is paused temporarily. Follow
port Type A or a USB port Type A and a USB the relevant instructions in the mobile
port Type C are located in the front of the phone owner's manual.
center console.
NOTE
Properties of upper USB port: This device has been tested for human ex-
– USB port Type A. posure limits and found compliant at a mini-
– For charging mobile devices and for mum distance of 4 in/10 cm during opera-
data transfer. tion.
– Charge current: max. 1.5 A.
216
Therefore, a distance of 4 in/10 cm must be Functional requirements

maintained in every direction when operat-
– Ignition or standby state is switched on.
ing the device.
– The mobile phone must compatibly sup-
port the required Qi standard. Compati-
ble mobile phones, refer to page 53.
If the mobile phone does not support the
Qi standard, the mobile phone can be
charged using a special Qi-compatible
charging case.
– Use only protective jackets and covers
up to a maximum thickness of
0.07 in/2 mm. Otherwise, the charging
Mounting position of the product. function may be impaired.
– The mobile phone must not exceed the
Safety information maximum size of approximately 5.9 x
3.07 x 0.62 in/150 x 78 x 16 mm.
Warning
Overview
When charging a device that meets the Qi
standard in the wireless charging tray, any The wireless charging tray is located in the
metal objects located between the device center armrest.
and the tray can become very hot. Placing
storage devices or electronic cards, such
as chip cards, cards with magnetic strips
or cards for signal transmission, between
the device and the tray may impair the
card function. There is a risk of injury and
risk of damage to property. When charg-
ing mobile devices, make sure there are no
objects between the device and the tray.
1 Front holder with LED
2 Storage area
NOTICE
3 Movable clamp
The tray is intended for mobile phones up
to a particular size. Forceful inserting of
the mobile phone into the tray can damage Inserting the mobile phone
the tray or the mobile phone. There is a
1. Open the center armrest.
potential damage. Observe the maximum 2. Push back the clamp.
dimensions for mobile phones. Do not
force the mobile phone into the tray.
217
3. Insert the mobile phone with the display LED displays

facing upward in the direction of the
front holder, arrow 1. Color Meaning
Blue The mobile phone is charging.
Depending on the model, the
blue LED is no longer illuminated
once the inserted mobile phone
with Qi capability is fully
charged.
Or- The mobile phone is not charg-
ange ing.
4. Place the mobile phone in the storage Temperature on the mobile
area, arrow 2. phone possibly too high or for-
eign object in the charging tray.
5. Push the clamp forward and clamp the
mobile phone in the tray. Red The mobile phone is not charg-
6. Close the center armrest. ing.
Contact a dealer’s service center
Removing the mobile phone or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
1. Open the center armrest.
2. Push the clamp back and remove the System limits
mobile phone.
At high temperatures on the mobile phone
or in the vehicle, the charging functions of
the mobile phone may be limited and some
functions may no longer work.
LTE-Compensator - Information
and User Manual
Your car is equipped with a wireless charg-
ing tray (WCA) to charge your mobile phone
and connect it to the mobile network. To en-
sure the best possible connection a signal
booster (LTE-Compensator) is used in con-
junction with the WCA. The following para-
graphs refer to this booster:
This is a CONSUMER device.
BEFORE USE, you MUST REGISTER THIS
DEVICE with your wireless provider and
have your provider's consent. Most wireless
providers consent to the use of Compensa-
tors. Some providers may not consent to the
use of this device on their network. If you
218
are unsure, contact your provider. You tennas or coupling devices will cause the
MUST operate this device with approved an- cease of the booster´s operating license.
tennas and cables as specified by the manu- The booster device fulfills the network pro-
facturer. Antennas MUST be installed at tection standards as required by the FCC,
least 20 cm (8 inches) from any person. You such as intermodulation limits, oscillation
MUST cease operating this device immedi- detection and gain limits.
ately if requested by the FCC or a licensed
Booster Manufacturer: Kathrein Automotive
wireless service provider. Warning E911 lo-
cation information may not be provided or Model Number: LTECOMPB0
may be inaccurate for calls served by using Part Number: 6803145-01
this device. FCC-ID: 2ACC7LTECOMPB0
Please observe additionally the following in-
formation
– Sprint Nextel will allow consumers to
register their signal boosters by calling
their toll-free number.
– T-Mobile online registration link:
(www.T-Mobile.com/BoosterRegistra-
tion); (https://saqat.t-mobile.com/sites/
SignalBooster#).
– Verizon’s online registration link:
(http://www.verizonwireless.com/
wcms/consumer/register-signal-boos-
ter.html).
– AT&T online registration link (https://
securec45.securewebsession.com/
attsignalbooster.com/).
– U.S.Cellular online registration link
(http://www.uscellular.com/uscellular/
support/fcc-booster-registration.jsp).
Before use you must register your booster
device with your wireless provider.
If you should be requested by the FCC to
cease operating your booster, you are not
allowed to insert your mobile phone in the
charging tray anymore unless the booster is
permanently deactivated by your local MINI
dealer.
You must not remove the booster from the
car nor use it with any other than the prein-
stalled coupling device or antenna. Any
modification of the existing antenna or cou-
pling device as well as the use of other an-
219
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Storage compartments
Vehicle features and options – Glove compartment on the front passen-
ger side.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Compartments in the doors.
specific and optional features offered with – Storage compartment in the center arm-
the series. It also describes features and rest.
functions that are not necessarily available – Storage compartment in front of the cup
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- holders.
– Clothes hooks
When using these functions and systems, – Storage tray in the center console.
the applicable laws and regulations must be – Pockets on the backrests of the front
observed. seats.
Safety information Glove compartment

Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- Warning
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- Folded open, the glove compartment pro-
terior while driving, for instance in the trudes in the car's interior. Objects in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive glove compartment can be thrown into the
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure car's interior while driving, for instance in
loose objects or devices with a cable con- the event of an accident, braking or eva-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior. sive maneuvers. There is a risk of injury.
Always close the glove compartment im-
mediately after using it.
NOTICE
Anti-slip pads such as anti-slip mats can
damage the dashboard. There is a risk of
damage. Do not use anti-slip pads.
Overview
The following storage compartments are
available in the car's interior:
220
Storage compartments CONTROLS
Opening Center armrest

General information
The center armrest contains a storage com-
partment.
Opening
Pull the handle.

The light in the glove compartment
switches on.
Closing
Fold up the cover.
Press button, arrow 1, and open center arm-
rest upward, arrow 2.
Compartments in the doors
Adjusting the height
General information
There are storage compartments in the
doors.
Safety information
Warning
Breakable objects, such as glass bottles or
glasses, can break in the event of an acci-
Press button, arrow 1, and swing center
dent or a braking or evasive maneuver.
armrest upward or downward into the de-
Broken glass can be scattered in the car's
sired height, arrow 2.
interior. There is a risk of injury or risk of
damage to property. Do not use any break-
able objects while driving. Only stow
breakable objects in closed storage com-
partments.
221
CONTROLS Storage compartments
Cup holders Rear
Safety information
Warning
Unsuitable containers in the cup holders
may damage the cup holders or be thrown
about the car’s interior in the event of an
accident, an evasive maneuver, or forceful
braking. Spilled liquids can distract from
the traffic conditions and lead to an acci- For 3-door models: in front of the rear seats
dent. Hot drinks can damage the cup and in the side armrests.
holder or lead to scalding. There is a risk
of injury or risk of damage to property. Do
not force objects into the cup holder. Use
lightweight, shatterproof, and sealable
containers. Do not transport hot bever-
ages.
Front
For 5-door models: in front of the rear seats.
Clothes hooks
General information
3-door model: The clothes hooks are located
above the side windows in the rear.
In the center console.
5-door model: The clothes hooks are located
above the rear doors.
Safety information
Warning
Clothing articles on the clothes hooks can
obstruct the view while driving. There is a
risk of accident. When suspending cloth-
ing articles from the clothes hooks, ensure
222
Storage compartments CONTROLS
that they will not obstruct the driver's

view.
Warning
Improper use of the clothes hooks can lead
to a risk of objects flying about during
braking and evasive maneuvers. There is a
risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
erty. Only hang lightweight objects, for in-
stance clothing articles, from the clothes
hooks.
223
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo area
Vehicle features and options loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior.
the series. It also describes features and Warning
functions that are not necessarily available Improperly stowed objects can shift and
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- be thrown into the car's interior, for in-
tions or country versions. This also applies stance in the event of an accident or dur-
to safety-related functions and systems. ing braking and evasive maneuver. Vehi-
When using these functions and systems, cle occupants can be hit and injured. There
the applicable laws and regulations must be is a risk of injury. Stow and secure objects
observed. and cargo properly.
Loading NOTICE
Fluids in the cargo area can cause damage.
Safety information There is a risk of damage to property,
among other potential damage. Make sure
that no fluids leak in the cargo area.
Warning
High gross weight can overheat the tires,
damage them internally and cause a sud- Steps for Determining Correct Load
den drop in tire inflation pressure. Driving Limit
characteristics may be negatively im-
1. Locate the statement “The combined
pacted, reducing lane stability, lengthen-
weight of occupants and cargo should
ing the braking distances and changing
never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on
the steering response. There is a risk of
your vehicle’s placard.
accident. Pay attention to the permitted
load capacity of the tires and never exceed 2. Determine the combined weight of the
the permitted gross weight. driver and passengers that will be riding
in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the
Warning driver and passengers from XXX kg or
Loose objects or devices with a cable con- XXX lbs
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile 4. The resulting figure equals the available
phones, can be thrown about the car's in- amount of cargo and luggage load ca-
terior while driving, for instance in the pacity. For example, if the “XXX”
event of an accident, braking or evasive amount equals 1,400 lbs and there will
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure be five 150 lbs passengers in your vehi-
cle, the amount of available cargo and
224
Cargo area CONTROLS
luggage load capacity is 650 lbs (1,400 - Stowing and securing cargo
750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs)
– Cover sharp edges and corners on the
5. Determine the combined weight of lug- cargo.
gage and cargo being loaded on the ve- – Heavy cargo: stow as far forward as pos-
hicle. That weight may not safely exceed sible, directly behind and at the bottom
the available cargo and luggage load ca- of the rear passenger seat backrests.
pacity calculated in Step 4.
– Very heavy cargo: when the rear seat is
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, not occupied, secure each of the outer
load from your trailer will be transferred safety belts in the opposite buckle.
to your vehicle. Consult this manual to
determine how this reduces the availa- – If necessary, fold down the rear back-
ble cargo and luggage load capacity of rests to stow large cargo.
your vehicle. – Do not stack cargo above the top edge of
the backrests.
Load – Small and light cargo: secure with
ratchet straps or draw straps.
On 3-door models
– Larger and heavy cargo: secure with
cargo straps.
Lashing eyes in the cargo area
On 5-door models
Without storage compartment package: to

secure the cargo there are two lashing eyes,
arrows 1, in the cargo area.
With storage compartment package: to se-
cure the cargo there are six lashing eyes, ar-
rows 1 and 2, in the cargo area.
The maximum load is the sum of the weight Attach load securing aids, such as lashing
of the occupants and the cargo. straps, tensioning straps, draw straps or
The greater the weight of the occupants, cargo nets, to the lashing eyes in the cargo
the less cargo that can be transported. area.
225
CONTROLS Cargo area
Cargo cover 2. Attach the left and right retaining straps

at the tailgate.
General information
When the tailgate is opened, the cargo Storage space under cargo
cover is raised.
floor panel
Safety information
Warning
Loose objects or devices with a cable con-
nection to the vehicle, for instance mobile
phones, can be thrown about the car's in-
terior while driving, for instance in the
event of an accident, braking or evasive
maneuver. There is a risk of injury. Secure
loose objects or devices with a cable con- Located under the cargo floor panel on the
nection to the vehicle in the car's interior. right side is a trough for the onboard vehi-
cle tool kit.
Removing Fold the right side of the cargo floor panel
upward to remove the onboard vehicle tool
For storing bulky objects the cargo cover kit.
can be removed.
1. Detach the left and right retaining
straps at the tailgate. Enlarging the cargo area
2. Pull the cargo cover out of the brackets
on the left and right.
Concept
The cargo area can be enlarged as follows:
– The rear seat backrests can be folded
down.
– The rear seat backrests can be moved
into an upright loading position using
the cargo setting.
General information
The rear seat backrest is divided into two
Installing parts at a ratio of 60 to 40. The left rear seat
1. Slide the cargo cover forward horizon- backrest is connected to the center section.
tally into the two side brackets until it The rear seat backrests can be folded down
audibly engages. from the rear.
226
Cargo area CONTROLS
Safety information
Warning
Warning Body parts can be jammed when moving
Danger of jamming with folding down the Make sure that the area of movement is
backrests. There is a risk of injury or risk clear when moving the head restraint.
of damage to property. Make sure that the
area of movement of the rear backrest and
the of the head restraint is clear prior to Folding down the rear seat
folding down.
backrest from the rear
1. Before the rear seat backrest is folded
down, hook the corresponding safety
Warning
belt into the belt buckle on the side.
If a rear seat backrest is not locked, unse-
cured cargo can be thrown about the car’s 2. Pull the lever up, arrow 1, and fold the
interior; for instance, in the event of an ac- rear seat backrest forward, arrow 2.
cident, braking or an evasive maneuver.
There is a risk of injury. Make sure that
the rear seat backrest is locked after fold-
ing it back.
Warning
With a rear backrest that is not locked, the
protective function of the middle safety
belt is not guaranteed. There is a risk of
injuries or danger to life. If you are using Cargo position
the middle safety belt, lock the wider rear
seat backrest. Concept
The rear seat backrests can be moved into
an upright loading position.
Warning
The stability of the child restraint system Adjusting
is limited or compromised with incorrect 1. Release the backrest, and tilt it forward.
seat setting or improper installation of the
child seat. There is a risk of injuries or
danger to life. Make sure that the child re-
straint system fits securely against the
backrest. If possible, adjust the backrest
tilt for all affected backrests and correctly
adjust the seats. Make sure that seats and
backrests are securely engaged or locked.
If possible, adjust the height of the head
restraints or remove them.
227
CONTROLS Cargo area
2. Fold the frame up until it engages. Removing the cargo floor panel
3. Fold back and engage the rear seat On 5-door models: To change the position of
backrest. the cargo floor panel, first fold up the rear
part of the cargo floor panel.
Folding back the backrest
Fold up the backrest and press it into the
latch. Make sure that the safety belt is not
caught behind the backrest or in between
the backrest and the rear seats.
Variable cargo area floor

Concept Grasp the cargo floor panel in the rear and
With the variable cargo area floor, the cargo fold slightly upward. Next, pull it backward
area can be configured corresponding to from the supports.
transport requirements. The cargo floor panel can be removed from
the cargo area above the tail lights.
General information
Follow instructions on securing cargo, refer
to page 224.
Lower position
– Larger objects can be transported.
228
Cargo area CONTROLS
– Space for smaller objects remains be- Upper position

tween the fixed and variable cargo area
floor.
Folded up position
Safety information
Warning
Improper use of the variable cargo floor
panel can lead to a danger of objects flying – With the backrests folded down, a long,
about during braking and evasive maneu- flat loading surface is produced.
vers. There is a risk of injury and risk of – For 3-door models:
damage to property. Maximum load in this position:
– Do not use the variable cargo floor 330 lbs/150 kg.
panel to separate the cargo area and – For 5-door models:
vehicle interior in the sense of a par-
Maximum load in this position:
tition net.
441 lbs/200 kg.
– Only use the variable cargo floor
– Space for objects remains between the
panel in the folded-up position when
fixed and variable cargo area floor.
the backrests are folded up and
locked.
– Fold down the variable cargo floor
panel before driving off.
– Always secure cargo against shifting,
using straps, belts and lashing eyes,
for instance.
Fold up the cargo floor panel
Fold up the cargo floor panel in the lower

position and push it behind the locks, arrow.
You've reached the maximum cargo height.
229
DRIVING TIPS Things to remember when driving
Things to remember when driving

Vehicle features and options Engine, transmission, and axle
drive
specific and optional features offered with Up to 1,200 miles/2,000 km
the series. It also describes features and Do not exceed the maximum engine and
functions that are not necessarily available road speed:
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- – For gasoline engine 4,500 rpm and
tions or country versions. This also applies 100 mph/160 km/h.
When using these functions and systems, Avoid full load or kickdown under all cir-
the applicable laws and regulations must be cumstances.
observed.
From 1,200 miles/2,000 km
The engine and vehicle speed can gradually
Breaking-in period be increased.
General information Tires

Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
Moving parts need to begin working to-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
gether smoothly.
new; they achieve their full traction poten-
The following instructions will help you to tial after a break-in time.
achieve a long vehicle life and good effi-
Drive conservatively for the first
ciency.
200 miles/300 km.
During break-in, do not use the Launch
Control, refer to page 121. Brake system
Brake discs and brake pads only reach their
Safety information full effectiveness after ap-
prox. 300 miles/500 km. Drive moderately
Warning during this break-in period.
Due to new parts and components, safety
and driver assistance systems can react Clutch
with a delay. There is a risk of accident. The function of the clutch reaches its opti-
After installing new parts or with a new mal level only after a distance driven of ap-
vehicle, drive conservatively and inter- prox. 300 miles/500 km. During this break-
vene early if necessary. Observe the break- in period, engage the clutch gently.
in procedures of the respective parts and
components. Following part replacement
The same break-in procedures should be ob-
served if any of the components mentioned
230
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
above have to be renewed in the course of Hot exhaust gas system

the vehicle's operating life.
Warning
General driving notes High temperatures can occur underneath
the body, for instance caused by the ex-
haust gas system, while driving. Contact
Closing the tailgate with the exhaust gas system can cause
burns. There is a risk of injury. Do not
Safety information touch the hot exhaust gas system, includ-
ing the exhaust pipe.
Warning
An open tailgate protrudes from the vehi-
cle and can endanger occupants and other Warning
traffic participants or damage the vehicle If combustible materials, such as leaves or
in the event of an accident, braking or eva- grass, come in contact with hot parts of
sive maneuvers. In addition, exhaust the exhaust gas system, these materials
fumes may enter the vehicle interior. can ignite. There is a risk of fire and inju-
There is a risk of injury or risk of damage ries. Do not remove the heat shields instal-
to property. Do not drive with the tailgate led and never apply undercoating to them.
open. Make sure that no combustible materials
can come in contact with hot vehicle parts
in driving operation, idle or during park-
Driving with the tailgate open ing.
If driving with the tailgate open cannot be
avoided:
– Close all windows and the glass sunroof.
Mobile communication devices in
the vehicle
– Greatly increase the air flow from the
vents.
– Drive moderately. Warning
Vehicle electronics and mobile phones can
Ice on window glass influence one another. There is radiation
due to the transmission operations of mo-
bile phones. There is a risk of injury or
NOTICE risk of damage to property. If possible, in
The window will be lowered slightly when the car's interior use only mobile phones
pulling on the door handle. In the event of with direct connections to an exterior an-
frost, the window may freeze up and not tenna in order to exclude mutual interfer-
be lowered. There is a risk of damage to ence and deflect the radiation from the
property, among other potential damage. car's interior.
When pulling on the door handle, make
sure that the window is lowered. If neces-
sary, remove snow and ice from the win-
dow. Do not open the door with force.
231
Hydroplaning Perform an emergency stop in situations

On wet or slushy roads, a wedge of water that require such.
can form between the tires and road sur- Steering is still responsive. You can still
face. avoid any obstacles with a minimum of
This phenomenon is referred to as hydro- steering effort.
planing. It is characterized by a partial or Pulsation of the brake pedal and sounds
complete loss of contact between the tires from the hydraulic circuits indicate that the
and the road surface, ultimately undermin- Antilock Braking System ABS is in its active
ing your ability to steer and brake the vehi- mode.
cle.
Objects in the area around the pedals
Driving through water
Warning
General information Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
When driving through water, follow the fol- the pedal distance or block a depressed
lowing: pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
– Deactivate Auto Start/Stop function. jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
– Drive through calm water only. cured and cannot enter into the driver's
floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
– Drive through water only if it is not for the vehicle and can be safely attached
deeper than maximum 9.8 inches/25 cm. to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
– Drive through water no faster than and do not layer several floor mats. Make
walking speed, up to 3 mph/5 km/h. sure that there is sufficient clearance for
the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
Safety information securely fastened again after they were re-
moved, for instance for cleaning.
NOTICE
When driving too quickly through too Driving in wet conditions
deep water, water can enter into the en- When roads are wet, salted, or in heavy
gine compartment, the electrical system or rain, gently press the brake pedal every few
the transmission. There is a risk of damage miles.
to property, among other potential dam-
age. When driving through water, do not Ensure that this action does not endanger
exceed the maximum indicated water level other traffic.
and the maximum speed for driving The heat generated during braking dries
through water. brake discs and brake pads and protects
them against corrosion.
In this way braking efficiency will be avail-
Braking safely able when you need it.
General information
The vehicle is equipped with an Antilock
Braking System ABS as a standard feature.
232
Things to remember when driving DRIVING TIPS
Hills their response - generally this cannot be

corrected.
General information
Drive long or steep downhill gradients in Condensation water under the
the gear that requires least braking effort. parked vehicle
Otherwise, the brakes may overheat and re- When using the automatic climate control,
duce brake efficiency. condensation water develops and collects
You can increase the engine's braking effect underneath the vehicle.
by shifting down, going all the way to first
gear, if needed. Ground clearance
Safety information
NOTICE
If the ground clearance is insufficient, e.g.,
Warning curbs or underground garage entrances,
Light but consistent brake pressure can contact with vehicle parts, e.g., spoiler,
lead to high temperatures, brakes wearing and the underbody may occur. There is a
out and possibly even brake failure. There risk of damage to property, among other
is a risk of accident. Avoid placing exces- potential damage. Ensure that there is suf-
sive stress on the brake system. ficient ground clearance available.
Warning
In idle state or with the engine switched Roof-mounted luggage rack
off, safety functions, for instance engine
braking effect, braking assistance and General information
steering assistance, may not be available. Installation only possible with roof rack.
There is a risk of accident. Do not attempt
to drive in idle state or with the engine Roof racks are available as special accesso-
switched off. ries.
Mounting
Brake disc corrosion Follow the installation instructions of the
Corrosion on the brake discs and contami- roof rack.
nation on the brake pads are increased by
the following circumstances: Loading
– Low mileage. Because roof-mounted luggage racks raise
– Extended periods when the vehicle is the vehicle's center of gravity when loaded,
not used at all. they have a major effect on vehicle handling
– Infrequent use of the brakes. and steering response.
– Aggressive, acidic, or alkaline cleaning Therefore, note the following when loading
agents. and driving:
Corrosion buildup on the brake discs will
cause a pulsating effect on the brakes in
233
– Do not exceed the approved roof/axle

loads and the approved gross vehicle
weight.
– Be sure that adequate clearance is main-
tained for tilting and opening the glass
sunroof.
– Distribute the roof load uniformly.
– The roof load should not extend past the
loading area.
– Always place the heaviest pieces on the
bottom.
– Secure the roof luggage firmly, for in-
stance using ratchet straps.
– Do not let objects project into the open-
ing path of the tailgate.
– Drive cautiously and avoid sudden ac-
celeration and braking maneuvers. Take
corners gently.
Driving on racetracks
Warning
The vehicle is not designed for use in M
Sport or motor sport type competition.
There is a risk of accident. Do not use the
vehicle for M Sport or motor sport type
competitions.
Higher mechanical and thermal loads during

racetrack operation lead to increased wear.
Use of the vehicle in M sport or motor sport
type competition is an improper use of the
vehicle and may affect your warranty cover-
age. See “New Vehicle Limited Warranty”
for more details.
234
Reducing fuel consumption DRIVING TIPS
Reducing fuel consumption

Vehicle features and options Attached parts on the vehicle impair the
aerodynamics and increase the fuel con-
sumption.
functions that are not necessarily available Close the windows and glass
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sunroof
to safety-related functions and systems. Driving with the glass sunroof and windows
When using these functions and systems, open results in increased air resistance and
the applicable laws and regulations must be raises fuel consumption.
observed.
Tires
General information
General information
The vehicle contains advanced technologies
for the reduction of consumption and emis- Tires can affect consumption in various
sion values. ways, for instance tire size may influence
consumption.
Fuel consumption depends on a number of
different factors.
Check the tire inflation pressure
The implementation of certain measures,
driving style and regular maintenance can
regularly
influence fuel consumption and environ- Check and, if needed, correct the tire infla-
mental impact. tion pressure at least twice a month and be-
fore starting on a long trip.
Low tire inflation pressure increases rolling
Remove unnecessary cargo resistance and thus raises fuel consumption
and tire wear.
Additional weight increases fuel consump-
tion.
Drive away without delay
Remove attached parts follow- Do not wait for the engine to warm-up
while the vehicle remains stationary. Start
ing use driving right away, but at moderate engine
speeds.
Remove roof-mounted or rear rear carriers
This is the fastest way for the cold engine
which are no longer required following use.
to reach its operating temperature.
235
DRIVING TIPS Reducing fuel consumption
Look well ahead when driving If the engine is switched off and then re-
started rather than leaving the engine run-
ning constantly, fuel consumption and emis-
Driving smoothly and proactively reduces sions are reduced. Savings can begin within
fuel consumption. a few seconds of switching off the engine.
Avoid unnecessary acceleration and brak- In addition, fuel consumption is also deter-
ing. mined by other factors, such as driving
By maintaining a suitable distance to the style, road conditions, maintenance or envi-
vehicle driving ahead of you. ronmental factors.
Avoid high engine speeds Switch off any functions that

are not currently needed
Driving at low engine speeds lowers fuel
consumption and reduces wear.
Functions such as seat heating and the rear
If necessary, observe the vehicle's gear shift window defroster require a lot of energy
indicator, refer to page 134. and consume additional fuel, especially in
city and stop-and-go traffic.
Switch off these functions if they are not
Use coasting conditions needed.
When approaching a red light, take your

foot off the accelerator and let the vehicle Have maintenance carried out
coast to a halt.
For going downhill take your foot off the ac- Have the vehicle maintained regularly to
celerator and let the vehicle roll. achieve optimal vehicle efficiency and serv-
The fuel supply is interrupted while coast- ice life. MINI recommends that mainte-
ing. nance work be performed by a MINI service
center.
Also note the MINI maintenance systems,
Switch off the engine during refer to page 277.
longer stops
GREEN Mode
Switching off the engine
Switch off the engine during longer stops,
for instance at traffic lights, railroad cross-
Concept
ings or in traffic jam. GREEN Mode supports a driving style that
saves on consumption. For this purpose, the
Auto Start/Stop function engine control and comfort features, for in-
stance the climate control output, are ad-
The Auto Start/Stop function of the vehicle justed.
automatically switches off the engine dur-
ing a stop. For Steptronic transmission:
236
Under certain conditions the engine is auto- Via the Central Information Display
matically decoupled from the transmission (CID)
in the D selector lever position. The vehicle
1. "My MINI"
continues traveling with the engine idling
to reduce consumption. The D selector lever 2. "Vehicle settings"
position remains engaged. 3. "Configure GREEN"
In addition, context-sensitive instructions 4. Select the desired setting.
are displayed to assist with an efficient
driving style. Activating/deactivating the functions
The achieved extended range is displayed in The following functions can be activated/
the instrument cluster as bonus range. deactivated:
General information – "GREEN speed warning"
– "GREEN climate control"
The system includes the following MINI-
MALISM functions and MINIMALISM dis- – "Coasting"
plays: Settings are stored for the driver profile
– GREEN Limit, refer to page 237 currently used.
– GREEN climate control, refer to
page 237. GREEN Limit
– GREEN bonus range, refer to page 238. – "GREEN speed warning": GREEN Limit
is activated.
– GREEN tip, driving instruction, refer to
page 238. A GREEN tip is displayed if the speed of
the set GREEN Limit is exceeded.
– Coasting driving condition, refer to
page 239. – "Tip at:"
– MINIMALISM analyzer, refer to Set the desired speed for the GREEN
page 241. Limit.
Activating GREEN Mode GREEN climate control

Climate control is set to be efficient.
Press the MINI Driving Modes
switch downward until By making a slight change to the set tem-
GREEN is displayed in the in- perature and adjusting the rate of heating
strument cluster. or cooling of the car's interior consumption
can be economized.
The power output to the seat heater and ex-
Configuring GREEN terior mirror is reduced.
Via MINI Driving Modes switch Coasting

1. Activating GREEN Mode. Efficiency can be optimized by disengaging
the engine and coasting, refer to page 239,
2. "Configure GREEN" with the engine idling.
3. Select the desired setting. This function is only available in GREEN
drive mode.
237
Deactivate the function to use the braking – Mark outside the green range: modify
effect of the engine when traveling down- driving style, for example by backing off
hill. the accelerator.
GREEN potential savings GREEN tip, driving instruction

Shows potential savings with the current
settings in percentages. General information
The GREEN tip indicates that your driving
Display in the instrument cluster style can be modified to be more efficient,
for example by backing off the accelerator.
GREEN bonus range
A modified driving style helps Instrument cluster without enhanced
you extend your driving dis- features: display
tance.
The range extension can be
displayed as the bonus range
The bonus range is shown in the range dis-
play.
The bonus range is automatically reset ev-
ery time the vehicle is refueled.
– Green display: efficient driving style.
– Gray display: modify driving style, for Instrument cluster with enhanced
instance by backing off the accelerator features: display
pedal.
Efficiency display
A bar display in the instru-
ment cluster indicates your
current driving efficiency.
Mark in the left area, arrow 1:
display for energy recovered
by coasting or when braking.
Mark in the right area, arrow 2: display Activating/deactivating the display
when accelerating.
Activate information relating to the driving
The efficiency of your driving style is style and GREEN tips in the instrument
shown by the position of the mark: cluster using the Central Information Dis-
– Mark inside the green range: efficient play (CID):
driving style.
1. "My MINI"
238
3. "Displays" – Coasting.
4. "Instrument panel"
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer
5. "GREEN info"
GREEN tip, symbols 1. "My MINI"
An additional icon and text instructions are 2. "Technology in action"
displayed.
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Icon Measure Further information on the MINIMALISM
For an efficient driving style, look analyzer, refer to page 241.
well ahead when driving, acceler-
ate conservatively, and delay ac- Coasting
celerating.
Reduce speed to the selected
Concept
GREEN speed. The function helps to conserve fuel.
To do this, under certain conditions the en-
Steptronic transmission: gine is automatically decoupled from the
Switch from M/S to D and avoid transmission when selector lever position D
manual shift interventions. is set. The vehicle continues traveling with
the engine idling to reduce consumption.
Manual transmission: Selector lever position D remains engaged.
Follow the shift instructions. This driving condition is referred to as
coasting.
Manual transmission:
As soon as you step on the brake or acceler-
Engage neutral for an engine stop.
ator pedal, the engine is automatically cou-
pled again.
Indications on the Control Display
General information
Displaying MINIMALISM information Coasting is a component of the GREEN
The current efficiency of the functions in drive mode.
GREEN drive mode can be displayed on the Coasting is automatically activated when
Control Display. the GREEN drive mode is called via the
Via the Central Information Display (CID): MINI Driving Modes switch, refer to
page 177.
1. "My MINI"
A proactive driving style helps the driver to
2. "Technology in action" use the function often and supports the effi-
3. "MINIMALISM" cient effect of coasting.
Information is shown on the following func-
tions:
The function is available in the speed range
– Auto Start/Stop function.
from approx. 15 mph/25 km/h up to
– Energy recovery. 100 mph/160 km/h.
239
– Accelerator pedal and brake pedal are Instrument cluster with enhanced features
not operated.
– The selector lever is in selector lever po-
sition D.
– Engine and transmission are at operat-
ing temperature.
– With a camera in the area of the interior
mirror: the system does not detect any
vehicles ahead of you.
Operation via shift paddles The bar display below the tachometer is fil-
led in green and the mark appears at the
Concept zero point. The tachometer indicates idle
Depending on your vehicle's equipment, the speed.
coasting mode can be influenced with the
shift paddles. Indications on the Control Display
The coasting driving condition is displayed
Activating/deactivating coasting via shift
in the MINIMALISM Info while driving.
paddles
The distance traveled in the coasting driv-
1. Shift to the highest gear by pulling the
ing condition is indicated by a counter.
right shift paddle.
2. To activate coasting mode, actuate the Displaying MINIMALISM information
right shift paddle again. Via the Central Information Display (CID):
To deactivate, actuate the left shift paddle.
1. "My MINI"
Display 2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM"
features
System limits
The function is not available if one of the
following conditions applies:
– DSC OFF and TRACTION are activated.
– Cruise control is activated.
– If driving in the dynamic limit range.
– If driving on steep uphill or downhill
grades.
– The battery charge state is temporarily
The bar display below the tachometer is fil- too low.
led in green and the mark appears at the – The vehicle electrical system is drawing
zero point. The tachometer indicates idle excessive current.
speed.
240
MINIMALISM analyzer fish's mood worsens, and a reduced number

of stars is displayed.
Concept The table of values contains stars and evalu-
The function helps develop an especially ef- ates the driving style in different catego-
ficient driving style and to conserve fuel. ries. The more efficient the driving style,
the more stars are displayed in the table.
For this purpose, the driving style is ana-
lyzed. The assessment is done in various The bonus range achieved by a driving style
categories and is displayed on the Control that minimizes consumption is displayed
Display. below the table of values. The more effi-
cient the driving style, the faster the bonus
This display will help you adjust your driv- range increases.
ing style and save some fuel.
To assist with an efficient driving style,
The range of the vehicle can be extended by GREEN tips are displayed while driving.
adopting an efficient driving style. This gain
in range is displayed as a bonus range in the Tips for an energy-saving driving style, Sav-
instrument cluster and on the Control Dis- ing fuel, refer to page 235.
play.
This function is available in GREEN drive
mode.
Displaying the MINIMALISM analyzer

1. "My MINI"
2. "Technology in action"
3. "MINIMALISM Analyser"
Display on the Control Display

The display of the MINIMALISM analyzer
consists of a fish in a water glass, a table of
values and the display of the achieved bo-
nus range.
The fish and the movements of the water in
the bowl symbolize the efficiency of the
driving style.
Depending on the equipment, the fish is
shown with efficient and inefficient driving
style or only with inefficient driving style.
The more efficient the driving style, the less
the water sloshes around in the bowl and
the better is the fish's mood. If the driving
style is inefficient, the water oscillates, the
241
MOBILITY Refueling
Refueling
Vehicle features and options Fuel cap
This chapter describes all standard, country- Opening
1. Grasp the fuel filler flap at the rear edge
and open it.
observed.
General information
2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.
Follow the fuel recommendation, refer to
page 244, prior to refueling.
Safety information
NOTICE
With a driving distance of less than
30 miles/50 km the engine may no longer
have sufficient fuel. Engine functions are 3. Place the fuel cap in the bracket at-
not ensured anymore. There is a risk of tached to the fuel filler flap.
damage. Refuel promptly.
242
Refueling MOBILITY
Closing Safety information
Warning NOTICE
The retaining strap of the fuel cap can be Fuels are toxic and aggressive. Overfilling
jammed and crushed during closing. The of the fuel tank can damage the fuel sys-
cap cannot be correctly closed. Fuel or fuel tem. Painted surfaces may be damaged by
vapors can escape. There is a risk of injury contact with fuel. Escaping fuel can harm
or risk of damage to property. Pay atten- the environment. There is a risk of damage
tion that the retaining strap is not jammed to property, among other potential dam-
or crushed when closing the cap. age. Avoid overfilling.
1. Fit the cap and turn it clockwise until

you clearly hear a click.
2. Press on the fuel filler flap until it en-
gages.
Emergency unlocking
It may be necessary in certain situations to
unlock the fuel filler flap manually, for in-
stance with an electrical fault.
Have fuel filler flap unlocked by a dealer’s
Follow the following when re-

fueling
General information
When refueling, insert the filler nozzle
completely into the filler pipe. Lifting up the
fuel pump nozzle during refueling causes:
– Premature switching off.
– Reduced return of the fuel vapors.
The fuel tank is full when the filler nozzle
clicks off the first time.
Make sure that the fuel cap is closed prop-
erly after refueling, otherwise the emissions
warning light may light up.
Follow safety regulations posted at the gas
station.
243
MOBILITY Fuel
Fuel
Vehicle features and options xx: comply with the current standard in
each case.
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Even small quantities of the wrong fuel or
tions or country versions. This also applies wrong fuel additives can damage the fuel
to safety-related functions and systems. system and engine. Furthermore, the cata-
When using these functions and systems, lytic converter is permanently damaged.
the applicable laws and regulations must be There is a risk of damage to property,
observed. among other potential damage. Do not re-
fuel or add the following in the case of
gasoline engines:
Fuel recommendation – Leaded gasoline.
– Metallic additives, for instance man-
General information ganese or iron.
Depending on the region, many gas stations Do not press the Start/Stop button after
sell fuel that has been customized to winter refueling with the wrong fuel. Contact a
or summer conditions. Fuel that is available dealer’s service center or another qualified
in winter, for instance helps make a cold service center or repair shop.
start easier.
Gasoline NOTICE
Incorrect fuels can damage the fuel system
General information and the engine. There is a risk of damage
For the best fuel efficiency, the gasoline to property, among other potential dam-
should be sulfur-free or very low in sulfur age. Do not use fuels with a higher per-
content. centage of ethanol than recommended. Do
Fuels that are marked on the gas pump as not refuel with fuels containing methanol,
containing metal must not be used. e.g. M5 to M100.
Fuels with a maximum ethanol content of
25 %, i. e. E10 or E25, may be used for refu-
eling. NOTICE
Ethanol should meet the following quality Fuel that does not comply with the mini-
standards: mum quality can compromise engine func-
US: ASTM 4806–xx tion or cause engine damage. There is a
CAN: CGSB-3.511–xx potential damage. Do not fill with fuel that
244
Fuel MOBILITY
does not comply with the minimum qual-

ity.
CAUTION
The use of poor-quality fuels may result in
harmful engine deposits or damage. Addi-
tionally, problems relating to drivability,
starting and stalling, especially under cer-
tain environmental conditions such as
high ambient temperature and high alti-
tude, may occur.
If drivability problems are encountered,
we recommend switching to a high quality
gasoline brand and a higher octane grade
— AKI number — for a few tank fills. To
avoid harmful engine deposits, it is highly
recommended to purchase gasoline from
Top Tier retailers.
Failure to comply with these recommenda-
tions may result in the need for additional
maintenance.
Recommended fuel grade

MINI recommends AKI 91.
John Cooper Works:
Refuel with this gasoline to achieve the
rated performance and consumption values.
Minimum fuel grade

John Cooper Works:
If you use gasoline with this minimum AKI
Rating, the engine may produce knocking
sounds when starting at high external tem-
peratures. This has no effect on the engine
life.
245
MOBILITY Wheels and tires
Wheels and tires

Vehicle features and options Tire pressure specifications
This chapter describes all standard, country- In the tire inflation pressure table
specific and optional features offered with The tire inflation pressure table, refer to
the series. It also describes features and page 247, contains all tire inflation pres-
functions that are not necessarily available sure specifications for the specified tire
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- sizes at the ambient temperature. The tire
tions or country versions. This also applies inflation pressure values apply to tire sizes
to safety-related functions and systems. approved by the manufacturer of the vehicle
When using these functions and systems, for the vehicle type.
the applicable laws and regulations must be To identify the correct tire inflation pres-
observed. sure, please note the following:
– Tire sizes of your vehicle.
Tire inflation pressure – Maximum speed for driving.
Checking the tire inflation pressure

General information
The tire characteristics and tire inflation General information
pressure influence the following: Tires heat up while driving. The tire infla-
– The service life of the tires. tion pressure increases with the tire tem-
– Road safety. perature.
– Driving comfort. Tires have a natural, consistent loss of tire
inflation pressure.
– Fuel consumption.
The displays of inflation devices may under-
Safety information read by up to 0.1 bar/2 psi.
Checking using tire inflation pressure

Warning specifications in the tire inflation
A tire with too little or no tire inflation pressure table
pressure may heat up significantly and The tire inflation pressure specifications in
sustain damage. This will have a negative the tire inflation pressure table only relate
impact on aspects of handling, such as to cold tires or tires at the same tempera-
steering and braking response. There is a ture as the ambient temperature.
risk of accident. Regularly check the tire
inflation pressure, and correct it as Only check the tire inflation pressure levels
needed, for instance twice a month and be- when the tires are cold, i.e.:
fore a long trip. – Driving distance of max.
1.25 miles/2 km has not been exceeded.
– If the vehicle has not moved again for at
least 2 hours after a trip.
246
Wheels and tires MOBILITY
1. Determine the intended tire inflation

pressure levels for the mounted tires.
2. Check the tire inflation pressure in all
four tires, using a pressure gage, for ex-
ample.
3. Correct the tire inflation pressure if the
actual tire inflation pressure deviates
from the intended tire inflation pres-
sure.
These pressure values can also be found on
4. Check whether all valve caps are the tire inflation pressure label on the driv-
screwed onto the tire valves. er's door pillar.
After correcting the tire inflation Do not exceed a speed of 100 mph/
pressure 160 km/h.
For run-flat tires: reinitialize run-flat tires.
Tire pressure values up to
For the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM: reset
the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
100 mph/160 km/h
Checking the tire inflation pressure of On 3-door models: COOPER

the emergency wheel Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 2.2 / 32 2.2 / 32

V A/S
195/55 R 16 87
Located behind the bumper on the under- W
side of the vehicle is an opening for check- 195/55 R 16 87
ing the tire inflation pressure. H M+S
Tire pressures up to 100 mph/

160 km/h
For speeds of up to 100 mph/160 km/h and
for optimum driving comfort, note the pres-
sure values in the tire inflation pressure ta-
ble, refer to page 247, and adjust as neces-
sary.
247
Tire size Pressure specifica- Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
175/65 R 15 84 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32 205/45 R 17 88 2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32
H A/S V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88
V XL A/S W XL
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88
W XL V XL M+S
175/65 R 15 88 205/40 R 18 86 2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33
H XL M+S W XL
205/45 R 17 88 185/50 R 17 86
V XL M+S H XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32
W XL On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER
175/60 R 16 86 WORKS
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86 Tire size Pressure specifications
H XL M+S in bar/PSI
Specifications
On 3-door models: COOPER S in bar/PSI with
cold tires
Tire size Pressure specifica-
tions in bar/PSI
205/45 R 17 88 2.6 / 38 2.2 / 32
Specifications V XL A/S
in bar/PSI with 205/45 R 17 88
cold tires W XL
205/45 R 17 88
195/55 R 16 87 2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32 Y XL
V A/S 205/45 R 17 88
195/55 R 16 87 V XL M+S
W 205/40 R 18 86 2.8 / 41 2.4 / 35
195/55 R 16 87 W XL
H M+S 185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
248
On 5-door models: COOPER On 5-door models: COOPER S
Tire size Pressure specifica- Tire size Pressure specifica-

tions in bar/PSI tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in Specifications
bar/PSI with in bar/PSI with
cold tires cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 2.3 / 33 2.2 / 32 195/55 R 16 87 2.4 / 35 2.2 / 32

V A/S V A/S
195/55 R 16 87 195/55 R 16 87
W W
195/55 R 16 87 195/55 R 16 87
H M+S H M+S
175/65 R 15 84 2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33 205/45 R 17 88 2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33
H A/S V XL A/S
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88
V XL A/S W XL
205/45 R 17 88 205/45 R 17 88
W XL V XL M+S
175/65 R 15 88 205/40 R 18 86 2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36
H XL M+S W XL
205/45 R 17 88 185/50 R 17 86
V XL M+S H XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 2.7 / 39 2.5 / 36
W XL Tire inflation pressures at max.
175/60 R 16 86 speeds above 100 mph/160 km/h
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86 Warning
H XL M+S
In order to drive at maximum speeds in ex-
cess of 100 mph/160 km/h, please ob-
serve, and, if necessary, adjust tire pres-
sures for speeds exceeding 100 mph/
160 km/h from the relevant table on the
following pages. Otherwise, tire damage
and accidents could occur.
For speeds over 100 mph/160 km/h and for

optimum driving comfort, note the pressure
values in the tire inflation pressure table,
refer to page 250, and adjust as necessary.
249
Tire pressure values over 100 mph/ On 3-door models: COOPER S

160 km/h
On 3-door models: COOPER tions in bar/PSI
Specifications
Tire size Pressure specifica- in bar/PSI with
tions in bar/PSI cold tires
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
195/55 R 16 87 2.8 / 41 2.3 / 33
cold tires
V A/S
195/55 R 16 87
195/55 R 16 87 2.5 / 36 2.2 / 32 W
V A/S 195/55 R 16 87
195/55 R 16 87 H M+S
W 205/45 R 17 88 3.1 / 45 2.6 / 38
195/55 R 16 87 V XL A/S
H M+S 205/45 R 17 88
175/65 R 15 84 2.7 / 39 2.3 / 33 W XL
H A/S 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
V XL A/S 205/40 R 18 86 3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
W XL 185/50 R 17 86
175/65 R 15 88 H XL M+S
H XL M+S
205/45 R 17 88
V XL M+S
205/40 R 18 86 2.9 / 42 2.4 / 35
W XL
175/60 R 16 86
H XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
250
On 3-door models: JOHN COOPER Tire size Pressure specifica-

WORKS tions in bar/PSI
175/65 R 15 84 2.8 / 41 2.5 / 36
Tire size Pressure specifications
in bar/PSI H A/S
205/45 R 17 88
Specifications V XL A/S
in bar/PSI with
cold tires 205/45 R 17 88
W XL
175/65 R 15 88
205/45 R 17 88 3.2 / 46 2.7 / 39 H XL M+S
V XL A/S 205/45 R 17 88
205/45 R 17 88 V XL M+S
W XL
205/40 R 18 86 3.0 / 44 2.7 / 39
205/45 R 17 88 W XL
Y XL
175/60 R 16 86
205/45 R 17 88 H XL M+S
V XL M+S
185/50 R 17 86
205/40 R 18 86 3.3 / 48 2.8 / 41 H XL M+S
W XL
185/50 R 17 86
H XL M+S
On 5-door models: COOPER

tions in bar/PSI
Specifications in
bar/PSI with
cold tires
195/55 R 16 87 2.6 / 38 2.3 / 33

V A/S
195/55 R 16 87
W
195/55 R 16 87
H M+S
251
On 5-door models: COOPER S Maximum tire load

Maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
Tire size Pressure specifica- sible weight for which the tire is approved.
tions in bar/PSI
Locate the maximum tire load on the tire
Specifications in sidewall and the Gross Axle Weight Rating
bar/PSI with – GAWR – on the certification label on the
cold tires driver’s door pillar. Divide the tire load by
1.1. It must be greater than one-half of the
vehicle’s Gross Axle Weight Rating –
195/55 R 16 87 3.0 / 44 2.6 / 38 GAWR. Note, front vs. rear GAWR and tire
V A/S loads, respectively.
195/55 R 16 87
W Speed letter
195/55 R 16 87
H M+S Designation Maximum speed
205/45 R 17 88 3.3 / 48 2.9 / 42 Q up to 100 mph/160 km/h
V XL A/S
R up to 106 mph/170 km/h
205/45 R 17 88
W XL S up to 112 mph/180 km/h
205/45 R 17 88 T up to 118 mph/190 km/h
V XL M+S
H up to 131 mph/210 km/h
205/40 R 18 86
W XL V up to 150 mph/240 km/h
185/50 R 17 86 W up to 167 mph/270 km/h
H XL M+S
Y up to 186 mph/300 km/h
Tire identification marks Tire Identification Number

DOT-Code: DOT xxxx xxx 0121
Tire size xxxx: manufacturer code for the tire brand
205/45 R 17 84 V xxx: tire size and tire design
205: nominal width in mm 0121: tire age
45: aspect ratio in % Tires with DOT codes meet the guidelines
of the U.S. Department of Transportation.
R: radial tire code
17: rim diameter in inches Tire age
84: load rating, not for ZR tires
V: speed rating, before the R on ZR tires Recommendation
Regardless of the tire tread, replace tires at
least every 6 years.
252
Manufacture date controlled conditions on specified govern-

You can find the manufacture date of the ment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.
tire on the tire's sidewall. A tire marked C may have poor traction per-
formance.
Designation Manufacture date The traction grade assigned to this tire is
DOT … 0121 1st week 2021 based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration,
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction
Uniform Tire Quality Grading characteristics.
Quality grades can be found where applica-
ble on the tire sidewall between tread Temperature
shoulder and maximum section width.
The temperature grades are A, the highest,
E.g.: Treadwear 200; Traction AA; Tempera- B, and C, representing the tire's resistance
ture A to the generation of heat and its ability to
dissipate heat when tested under controlled
DOT Quality Grades conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
Treadwear test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
Traction AA A B C cause the material of the tire to degenerate
and reduce tire life, and excessive tempera-
Temperature A B C ture can lead to sudden tire failure. The
All passenger vehicle tires must conform to grade C corresponds to a level of perform-
Federal Safety Requirements in addition to ance which all passenger car tires must
these grades. meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades Band A
Treadwear represent higher levels of performance on
The treadwear grade is a comparative rating the laboratory test wheel than the minimum
based on the wear rate of the tire when required by law.
tested under controlled conditions on a
specified government test course. E.g., a Warning
tire graded 150 would wear one and one- The temperature grade for this tire is es-
half, 1 g, times as well on the government tablished for a tire that is properly inflated
course as a tire graded 100. The relative and not overloaded. Excessive speed, un-
performance of tires depends upon the ac- derinflation, or excessive loading, either
tual conditions of their use, however, and separately or in combination, can cause
may depart significantly from the norm due heat buildup and possible tire failure.
to variations in driving habits, service prac-
tices and differences in road characteristics
and climate. RSC – Run-flat tires
Run-flat tires, refer to page 256, are labeled
Traction with a circular icon containing the letters
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, RSC marked on the sidewall.
are AA, A, B, and C.
Those grades represent the tire's ability to
stop on wet pavement as measured under
253
M+S Tire damage

Winter and all-season tires with better cold
weather performance than summer tires. General information
Inspect your tires regularly for damage, for-
eign objects lodged in the tread, and tread
Tire tread wear.
Driving over rough or damaged road surfa-
Summer tires ces, as well as debris, curbs and other obsta-
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than cles can cause serious damage to wheels,
0.12 in/3 mm, otherwise there is an in- tires and suspension parts. This is more
creased risk of hydroplaning. likely to occur with low-profile tires, which
provide less cushioning between the wheel
Winter tires and the road. Be careful to avoid road haz-
ards and reduce your speed, especially if
Do not drive with a tire tread of less than your vehicle is equipped with low-profile
0.16 in/4 mm, as such tires are less suitable tires.
for winter operation.
Indications of tire damage or other vehicle
Minimum tread depth malfunctions:
– Unusual vibrations.
– Unusual tire or running noises.
– Unusual handling such as a strong ten-
dency to pull to the left or right.
Damage can be caused by the following sit-
uations, for instance:
– Driving over curbs.
– Road damage.
– Tire inflation pressure too low.
Wear indicators are distributed around the
tire's circumference and have the legally re- – Vehicle overloading.
quired minimum height of 0.063 in- – Incorrect tire storage.
ches/1.6 mm.
Safety information
The positions of the wear indicators are
marked on the tire sidewall with TWI, Tread
Wear Indicator. Warning
Damaged tires can lose tire inflation pres-
sure, which can lead to loss of vehicle con-
trol. There is a risk of accident. If tire dam-
age is suspected while driving,
immediately reduce speed and stop. Have
wheels and tires checked. For this pur-
pose, drive carefully to the nearest dealer’s
254
center or repair shop. Have vehicle towed an accident. The manufacturer of your ve-
or transported as needed. Do not repair hicle strongly suggests that you use
damaged tires, but have them replaced. wheels and tires that have been recom-
mended by the vehicle manufacturer for
your vehicle type.
Warning
Tires can become damaged by driving over
obstacles, e.g., curbs or road damage, at Warning
high speed. Larger wheels have a smaller Incorrect wheel/tire combinations will
tire cross-section. The smaller the tire have a negative impact on the vehicle's
cross-section, the higher the risk of tire handling and on the function of a variety
damage. There is a danger of accidents and of systems, such as the ABS Antilock Brak-
property damage. If possible, avoid driving ing System or DSC Dynamic Stability Con-
over objects or road conditions that may trol. There is a risk of accident. To main-
damage tires, or drive over them slowly tain good handling and vehicle response,
and carefully. use only tires with a single tread configu-
ration from a single manufacturer. The
manufacturer of the vehicle recommends
that you use wheels and tires that have
Changing wheels and tires been recommended by the vehicle manu-
facturer for your vehicle type. Following
tire damage, have the original wheel/tire
Mounting and wheel balancing combination remounted on the vehicle as
Have mounting and tire and wheel balanc- soon as possible.
ing carried out by a dealer’s service center
or another qualified service center or repair
shop. Recommended tire brands
Wheel and tire combination
General information
You can ask the dealer's service center or
shop about the correct wheel/tire combina-
tion and wheel rim versions for the vehicle.
Safety information
For each tire size, the manufacturer of the
vehicle recommends certain tire brands.
Warning The tire brands can be identified by a star
Wheels and tires which are not suitable on the tire sidewall.
for your vehicle can damage parts of the
vehicle, for instance due to contact with New tires
the body due to tolerances despite the
same official size rating. There is a risk of Tire traction is not optimal due to manufac-
turing circumstances when tires are brand-
255
new; they achieve their full traction poten- another qualified service center or repair
tial after a break-in time. shop.
Drive conservatively for the first
200 miles/300 km. Rotating wheels between axles
Different wear patterns can occur on the
Retreaded tires front and rear axles depending on individual
driving conditions. The tires can be rotated
in pairs between the axles to achieve even
Warning
wear. Further information is available from
Retreaded tires can have different tire cas- a dealer's service center or another qualified
ing structures. With advanced age the service center or repair shop. After rotating,
service life can be limited. There is a risk check the tire pressure and correct, if
of an accident. The manufacturer of your needed.
vehicle does not recommend the use of re-
treaded tires. Storing tires
The manufacturer of the vehicle does not Tire inflation pressure
recommend the use of retreaded tires.
Do not exceed the maximum tire inflation
pressure indicated on the side wall of the
Winter tires tire.
Winter tires are recommended for operat-
ing on winter roads. Storage
Although so-called all-season M+S tires pro- Store wheels and tires in a cool, dry and
vide better winter traction than summer dark place.
tires, they usually do not provide the same
level of performance as winter tires. Always protect tires against all contact with
oil, grease, and solvents.
Maximum speed of winter tires Do not leave tires in plastic bags.
If the maximum speed of the vehicle is Remove dirt from wheels or tires.
higher than the permissible speed for the
winter tires, then attach a label showing the
permissible maximum speed in the field of Run-flat tires
view. The label is available from a dealer's
service center or another qualified service Concept
Run-flat tires permit continued driving un-
With winter tires mounted, observe and do
der restricted conditions even in the event
not exceed the permissible maximum speed.
of a complete loss of tire inflation pressure.
Changing runflat tires General information
When changing from run-flat tires to stand-
The wheels are composed of tires that are
ard tires, it must be ensured that the vehicle
self-supporting to a limited degree.
contains a compact spare tire ("donut") or
tire mobility kit. Further information is
available from a dealer's service center or
256
The support of the sidewall allows the tire – Turn the steering wheel until the front
to remain drivable to a restricted degree in wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
the event of a tire inflation pressure loss. tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
Follow the instructions for continued driv- – Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
ing with a flat tire. vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
side the immediate area in a safe place,
Safety information such as behind a guardrail.
– If necessary, set up a warning triangle
Warning at an appropriate distance.
The vehicle handles differently when a
run-flat tire has insufficient or no tire
pressure; for instance, reduced lane stabil-
Mobility System
ity when braking, braking distances are
longer and the self-steering properties will Concept
change. There is a risk of accident. Drive With the Mobility System, minor tire dam-
moderately and do not exceed a speed of age can be sealed temporarily to enable con-
50 mph/80 km/h. tinued travel. To accomplish this, sealant is
pumped into the tires, which seals the dam-
age from the inside.
Label
General information
– Follow the instructions on using the
Mobility System found on the compres-
sor and sealant container.
– Use of the Mobility System may be inef-
fective if the tire puncture measures ap-
prox. 1/8 inches/4 mm or more.
– Contact a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair
The tires are marked on the tire sidewall shop if the tire cannot be made drivable.
with RSC Run-flat System Component.
– Do not remove foreign bodies that have
penetrated the tire. Only remove foreign
objects if they are visibly protruding
Repairing a flat tire from the tire.
– Pull the speed limit sticker off the seal-
Safety measures ant container and apply it to the steer-
ing wheel.
– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
from passing traffic and on solid ground. – The use of a sealant can damage the
TPM wheel electronics. In this case,
– Switch on the hazard warning system. have the TPM wheel electronics re-
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away placed at the next opportunity.
by setting the parking brake. – The compressor can be used to check
the tire inflation pressure.
257
Overview Safety measures

– Park the vehicle as far away as possible
Storage from passing traffic and on solid ground.
The Mobility System is located under the – Switch on the hazard warning system.
cargo floor panel.
– Secure the vehicle against rolling away
by setting the parking brake.
Sealant container
– Turn the steering wheel until the front
wheels are in the straight-ahead posi-
tion and engage the steering wheel lock.
– Have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
such as behind a guardrail.
at an appropriate distance.
– Sealant container, arrow 1. Filling the tire with sealant
– Filling hose, arrow 2.
Observe use-by date on the sealant con- Safety information
tainer.
DANGER
Compressor If the exhaust pipe is blocked or ventila-
tion is insufficient, harmful exhaust gases
can enter into the vehicle. The exhaust
gases contain pollutants which are color-
less and odorless. In enclosed areas, ex-
haust gases can also accumulate outside of
the vehicle. There is danger to life. Keep
the exhaust pipe free and ensure sufficient
ventilation.
1 Sealant container unlocking

NOTICE
2 Sealant container holder
The compressor can overheat during ex-
3 Tire pressure gage tended operation. There is a risk of dam-
4 Reduce tire inflation pressure button age to property, among other potential
5 On/off switch damage. Do not run the compressor for
more than 10 minutes.
6 Compressor
7 Connector/cable for socket
8 Connection hose
258
Filling 4. Screw the filling hose of the sealant con-

1. Shake the sealant container. tainer onto the tire valve of the non-
working wheel.
2. Pull filling hose completely out of the

cover of the sealant container. Do not 5. With the compressor switched off, in-
kink the hose. sert the connector into the power socket
in the vehicle interior.
3. Slide the sealant container into the

holder on the compressor housing, en- 6. With the ignition switched on or the en-
suring that it engages audibly. gine running, switch on the compressor.
Let the compressor run for max. 10 minutes

to fill the tire with sealant and achieve a
tire inflation pressure of approx. 2.5 bar.
While the tire is being filled with sealant,
the tire inflation pressure may sporadically
reach approx. 5 bar. Do not switch off the
compressor at this point.
259
Checking and adjusting the tire 4. Insert the connector into the power
inflation pressure socket in the vehicle interior.
Checking
1. Switch off the compressor.
2. Read the tire inflation pressure on the
tire pressure gage.
To continue the trip, a tire inflation pres-
sure of at least 2 bar must be reached.
Removing and stowing the sealant

5. With the ignition switched on or the en-
container
gine running, switch on the compressor.
1. Unscrew the filling hose of the sealant If a tire inflation pressure of at least
container from the tire valve. 2 bar cannot be reached, contact your
2. Press the red unlocking device. dealer's service center or another quali-
3. Remove the sealant container from the fied service center or repair shop.
compressor. If a tire inflation pressure of at least
4. Wrap and store the sealant container in 2 bar is reached, see Minimum tire infla-
suitable material to avoid dirtying the tion pressure is reached.
cargo area. 6. Unscrew the connection hose of the
compressor from the tire valve.
Minimum tire inflation pressure is not 7. Pull the connector out of the power
reached socket in the vehicle interior.
1. Pull the connector out of the power 8. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
socket in the vehicle interior.
2. Drive 33 ft/10 m forward and back to Minimum tire inflation pressure is
distribute the sealant in the tire. reached
3. Screw the connection hose of the com- 1. Unscrew the connection hose of the
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem. compressor from the tire valve.
2. Pull the connector out of the power
socket in the vehicle interior.
3. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
4. Immediately drive approx.
5 miles/10 km to ensure that the sealant
is evenly distributed in the tire.
Do not exceed a speed of
50 mph/80 km/h.
If possible, do not drive at speeds less
than 12 mph/20 km/h.
260
Adjustment Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor, refer to

1. Stop at a suitable location. page 160.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor, refer to
2. Screw the connection hose of the com-
page 155.
pressor directly onto the tire valve stem.
Replace the nonworking tire and the sealant
container of the Mobility System promptly.
Tire chains
General information
The manufacturer of the vehicle has deter-
mined certain wheels and tires to be suita-
3. Insert the connector into the power ble for operation on the vehicle.
socket in the vehicle interior. Follow the tire chain manufacturer's in-
structions.
Do not initialize the Flat Tire Monitor after
mounting tire chains, as doing so may result
in incorrect readings.
Do not reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM
after mounting tire chains, as doing so may
result in incorrect readings.
When driving with tire chains, briefly acti-
vate Dynamic Traction Control DTC, if
4. Correct the tire inflation pressure to at needed.
least 2.0 bar.
– Increase tire inflation pressure: with Safety information
the ignition switched on or the en-
gine running, switch on the com- Warning
pressor.
With the mounting of tire chains on un-
– Reduce tire inflation pressure: press suitable tires, the tire chains can come
the button on the compressor. into contact with vehicle parts. There may
5. Unscrew the connection hose of the be a risk of accident or risk of damage to
compressor from the tire valve. property. Only mount tire chains on tires
6. Pull the connector out of the power that are designated by their manufacturer
socket in the vehicle interior. as suitable for the use of tire chains.
7. Stow the Mobility System in the vehicle.
Continuing the trip

Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
261
immediately when there is a loss of tire in-

Warning flation pressure due to a flat tire.
Insufficiently tight tire chains may dam- If needed, the tools for changing wheels are
age tires and vehicle components. There available as accessories from a dealer’s
may be a risk of accident or risk of damage service center or another qualified service
to property. Make sure that the tire chains center or repair shop.
are always sufficiently tight. Re-tighten as
needed according to the tire chain manu- Safety information
facturer's instructions.
DANGER
Fine-link tire chains The vehicle jack is only provided for short-
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- term lifting of the vehicle for wheel
mends the use of fine-link tire chains. Cer- changes. Even if all safety measures are
tain types of fine-link tire chains have been observed, there is a risk of the raised vehi-
tested by the manufacturer of the vehicle cle falling, if the vehicle jack tips over.
and recommended as road-safe and suitable. There is a risk of injuries or danger to life.
If the vehicle is raised, do not lie under the
Information regarding suitable tire chains is vehicle and do not start the engine.
available from a dealer’s service center or
shop.
DANGER
Use Supports such as wooden blocks under the
vehicle jack reduce the capacity of the ve-
Use only in pairs on the front wheels, equip-
hicle jack to bear weight. They have the
ped with the tires of the following size:
potential to exert too much strain on the
– 175/65 R 15. vehicle jack, causing it to tip over and the
– 175/60 R 16. vehicle to fall. There is a risk of injuries or
– 185/50 R 17. danger to life. Do not place supports under
the vehicle jack.
John Cooper Works:
185/50 R 17.
Warning
Maximum speed with tire chains
The jack, issued by the vehicle manufac-
Do not exceed a speed of 30 mph/50 km/h turer, is provided in order to perform a
when using tire chains. wheel change in the event of a breakdown.
The jack is not designed for frequent use;
for example, changing from summer to
Changing wheels/tires winter tires. Using the jack frequently may
cause it to become jammed or damaged.
General information There is a risk of injury and risk of damage
to property. Only use the jack to attach an
When using run-flat tires or a flat tire kit, a emergency or spare wheel in the event of
wheel does not always need to be changed a breakdown.
262
Securing the vehicle against rolling

Warning
On soft, uneven or slippery ground, for ex- General information
ample snow, ice, tiles, etc., the vehicle jack The vehicle manufacturer recommends to
can slip away. There is a risk of injury. If additionally secure the vehicle against roll-
possible, change the wheel on a flat, solid, ing away when changing a wheel.
and slip-resistant surface.
On a level surface
Warning
The vehicle jack is optimized for lifting
the vehicle and for the jacking points on
the vehicle only. There is a risk of injury.
Do not lift any other vehicle or cargo using
the vehicle jack.
Warning Place wheel chocks or other suitable objects

When the vehicle jack is not inserted into in front and behind the wheel that is diago-
the jacking point provided for this pur- nal to the wheel to be changed.
pose, the vehicle may be damaged or the
vehicle jack may slip when it is being
cranked up. There is a risk of injury or risk On a slight downhill gradient
of damage to property. When cranking up
the vehicle jack, ensure that it is inserted
in the jacking point next to the wheel
housing.
Warning
A vehicle that is raised on a vehicle jack
may fall off of the jack if lateral forces are
exerted on it. There is a risk of injury and If you need to change a wheel on a slight
risk of damage to property. While the ve- downhill grade, place chocks and other suit-
hicle is raised, do not exert lateral forces able objects, for instance rocks, under the
on the vehicle or pull abruptly on the vehi- wheels of both the front and rear axles
cle. Have a stuck wheel removed by a deal- against the rolling direction.
er’s service center or another qualified
Preparing the vehicle
– Park the vehicle on solid and non-slip
ground at a safe distance from traffic.
– Switch on the hazard warning system.
263
– Set the parking brake. 1. Hold the vehicle jack with one hand, ar-
– Engage a gear or move the selector lever row 1, and grasp the vehicle jack crank
to position P. or lever with your other hand, arrow 2.
– As soon as permitted by the traffic flow,
have all vehicle occupants get out of the
vehicle and ensure that they remain out-
such as behind a guardrail.
– Depending on the vehicle equipment,
get wheel change tools and, if necessary,
the emergency wheel from the vehicle.
or portable hazard warning light at an 2. Insert the vehicle jack into the rectan-
appropriate distance. gular recess of the jacking point closest
– Secure the vehicle additionally against to the wheel to be changed.
rolling.
– Loosen the lug bolts a half turn.
Jacking points for the vehicle jack
3. Extend the vehicle jack by turning the

vehicle jack crank or lever clockwise.
The jacking points for the vehicle jack are

located at the marked positions.
Jacking up the vehicle
Warning
Hands and fingers can be jammed when 4. Take your hand away from the vehicle
using the vehicle jack. There is a risk of jack as soon as the vehicle jack is under
injury. Comply with the described hand load and continue turning the vehicle
position and do not change this position jack crank or lever with one hand.
while using the vehicle jack.
264
5. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 4. Hand-tighten the remaining lug bolts
stands vertically and at a right angle be- and tighten all lug bolts well in a cross-
neath the jacking point. wise pattern.
5. Turn the vehicle jack crank counter-
clockwise to retract the vehicle jack and
lower the vehicle.
6. Remove the vehicle jack and stow it se-
curely.
After the wheel change

1. Tighten the lug bolts crosswise. The
tightening torque is 101 lbs ft/140 Nm.
6. Make sure that the vehicle jack foot 2. Stow the nonworking wheel in the cargo
stands vertically and perpendicularly be- area, if necessary.
neath the jacking point after extending
the vehicle jack. The nonworking wheel cannot be stored
under the cargo floor panel because of
its size.
3. Check tire inflation pressure at the next
opportunity and correct as needed.
4. Reinitialize the Flat Tire Monitor.
Reset the Tire Pressure Monitor TPM.
5. Check to make sure the lug bolts are
tight with a calibrated torque wrench.
6. Have the damaged tire replaced at the
7. Crank the vehicle up, until the vehicle nearest dealer's service center or an-
jack is with the entire surface on the other qualified service center or repair
ground and the relevant wheel is maxi- shop.
mum 1.2 inches/3 cm above ground.
Mounting a wheel Emergency wheel

Mount one emergency wheel only, as re-
quired. Concept
1. Unscrew the lug bolts. In the event of a flat tire, the emergency
2. Remove the wheel. wheel can be used in place of the wheel
with the defective tire. The emergency
3. Put the new wheel or emergency wheel wheel is only intended for temporary use
on and screw in at least two lug bolts in until the defective tire/wheel has been re-
a crosswise pattern until hand-tight. placed.
If non-original light-alloy wheels of the
vehicle manufacturer are mounted, the General information
accompanying lug bolts may have to be
used as well. Mount one emergency wheel only.
265
Also check the tire inflation pressure of the 3. Screw wheel lug wrench onto the thread
emergency wheel in the cargo area regu- and hold in place with one hand.
larly, and correct it as needed.
Safety information
Warning
The emergency wheel has particular di-
mensions. When driving with an emer-
gency wheel, changed driving properties
may occur, for instance reduced lane sta-
bility when braking, longer braking dis- 4. Unlock the locking hexagon of the emer-
tance, and changed self-steering proper- gency wheel well using the hexagon at-
ties in the limit area. There is a risk of tached to retaining plate.
accident. Drive moderately and do not ex-
ceed a speed of 50 mph/80 km/h.
Overview
The emergency wheel is housed in a well on
the underbody of the vehicle. The screw
connection of the emergency wheel is under
the cargo floor panel, on the floor of the
storage compartment for the onboard vehi-
cle tool kit. 5. Lower the emergency wheel with the
The wheel change tools are under the cargo wheel wrench.
floor panel. 6. Unscrewing the wheel wrench
7. Pull out the well with emergency wheel
Removing the emergency wheel under the vehicle toward the rear.
1. Loosen the nut using the wheel wrench 8. Remove the spacer and emergency
from the onboard vehicle tool kit. wheel from the well.
9. Stow the well and spacer in the vehicle.
Replacing the tires

1. Have the damaged tire replaced.
2. Replace the emergency wheel with the
new wheel.
Installing the emergency wheel

2. Remove the retaining plate. Have the emergency wheel installed back
into the vehicle by a dealer’s service center
266

shop.
267
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Engine compartment
Overview
1 Filler neck for washer fluid 4 Jump-starting, positive terminal

2 Vehicle identification number 5 Jump-starting, negative terminal
3 Oil filler neck 6 Coolant reservoir
268
Engine compartment MOBILITY
Hood
Warning
Safety information Body parts can be jammed when opening
and closing the hood. There is a risk of in-
jury. Make sure that the area of movement
Warning of the hood is clear during opening and
Improperly executed work in the engine closing.
compartment can damage vehicle compo-
nents and impair vehicle functions. There
is a risk of an accident and damage to NOTICE
property. Have work in the engine com- Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
partment performed by a dealer’s service the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
center or another qualified service center age to property, among other potential
or repair shop. damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
Warning hood.
The engine compartment accommodates
moving components. Certain components
in the engine compartment can also move NOTICE
with the vehicle switched off, for instance When the hood is closed, it must engage
the radiator fan. There is a risk of injury. on both sides. Pressing again can damage
Do not reach into the area of moving parts. the hood. There is a risk of damage to
Keep articles of clothing and hair away property, among other potential damage.
from moving parts. Open the hood again and then close it en-
ergetically. Avoid pressing again.
Warning
There are protruding parts, for instance Opening the hood
locking hook, on the inside of the hood. 1. Pull lever, arrow 1.
There is a risk of injury. If the hood is Hood is unlocked.
open, pay attention to protruding parts
and keep clear of these areas.
Warning
An incorrectly locked hood can open while
driving and restrict visibility. There is a
risk of accident. Stop immediately and cor-
rectly close the hood.
2. After the lever is released, pull the lever
again, arrow 2.
Hood can be opened.
269
MOBILITY Engine compartment
Indicator/warning lights
When the hood is opened, a Check Control
message is displayed.
Closing the hood
Energetically close the hood from approx.

20 in/50 cm.
The hood must engage on both sides.
270
Engine oil MOBILITY
Engine oil
Vehicle features and options Safety information
specific and optional features offered with NOTICE
the series. It also describes features and An engine oil level that is too low causes
functions that are not necessarily available engine damage. There is a risk of damage
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- to property, among other potential dam-
tions or country versions. This also applies age. Immediately add engine oil.
observed. NOTICE
Too much engine oil can damage the en-
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a
General information risk of damage to property, among other
potential damage. Do not add too much en-
gine oil. When too much engine oil is
The engine oil consumption is dependent on added, have the engine oil level corrected
your driving style and driving conditions. by a dealer’s service center or another
Therefore, regularly check the engine oil qualified service center or repair shop.
level after refueling by taking a detailed
measurement.
The engine oil consumption can increase in
the following situations, for instance: Electronic oil measurement
– Sporty driving style.
– Break-in of the engine. General information
– Idling of the engine. The electronic oil measurement has two
– With use of engine oil types that are measuring principles:
classified as not suitable. – Monitoring.
Different Check Control messages appear, – Detailed measurement.
depending on the engine oil level. When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, for in-
stance when taking curves aggressively,
regularly perform a detailed measurement.
271
MOBILITY Engine oil
Monitoring General information

During the measurement, the idle speed is
Concept increased somewhat.
The engine oil level is monitored electroni-
cally while driving and can be shown on the Functional requirements
Control Display. – Vehicle is parked in a horizontal posi-
If the engine oil level is outside its permis- tion.
sible operating range, a Check Control mes- – Manual transmission: shift lever in neu-
sage is displayed. tral position, clutch and accelerator ped-
A red indicator light indicates that als not depressed.
the engine oil pressure is too low. – Steptronic transmission: selector lever
in selector lever position N or P and ac-
celerator pedal not depressed.
Functional requirements – Engine is running and is at operating
A current measured value is available after temperature.
approx. 30 minutes of normal driving.
Performing a detailed measurement
Displaying the engine oil level Via the Central Information Display (CID):
1. "My MINI"
1. "My MINI"
2. "Vehicle status"
2. "Vehicle status"
4. "Measure engine oil level"
The engine oil level is displayed.
5. "Start measurement"
System limits The engine oil level is checked and dis-
played via a scale.
When making frequent short-distance trips
or using a dynamic driving style, it may not
be possible to calculate a measured value.
In this case, the measured value for the last, Adding engine oil
sufficiently long trip is displayed.
General information
Detailed measurement Only add engine oil when the message is
displayed in the instrument cluster. The
Concept quantity to be added is indicated in the
The engine oil level is checked when the ve- message displayed in the instrument clus-
hicle is stationary and displayed via a scale. ter.
If the engine oil level is outside its permis- Only add suitable types of engine oil, refer
sible operating range, a Check Control mes- to page 274.
sage is displayed. Safely park the vehicle and switch off the
ignition before adding engine oil.
Take care not to add too much engine oil.
272
Engine oil MOBILITY
Safety information Adding engine oil

1. Open the hood, refer to page 269.
Warning 2. Open the lid counterclockwise.
Operating materials, for instance oils,
greases, coolants, fuels, can contain harm-
ful ingredients. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Follow the instructions
on the containers. Avoid the contact of ar-
ticles of clothing, skin or eyes with operat-
ing materials. Do not refill operating mate-
rials into different bottles. Store operating
materials out of reach of children.
3. Add engine oil.

NOTICE 4. Close the lid.
An engine oil level that is too low causes
engine damage. There is a risk of damage
to property, among other potential dam- Engine oil types to add
age. Immediately add engine oil.
General information
The engine oil quality is critical for the life
NOTICE of the engine.
Too much engine oil can damage the en- Only add the types of engine oil which are
gine or the catalytic converter. There is a listed.
potential damage. Do not add too much en-
gine oil. When too much engine oil is
Safety information
added, have the engine oil level corrected
by a dealer’s service center or another NOTICE
qualified service center or repair shop. Oil additives can damage the engine.
Overview oil additives.
The oil filler neck is located in the engine
compartment, refer to page 268.
NOTICE
Incorrect engine oil can cause malfunc-
tions in the engine or damage it. There is a
potential damage. When selecting an en-
gine oil, make sure that the engine oil has
the correct oil rating.
273
MOBILITY Engine oil
Suitable engine oil types Engine oil change

Add engine oils that meet the following oil
rating standards:
Gasoline engine NOTICE
Engine oil that is not changed in timely
BMW Longlife-01 FE.
fashion can cause increased engine wear
BMW Longlife-14 FE+. and thus engine damage. There is a risk of
damage to property. It is recommended
BMW Longlife-17 FE+.
that you do not exceed the service inter-
vals indicated in the vehicle.
Alternative engine oil types
If an engine oil suitable for continuous use The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
is not available, up to 1 US quart/liter of an you have a dealer's service center or an-
engine oil with the following oil rating can other qualified service center or repair shop
be added: change the engine oil.
Oil rating
API SL.
API SM.
API SN.
Viscosity grades
When selecting an engine oil, make sure
that the engine oil belongs to one of the fol-
lowing viscosity grades:
Viscosity grades
SAE 0W-20.
SAE 0W-30.
More information about suitable oil ratings

and viscosity grades of engine oils can be
requested from a dealer’s service center or
shop.
274
Coolant MOBILITY
Coolant
Warning
This chapter describes all standard, country- Additives are harmful and incorrect addi-
specific and optional features offered with tives can damage the engine. There is a
the series. It also describes features and risk of injury and risk of damage to prop-
functions that are not necessarily available erty. Do not allow additives to come into
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- contact with skin, eyes or articles of cloth-
tions or country versions. This also applies ing. Use suitable additives only.
observed. Coolant level
Checking
General information There are yellow Min and Max marks in the
coolant reservoir.
Coolant consists of water and additives.
1. Let the engine cool.
Not all commercially available additives are
suitable for the vehicle. Do not mix addi- 2. Open the hood, refer to page 269.
tives of different colors. Observe the water - 3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
additive mixing ratio of 50:50. Information slightly counterclockwise to allow any
about suitable additives is available from a excess pressure to dissipate, then open
dealer’s service center or another qualified it.
Safety information
Warning
With the engine hot and the cooling sys-
tem open, coolant can escape and lead to
scalding. There is a risk of injury. Only 4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.
open the cooling system with the engine
cooled down.
275
MOBILITY Coolant
5. The coolant level is correct if it lies be- Disposal

tween the minimum and maximum
marks in the filler neck.
Comply with the relevant environ-
mental protection regulations when
disposing of coolant and coolant ad-
ditives.
6. Close the lid.
Adding coolant
1. Let the engine cool.
2. Open the hood, refer to page 269.
3. Turn the lid of the coolant reservoir
slightly counterclockwise to allow any
excess pressure to dissipate, then open
it.
4. Open the coolant reservoir lid.

5. If the coolant is low, slowly add coolant
up to the specified level; do not overfill.
6. Close the lid.
7. Have the cause of the coolant loss elimi-
nated as soon as possible.
276
Maintenance MOBILITY
Maintenance
Vehicle features and options General information
Information on service notifications, refer
This chapter describes all standard, country- to page 133, can be displayed on the Control
specific and optional features offered with Display.
functions that are not necessarily available Service data in the vehicle key
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- Information on the service notifications is
tions or country versions. This also applies continuously stored in the vehicle key. The
to safety-related functions and systems. service center can read this data out and
When using these functions and systems, suggest a maintenance scope for the vehi-
the applicable laws and regulations must be cle.
observed.
Therefore, hand the service advisor the ve-
hicle key with which the vehicle was driven
most recently.
MINI maintenance system
Storage periods
The maintenance system provides service
Storage periods during which the vehicle
notifications and thereby provides support
battery was disconnected are not taken into
in maintaining road safety and the opera-
account.
tional reliability of the vehicle.
If this occurs, have a dealer's service center
In some cases, scopes and intervals of the
maintenance system may vary according to
shop update the time-dependent mainte-
the country version. Replacement work,
nance procedures, such as checking brake
spare parts, fuels and lubricants, and wear
fluid and, if necessary, changing the engine
materials are calculated separately. Further
oil and the microfilter/activated-charcoal
information is available from a dealer's serv-
filter.
ice center or another qualified service cen-
ter or repair shop.
Maintenance Manual and
Condition Based Service CBS Service and Warranty Infor-
mation Booklet for US models
Concept and Warranty and Service
Sensors and special algorithms take into ac- Guide Booklet for Canadian
count the driving conditions of the vehicle.
CBS uses these to provide maintenance rec-
models
ommendations.
The system makes it possible to adapt the Please consult your Maintenance Manual
amount of maintenance corresponding to and Service and Warranty Information
your user profile. Booklet for US models and Warranty and
277
MOBILITY Maintenance
Service Guide Booklet for Canadian models Position

for additional information on the perform-
ance of service and maintenance work.
The manufacturer of your vehicle recom-
mends that maintenance and repair be per-
formed by a service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop. Records
of regular maintenance and repair work
should be retained.
Socket for OBD Onboard Diag- There is an OBD socket on the driver's side
for checking the primary components in the
nosis vehicle's emissions.
General information Emissions

Devices connected to the OBD socket trig-
ger the alarm system when the vehicle is – The warning light lights up:
locked. Remove any devices connected at Emissions are deteriorating.
the OBD socket before locking the vehicle. Have the vehicle checked as soon
as possible.
Safety information – The warning light flashes under certain
circumstances:
NOTICE This indicates that there is excessive
misfiring in the engine.
The socket for Onboard Diagnosis is an in-
tricate component intended to be used in Reduce the vehicle speed and have the
conjunction with specialized equipment to system checked immediately; otherwise,
check the vehicle’s primary emissions sys- serious engine misfiring within a brief
tem. Improper use of the socket for On- period can seriously damage emission
board Diagnosis, or contact with the control components, in particular the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis for other catalytic converter.
than its intended purpose, can cause vehi-
cle malfunctions and creates risks of per-
sonal and property damage. Given the fore-
going, the manufacture of your vehicle
strongly recommends that access to the
socket for Onboard Diagnosis be limited to
a dealer's service center or another quali-
fied service center or repair shop or other
persons that have the specialized training
and equipment for purposes of properly
utilizing the socket for Onboard Diagnosis.
278
Replacing components MOBILITY
Replacing components
Vehicle features and options Wiper blades
This chapter describes all standard, country- Safety information
functions that are not necessarily available NOTICE
in your vehicle, e.g., due to the selected op- The window may sustain damage if the
tions or country versions. This also applies wiper falls onto it without the wiper blade
to safety-related functions and systems. installed. There is a risk of damage to
When using these functions and systems, property, among other potential damage.
the applicable laws and regulations must be Hold the wiper firmly when changing the
observed. wiper blade. Do not fold or switch on the
wiper without a wiper blade installed.
Vehicle tool kit

NOTICE
Folded-away wipers can be jammed when
the hood is opened. There is a risk of dam-
age to property, among other potential
damage. Make sure that the wipers with
the wiper blades mounted are folded down
onto the windshield before opening the
hood.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the Replacing the front wiper blades
onboard vehicle tool kit is located on the 1. To change the wiper blades, fold up the
right side under the cargo floor panel or in a wiper arms.
bag on the right side of the cargo area. 2. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly.
After use, secure the bag with the onboard 3. Open the wiper blade lock, arrow.
vehicle tool kit on a lashing eye again.
279
MOBILITY Replacing components
4. Pull the wiper blade down out of the Light and bulb replacement
holder on the wiper arm, arrow 1.
General information
Lights and bulbs
Lights and bulbs make an essential contri-
bution to vehicle safety.
Except for the reversing light, all headlights
and lights are designed in LED technology.
The manufacturer of the vehicle recom-
5. Pull the wiper blade free from the holder mends that you have appropriate work per-
of the wiper arm, arrow 2. formed by a dealer’s service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
6. Insert and latch a new wiper blade in re- if you are unfamiliar with it or if it has not
verse order. been described here.
7. Fold down the wiper arm. A spare light box is available from a dealer's
Replacing the rear wiper blade center or repair shop.
1. Fold up and hold the wiper arm firmly. Follow the safety information, refer to
2. Turn the wiper blade all the way back. page 280.
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)

Some items of equipment use light-emitting
diodes installed behind a cover as a light
source. These light-emitting diodes are re-
lated to conventional lasers and are offi-
cially designated as Class 1 light-emitting
diodes.
Follow the safety information, refer to
page 280.
3. Push the wiper blade out of the fasten-
ing by continuing to turn it all the way. Safety information
4. Insert the new wiper blade by following
the steps in reverse order. The wiper Lights and bulbs
blade must engage audibly.
5. Fold down the wiper arm. Warning
Bulbs can get hot during operation. Con-
tact with the bulbs can cause burns. There
is a risk of injury. Only change bulbs after
they have cooled off.
280
Tail lights, bulb replacement

Warning
Work on switched-on lighting systems can Overview
cause short circuits. There is a risk of in-
jury or risk of damage to property. When All rear lights
working on the lighting system, switch off
the lights in question. If necessary, heed
the bulb manufacturer's instructions.
NOTICE
Dirty bulbs have a reduced service life.
among other potential damage. Do not
hold new bulbs with your bare hands. Use 1 Side tail lights
a clean cloth or something similar, or hold
the bulb by its base. 2 Rear fog light
3 License plate light
4 Center brake light
Light-emitting diodes (LEDs)
Side tail lights
Warning
Intensive brightness can irritate or dam-
age the retina of the eye. There is a risk of
injury. Do not look directly into the head-
lights or other light sources. Do not re-
move the LED covers.
Headlight glass
Condensation can form on the inside of the
headlight glass in cool or humid weather. 1 Tail lights
When driving with the lights switched on, 2 Turn signals/brake lights
the condensation evaporates after a short 3 Turn signals/brake lights
time. The headlight glass does not need to
4 Reversing lights
be changed.
If despite driving with the headlights
switched on, increasing humidity forms, for Side tail lights
instance water droplets in the light, have Follow the general instructions on lights
the headlights checked. and bulbs, refer to page 280.
Bulb, reversing lights: P21W.
281
1. Open the tailgate. Central brake light and license plate

lights
2. Remove left or right cover.
Follow the general instructions on lights
and bulbs, refer to page 280.
The lights feature LED technology. In the
case of a malfunction, contact a dealer's
Vehicle battery
3. Turn the bulb holder for the reversing
light, arrow, counterclockwise and re- General information
move it. The battery is maintenance-free.
More information about the battery can be
requested from a dealer's service center or
shop.
Safety information
DANGER
Contact with live components can lead to
4. Remove the bulb holder from the open- an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
ing. ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
5. Press the nonworking bulb gently into components that are under voltage.
the socket, turn counterclockwise and
remove.
Warning
Vehicle batteries that are not compatible
can damage vehicle systems and impair
vehicle functions. There is a risk of an ac-
cident and damage to property. Only vehi-
cle batteries that are compatible with your
vehicle type should be installed in your ve-
hicle. Information on compatible vehicle
batteries is available at your dealer’s serv-
ice center.
6. Proceed in the reverse order to insert
the new bulb and attach the bulb holder.
Make sure that the bulb holder engages
in all fasteners.
282
Register the battery to the vehicle Charging the battery

The manufacturer of the vehicle recom- Charge the battery only when the engine is
mends that you have a service center or an- off and via the starting aid terminals, refer
other qualified service center or repair shop to page 288, in the engine compartment.
register the vehicle battery to the vehicle
after the battery has been replaced. Once Power failure
the battery has been registered again, all After a power loss, some equipment needs
comfort features will be available without to be newly initialized or individual settings
restriction and any Check Control messages updated, for example:
displayed which relate to comfort features
will disappear. – Memory function: store the positions
again.
Charging the battery – Time: update.
– Date: update.
General information – Glass sunroof: initialize the system.
Make sure that the battery is always suffi-
ciently charged to guarantee that the bat- Disposing of old batteries
tery remains usable for its full service life.
Have old batteries disposed of by a
A discharged battery is indicated by dealer’s service center or another
a red indicator light. qualified service center or repair
shop or take them to a collection point.
Charge the battery when acceleration is in- Maintain the filled battery in an upright po-
sufficient. sition for transport and storage. Secure the
The following circumstances can have a battery so that it does not tip over during
negative effect on the performance of the transport.
battery:
– Frequent short-distance drives.
– The vehicle is not used for more than a Fuses
month.
Safety information Safety information
NOTICE Warning
Battery chargers for the vehicle battery Incorrect and repaired fuses can overload
can work with high voltages and currents, electrical lines and components. There is a
which means that the 12 volt electrical risk of fire. Never attempt to repair a
system can be overloaded or damaged. blown fuse. Do not replace a nonworking
There is a risk of damage to property, fuse with a substitute of another color or
among other potential damage. Only con- amperage rating.
nect battery chargers for the vehicle bat-
tery to the starting aid terminals in the en-
gine compartment.
283
Accessing the fuses

The fuses are located in the glove compart-
ment.
1. Open the glove compartment.
2. Swing the cover down, arrow.
Information on the fuse types and locations,

as well as the positions of any other fuse
boxes, is available on the Internet:
www.mini.com/fusecard.
Where applicable, information on the fuse
types and locations is also found on a sepa-
rate sheet in the fuse box.
Replacing fuses
The vehicle manufacturer recommends that
you have a dealer's service center or an-
other qualified service center or repair shop
replace the fuses.
284
Breakdown assistance MOBILITY
Breakdown assistance
Vehicle features and options Warning triangle
observed. The warning triangle is located in the tail-
gate. To remove, loosen the brackets.
Hazard warning flashers
First-aid kit
General information
Some of the articles have a limited service
life.
Check the expiration dates of the contents
regularly and replace any expired items
promptly.
The button is located above the Control Dis- Storage
play.
Storage for the first-aid kit is provided in
The red light in the button flashes when the the cargo area.
hazard warning flashers are activated.
MINI Roadside Assistance

Concept
MINI Roadside Assistance can be contacted
if assistance is needed in the event of a
breakdown.
285
MOBILITY Breakdown assistance
General information You can launch Teleservice Help by re-

In the event of a breakdown, data on the ve- questing it through the Service Specialist.
hicle's condition is sent to the vehicle man- 1. Park the vehicle in a safe place.
ufacturer.
2. Set the parking brake.
There are various ways of making contact.
3. Control Display is switched on.
– Via a Check Control message, refer to
page 126. 4. Confirm Teleservice Help.
– Calling with a mobile phone. The driving ability of the vehicle can be re-
stored for specific functions.
Requirements If this is not possible, further measures will
be initiated, for instance Roadside Assis-
– Active MINI Connected contract or
tance will be informed.
equipment version with intelligent
emergency call.
– Cellular network reception. Emergency Call
– The ignition is switched on.
Starting Intelligent emergency call

If the vehicle is equipped with Teleservices, Concept
support is offered through Teleservice Diag-
nosis. In case of an emergency, an emergency call
can be triggered automatically by the sys-
Via the Central Information Display (CID): tem or manually.
1. "MINI Connected"
General information
2. "MINI Assist"
Only press the SOS button in an emergency.
3. "MINI Roadside Assistance"
The Intelligent Assist system establishes a
The contact to the Roadside Assistance connection with the MINI Response Center.
of the manufacture is established.
For technical reasons, the Emergency Call
A telephone number is displayed, if cannot be guaranteed under unfavorable
needed. Select to dial the telephone conditions.
number on a connected mobile phone.
Teleservice Diagnosis
Teleservice Diagnosis enables the wireless
transmission of detailed vehicle data that is
important for vehicle diagnosis. This data is
transmitted automatically.
Teleservice Help
Depending on the country, the Teleservice
Help enables a more in-depth diagnosis of
the vehicle via wireless transmission.
286
Overview The MINI Response Center then makes

contact with you and takes further steps
to help you.
Even if you are unable to respond, the
MINI Response Center can take further
steps to help you under certain circum-
stances.
For this purpose, data that serves to de-
termine the necessary rescue measures,
for instance the current position of the
vehicle when it can be determined, is
SOS button in the roofliner
transmitted to the MINI Response Cen-
ter.
Functional requirements If you can no longer hear the MINI Re-
– The ignition is switched on. sponse Center through the loudspeakers,
– The Assist system is functional. the hands-free system, for instance, may
be broken. However, the MINI Response
– If the vehicle is equipped with intelli- Center may still be able to hear you.
gent emergency call: the SIM card
integrated in the vehicle has been acti- The MINI Response Center ends the emer-
vated. gency call.
Automatic triggering
Under certain conditions, for instance if the
Jump-starting
airbags trigger, an emergency call is auto-
matically initiated immediately after an ac- General information
cident of corresponding severity. Automatic If the battery is discharged, the engine can
Collision Notification is not affected by be started using the battery of another vehi-
pressing the SOS button. cle and two jumper cables. Only use jumper
cables with fully insulated clamp handles.
Manual triggering
1. Press the cover briefly to open it. Safety Instructions
2. Press the SOS button until the LED at
the button lights up green. DANGER
– The LED is illuminated green when an Contact with live components can lead to
emergency call has been initiated. an electric shock. There is a risk of inju-
If the situation allows, wait in your vehi- ries or danger to life. Do not touch any
cle until the voice connection has been components that are under voltage.
established.
– The LED flashes green when a connec-
tion to the MINI Response Center has
been established.
287
1. Pull off the lid of the starting aid termi-

Warning nal.
If the jumper cables are connected in the 2. Attach one terminal clamp of the posi-
incorrect order, sparking may occur. There tive jumper cable to the positive battery
is a risk of injury. Pay attention to the cor- terminal, or to the corresponding start-
rect order during connection. ing aid terminal of the vehicle providing
assistance.
3. Attach the terminal clamp on the other
NOTICE end of the cable to the positive battery
In the case of body contact between the terminal, or to the corresponding start-
two vehicles, a short circuit can occur during aid terminal of the vehicle to be
ing jump-starting. There is a risk of dam- started.
age to property, among other potential 4. Attach one terminal clamp of the nega-
damage. Make sure that no body contact tive jumper cable to the negative bat-
occurs. tery terminal, or to the corresponding
engine or body ground of assisting vehi-
cle.
Preparation
5. Attach the second terminal clamp to the
1. Check whether the battery of the other negative battery terminal, or to the cor-
vehicle has a voltage of 12 volts. The responding engine or body ground of
voltage information can be found on the the vehicle to be started.
battery.
2. Switch off the engine of the assisting Starting the engine
vehicle.
Never use spray fluids to start the engine.
3. Switch off any electrical components in
both vehicles. 1. Start the engine of the assisting vehicle
and let it run for several minutes at an
Starting aid terminals increased idle speed.
The starting aid terminal in the engine com- 2. Start the engine of the vehicle that is to
partment, refer to page 268, acts as the pos- be started in the usual way.
itive battery terminal. If the first starting attempt is not suc-
Open the cover of the starting aid terminal. cessful, wait a few minutes before mak-
ing another attempt in order to allow the
The body ground or a special connection on discharged battery to recharge.
the body in the engine compartment, refer
to page 268, acts as the negative battery 3. Let both engines run for several mi-
terminal. nutes.
4. Disconnect the jumper cables in the re-
Connecting the cables verse order.
To prevent personal injury or damage to Check the battery and recharge, if needed.
both vehicles, adhere strictly to the follow-
ing procedure.
288
Tow-starting and towing Pushing the vehicle

To remove a broken-down vehicle from the
Safety information danger area, it can be pushed for a short
distance.
For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
Warning page 118.
Due to system limits, individual functions
can malfunction during tow-starting/ Tow truck
Steptronic transmission with

driven front axle: transporting the
vehicle
General information Your vehicle should be transported with a
tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a
The vehicle must not be towed if the front flat bed.
wheels are touching the ground.
Safety information Manual transmission

Towing or pushing the vehicle
NOTICE
A broken-down vehicle can be towed or
The vehicle can be damaged when towing
pushed.
the vehicle with a lifted rear axle. There is
a risk of damage to property, among other For rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
potential damage. Have vehicle trans- page 116.
ported only with lifted front axle or on a
loading platform. NOTICE
If manual unlocking of the parking brake
is not possible, the vehicle cannot be
NOTICE moved or towed. There is a risk of damage
The vehicle can become damaged when to property, among other potential dam-
lifting and securing it. age. The vehicle should only be trans-
There is a risk of damage to property, ported on a loading platform.
among other potential damage.
Follow the following instructions:
– Lift the vehicle using suitable means.
– Make sure that the ignition is switched
– Do not lift or secure the vehicle by its
on; otherwise, the low beams, tail lights,
tow fitting, body parts, or suspension
turn signals, and wipers may be unavail-
parts.
able.
289
– Do not tow the vehicle with the rear a sign or a warning triangle in the rear win-
axle tilted, as the front wheels could dow.
turn.
– When the engine is stopped, there is no Safety information
power assist. Consequently, more force
needs to be applied when braking and Warning
steering.
If the approved gross vehicle weight of the
– Larger steering wheel movements are towing vehicle is lighter than the vehicle
required. to be towed, the tow fitting can tear off or
– The towing vehicle must not be lighter it will not be possible to control the vehi-
than the vehicle being towed; otherwise, cle's response. There is a risk of accident.
it will not be possible to control the ve- Make sure that the gross vehicle weight of
hicle's response. the towing vehicle is heavier than the ve-
– Do not exceed a towing speed of hicle to be towed.
30 mph/50 km/h.
– Do not exceed a towing distance of
30 miles/50 km. NOTICE
If the tow bar or tow rope is attached in-
Tow truck correctly, damage to other vehicle parts
can occur. There is a risk of damage to
With driven front axle property, among other potential damage.
Correctly attach the tow bar or tow rope to
the tow fitting.
Tow bar
The tow fittings used should be on the same
side on both vehicles.
Should it prove impossible to avoid mount-
ing the tow bar at an offset angle, please fol-
low the following:
Your vehicle should be transported with a
tow truck with a so-called lift bar or on a – Maneuvering capability is limited going
flat bed. around corners.
– The tow bar will generate lateral forces
if it is secured with an offset.
Towing other vehicles
Tow rope
General information
Observe the following notes when using the
Switch on the hazard warning system, de- tow rope:
pending on local regulations.
– Use nylon ropes or straps, which will en-
If the electrical system has failed, clearly able the vehicle to be towed without
identify the vehicle being towed by placing jerking.
290
– Make sure the tow rope is not twisted Safety information

when fastening.
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting NOTICE
and tow rope in regular intervals.
If the tow fitting is not used as intended,
– Do not exceed a towing speed of there may be damage to the vehicle or to
30 mph/50 km/h. the tow fitting. There is a risk of damage
– Do not exceed a towing distance of to property, among other potential dam-
3 miles/5 km. age. Follow the notes on using the tow fit-
– When starting to tow the vehicle, make ting.
sure that the tow rope is taut.
Tow fitting Screw thread for tow fitting
General information
Threaded holes for the tow fitting are lo-

cated in the front and rear of the vehicle on
the right side with respect to the direction
The screw-in tow fitting should always be
of travel.
carried in the vehicle.
Press on the mark on the edge of the cover
The tow fitting can be screwed in at the
to push it out.
front or rear of the vehicle.
The tow fitting and the onboard vehicle tool Tow-starting
kit, refer to page 279, are together in the
cargo area.
Steptronic transmission
Use of the tow fitting:
Do not tow-start the vehicle.
– Use only the tow fitting provided with
Tow-starting the engine is not possible due
the vehicle and screw it all the way in.
to the Steptronic transmission.
– Use the tow fitting for towing on paved
Have the reasons for the starting difficulties
roads only.
corrected by a dealer’s service center or an-
– Avoid lateral loading of the tow fitting, other qualified service center or repair
for instance do not lift the vehicle by the shop.
tow fitting.
– Check the fastening of the tow fitting in Manual transmission
regular intervals. If possible, do not tow-start the vehicle but
start the engine by jump-starting, refer to
page 287. If the vehicle is equipped with a
291
catalytic converter, only tow-start while the

engine is cold.
1. Switch on the hazard warning system
and comply with local regulations.
2. Switch on the ignition, refer to page 98.
3. Engage third gear.
4. Have the vehicle tow-started with the
clutch pedal pressed and slowly release
the pedal. After the engine starts, imme-
diately press on the clutch pedal again.
5. Stop at a suitable location, remove the
tow bar or tow cable, and switch off the
hazard warning system.
6. Have the vehicle checked by a dealer's
service center or another qualified serv-
292
Care MOBILITY
Care
Vehicle features and options Distances and temperature
– Maximum temperature: 140 ℉/60 ℃.
This chapter describes all standard, country- – Minimum distance from sensors, cam-
specific and optional features offered with eras, seals: 12 inches/30 cm.
the series. It also describes features and – Minimum distance from glass sunroof:
functions that are not necessarily available 31.5 in/80 cm.
tions or country versions. This also applies Automatic washing systems or car
When using these functions and systems, washes
observed. Safety information
NOTICE
Washing the vehicle Using a car wash with high pressure wash-
ers may result in water penetration of win-
General information dow areas. There is a risk of damage to
Regularly remove foreign objects such as property, among other potential damage.
leaves in the area below the windshield Do not drive into high-pressure car wash
when the hood is raised. systems.
Wash your vehicle frequently, particularly
in winter. Intense soiling and road salt can
damage the vehicle. NOTICE
Improper use of automatic washing sys-
Steam jets or high-pressure tems or car washes can cause damage to
washers the vehicle. There is a risk of damage to
Follow the following instructions:
Safety information
– Give preference to cloth car washes
or those that use soft brushes in or-
NOTICE der to avoid paint damage.
When cleaning with high-pressure wash- – Do not drive through a car wash with
ers, components can be damaged due to guide rails higher than 4 in/10 cm to
the pressure or temperatures being too avoid damage to the chassis.
high. There is a risk of damage to property, – Observe the tire width of the guide
among other potential damage. Maintain rail to avoid damage to tires and rims.
sufficient distance and do not spray too
long continuously. Follow the operating – Fold in exterior mirrors to avoid dam-
instructions for the high-pressure washer. age to the exterior mirrors.
293
MOBILITY Care
– Unscrew the rod antenna to avoid the during braking dries brake discs and brake
rod antenna breaking off. pads and protects them against corrosion.
– Deactivate the wiper and, if neces- Completely remove all residues on the win-
sary, rain sensor to avoid damage to dows, to minimize loss of visibility due to
the wiper system. smearing and to reduce wiper noises and
wiper blade wear.
Driving into a car wash with a manual
transmission
Vehicle care
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to
roll freely.
Vehicle care products
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 116.
General information
Driving into a car wash with a MINI recommends using vehicle care and
Steptronic transmission cleaning products from MINI. Suitable care
products are available from a dealer’s serv-
In car washes, the vehicle must be able to ice center or another qualified service cen-
roll freely. ter or repair shop.
Rolling or pushing the vehicle, refer to
page 118. Safety information
Some car washes do not permit persons in
the vehicle. The vehicle cannot be locked
Warning
from the outside when in selector lever po-
sition N. A signal is sounded when an at- Cleansers can contain substances that are
tempt is made to lock the vehicle. dangerous and harmful to your health.
There is a risk of injury. When cleaning
Driving out of a car wash the interior, open the doors or windows.
Only use products intended for cleaning
Ensure that the vehicle key is in the car. vehicles. Follow the instructions on the
Start the engine, refer to page 99. container.
Headlights
Do not rub wet headlights dry and do not Vehicle paint
use abrasive or acidic cleaning agents.
General information
Soak areas that have been dirtied, for in-
stance from insects, with shampoo and Regular care contributes to driving safety
wash off with water. and value retention. Environmental influen-
ces in areas with elevated air pollution or
Thaw ice with de-icing spray; do not use an natural contaminants, such as tree resin or
ice scraper. pollen can affect the vehicle's paintwork.
Tailor the frequency and extent of your ve-
After washing the vehicle hicle care to these influences.
After washing the vehicle, apply the brakes Corrosive substances such as spilled fuel,
briefly to dry them; otherwise, braking ac- oil, grease or bird droppings, must be re-
tion can be reduced. The heat generated
294
Care MOBILITY
moved immediately to prevent the finish Safety information

from being altered or discolored.
Matte finish NOTICE

Open Velcro® fasteners on articles of
Only use cleaning and care products suita-
clothing can damage the seat covers.
ble for vehicles with matte finish.
among other potential damage. Ensure
Leather care that any Velcro® fasteners are closed.
Remove dust from the leather regularly, us-
ing a cloth or vacuum cleaner.
Otherwise, particles of dust and road grime Caring for special components
chafe in pores and folds, and lead to in-
creased wear and premature degradation of Light-alloy wheels
the leather surface. When cleaning the vehicle, use only neutral
To guard against discoloration, such as from wheel cleaners having a pH value from 5 to
clothing, clean leather and provide leather 9. Do not use abrasive cleaning agents or
care roughly every two months. steam jets above 140 ℉/60 ℃. Follow the
Clean light-colored leather more frequently manufacturer's instructions.
because soiling on such surfaces is substan- Aggressive, acidic or alkaline cleaning
tially more visible. agents can destroy the protective layer of
Use leather care products; otherwise, dirt adjacent components, such as the brake
and grease will gradually break down the disc.
protective layer of the leather surface. After cleaning, apply the brakes shortly to
dry them. The heat generated during brak-
Upholstery material care ing dries brake discs and brake pads and
protects them against corrosion.
General information
Chrome surfaces
Vacuum the upholstery regularly with a
vacuum cleaner. Carefully clean components such as the ra-
diator grille or door handles with plenty of
If upholstery is very dirty, for instance with water, if necessary, with shampoo added,
beverage stains, use a soft sponge or micro- particularly when they have been exposed
fiber cloth with a suitable interior cleaner. to road salt.
Clean the upholstery down to the seams us-
ing large sweeping motions. Avoid rubbing Rubber components
the material vigorously.
Environmental influences can cause surface
soiling of rubber parts and a loss of gloss.
Use only water and suitable cleaning agents
for cleaning.
Treat especially worn rubber parts with rub-
ber care agents at regular intervals. When
cleaning rubber seals, do not use any sili-
295
MOBILITY Care
con-containing vehicle care products in or- Carpets and floor mats

der to avoid damage or noises.
Fine wood parts Warning

Objects in the driver's floor area can limit
Clean fine wood facing and fine wood com-
the pedal distance or block a depressed
ponents only with a moist rag. Then dry
pedal. There is a risk of accident. Stow ob-
with a soft cloth.
jects in the vehicle such that they are se-
cured and cannot enter into the driver's
Plastic components floor area. Use floor mats that are suitable
for the vehicle and can be safely attached
NOTICE to the floor. Do not use loose floor mats
Cleaning agents that contain alcohol or and do not layer several floor mats. Make
solvents, such as lacquer thinners, heavy- sure that there is sufficient clearance for
duty grease removers, fuel and such, can the pedals. Ensure that the floor mats are
damage plastic parts. There is a risk of securely fastened again after they were re-
damage to property, among other potential moved, for instance for cleaning.
damage. Clean with a microfiber cloth.
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if Floor mats can be removed from the car's
needed. interior for cleaning.
If the floor carpets are very dirty, clean with
Clean with a microfiber cloth. a microfiber cloth and water or a textile
Dampen the cloth lightly with water, if cleaner. To prevent matting of the carpet,
needed. rub back and forth in the direction of travel
only.
Do not soak the roofliner.
Sensor/camera lenses
Safety belts
To clean sensors and camera lenses, use a
cloth moistened with a small amount of
Warning glass detergent.
Chemical cleansers can destroy the safety
belt webbing. Missing protective effect of Displays/Screens/Projection lenses
the safety belts. There is a risk of injuries
or danger to life. Use only a mild soapy sol- NOTICE
ution for cleaning the safety belts.
Chemical cleaning agents, moisture or flu-
Dirty belt straps impede the reeling action ids of any kind can damage the surface of
and thus have a negative impact on safety. displays and screens. There is a risk of
Use only a mild soapy solution, with the damage. Clean with a clean, antistatic mi-
safety belts clipped into their buckles. crofiber cloth.
Safety belts should only be allowed to re-
tract if they are dry.
296
Care MOBILITY
NOTICE
The surface of displays can be damaged
with improper cleaning. There is a risk of
damage. Avoid pressure that is too high
and do not use any scratching materials.
Clean with a clean, antistatic microfiber

cloth.
For stubborn soiling on the projection lens
of the Head-up Display, dampen the micro-
fiber cloth with alcohol. Projection lens, re-
fer to page 141.
Long-term vehicle storage

When the vehicle is shut down for longer
than three months, special measures must
be taken. Further information is available
from a dealer's service center or another
297
REFERENCE Technical data
Technical data
General information
The technical data and specifications in the values can be found in the approval docu-
Owner's Manual are used as guidance val- ments, on labels on the vehicle or can be ob-
ues. The vehicle-specific data can deviate tained from a dealer’s service center or an-
from this, for instance due to the selected other qualified service center or repair
special equipment, country version or coun- shop.
try-specific measurement method. Detailed
Dimensions
The dimensions can vary depending on the tenna, roof racks or spoiler. The heights can
model version, equipment or country-spe- deviate, for instance due to the selected
cific measurement method. special equipment, tires, load and chassis
The specified heights do not take into ac- version.
count attached parts, for instance a roof an-
MINI 3-door
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 55.7/1,414
Length in/mm 152.8/3,880
Wheelbase in/mm 98.2/2,495
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 35.4/10.8
298
Technical data REFERENCE
MINI 5-door
Width with mirrors in/mm 75.9/1,928
Width without mirrors in/mm 68/1,727
Height in/mm 56.1/1,425
Length in/mm 159.1/4,040
Wheelbase in/mm 101.1/2,567
Smallest turning radius diam. ft/m 36.4/11.1
Weights
MINI Cooper, 3-door

Approved gross vehicle weight
Manual transmission lbs/kg 3,505/1,590
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 3,549/1,610
Load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 697/316
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 694/315
Approved front axle load
Manual transmission lbs/kg 1,973/895
Steptronic transmission lbs/kg 2,028/920
Approved rear axle load
MINI Cooper, 5-door

Load
299
REFERENCE Technical data
MINI Cooper, 5-door

MINI Cooper S, 3-door

Load

Load
300
Technical data REFERENCE

MINI John Cooper Works, 3-door

Load
Capacities
MINI
Fuel tank, approx. US gal/liters 11.6/44.0
Observe further information on fuel quality,

refer to page 244.
301
REFERENCE Appendix
Appendix
Any updates to the Owner's Manual of the
vehicle are listed here.
Updates made after the edito-

rial deadline
The following chapters were updated in the
printed version of the Owner's Manual after
the editorial deadline for the Integrated
Owner's Manual in the vehicle had closed:
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: safety Instructions.
– Operation: opening and closing: vehicle
key: change battery: note.
– Operation: seats, mirrors and steering
wheel: seats and head restraints: safety
belts: general.
In contrast to the description in the
Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehicle,
the MINI FindMate equipment is not availa-
ble.
302
Appendix REFERENCE
303
REFERENCE Everything from A to Z
Everything from A to Z
Index
A Arrival time 138
Ash tray 214
ABS Antilock Braking System 175 Assistance when driving off, see Drive-off
Acceleration Assistant, see Launch Con- assistant 178
trol 121 Assistance with breakdown 285
Accessories and parts 8 Audio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
ACC, see Camera-based cruise control 179 Entertainment and Communication 6
Activated charcoal filter 206 Automatic car wash 293
Activation times, parked-car ventila- Automatic climate control 203
tion 207 Automatic Curb Monitor, exterior mir-
Active Cruise Control, see Camera-based ror 90
cruise control 179 Automatic deactivation, front-seat passen-
Active Guard, see Intelligent Safety 162 ger airbags 153
Adaptive chassis 177 Automatic headlight control 146
Additives, engine oil types 273 Automatic locking 74
Adjusting menu contents, Central Informa- Automatic transmission, see Steptronic
tion Display (CID) 40 transmission 116
Adjustments, steering wheel 91 Automatic unlocking 75
Airbags 151 AUTO program, automatic climate con-
Airbags, indicator and warning light 153 trol 205
Air circulation, see Recirculated-air AUTO program, intensity 205
mode 202, 205 Auto Start/Stop function 101
Air conditioner 201 Average consumption 137
air conditioning, climate 204 Average speed 137
Air distribution, manual 202, 206 Axle loads, approved 299
Air drying, see air conditioning 204
Air flow, air conditioner 202 B
Air flow, automatic climate control 205
Air outlets, see Ventilation 206 Backrest curvature, see Lumbar support 83
Air pressure, tires 246 Backrest, seats 82
Alarm system 75 Bad weather light 148
Alarm triggering 75 Battery, disposing of 283
Alarm, unintentional 77 Battery, vehicle 282
All-season tires, see Winter tires 256 Being towed, see Tow-starting and tow-
Amazon Alexa Car Integration 46 ing 289
Antifreeze, see Washer fluid 114 Belts, see Safety belts 85
Antilock Braking System ABS 175 Beverage holder, see Cup holders 222
Anti-slip control, see DSC 175 Blocking, power window, see Safety
Apps, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- switch 79
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Bluetooth connection 53
304
Everything from A to Z REFERENCE
Bonus range, GREEN Mode 238 Cell phone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga-
Bottle holder, see Cup holders 222 tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Brake assistant 175 Center armrest 221
Brake discs, break-in 230 Center console 34
Brake pads, break-in 230 Central Information Display (CID) 36
Braking, information 232 Central Information Display (CID), see Con-
Breakdown assistance 285 trol Display 38
Breaking in 230 Central instrument cluster, LED ring 140
Brightness, Control Display 49 Central locking system, unlocking, from in-
Bulb replacement 280 side 68
Bulb replacement, rear 281 Central screen, see Control Display 38
Bulbs and lights 280 Changes, technical, see For Your Own
Buttons on the steering wheel 32 Safety 7
Button, SOS 286 Changing parts 279
Button, Start/Stop 98 Changing wheels 262
Bypassing, see Jump-starting 287 Changing, wheels and tires 255
Charging smartphone, see Wireless charg-
C ing tray 216
Charging tray for smartphones, see Wire-
California Proposition 65 Warning 8 less charging tray 216
Camera-based assistance systems, see Intel- Chassis number, see Vehicle identification
ligent Safety 162 number 13
Camera-based cruise control 179 Check Control 126
Camera lenses, care 296 Check engine oil level 271
Camera, rearview camera 192 Checking the engine oil level electroni-
Can holder, see Cup holders 222 cally 271
Care 293 Checking the oil level electronically 271
Care, light-alloy wheels 295 Children, seating position 92
Care of displays, screens 296 Children, transporting safely 92
Care, vehicle 294 Child restraint system 92
Cargo area 224 Child restraint system LATCH 95
Cargo area, adapting size 228 Child restraint systems, mounting 93
Cargo area, enlarging 226 Child safety locks 97
Cargo area lid 70 Child seat, mounting 93
Cargo area, storage compartments 226 Child seats 92
Cargo cover 226 Chrome parts, care 295
Cargo position, rear seat backrest 226 Cigarette lighter 214
Cargo, stowing and securing 224 Cleaning displays, screens 296
Cargo straps 225 Clearance, water 232
Carpet, care 296 Climate control 201, 203
Car wash 293 Clothes hooks 222
Car wash, automatic 293 Coasting 239
Catalytic converter, see Hot exhaust gas Coasting with engine decoupled, see Coast-
system 231 ing 239
CBS Condition Based Service 277 Coasting with idling engine 239
Combination switch, see Turn signals 106
305
Combination switch, see Washer/wiper sys- Current consumption 132

tem 107, 111 Customer service, see Owner's Manual for
Comfort Access 68 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Comfort entry 63 tion 6
Compartments in the doors 221
Compass 212 D
Compatible devices, see Suitable devi-
ces 53 Damage, tires 254
Computer, see Trip computer 136 Dashboard 32, 214
Condensation on windows 203, 206 Data memory 10
Condensation under the vehicle 233 Data protection, settings 51
Condition Based Service CBS 277 Data, see Deleting personal data 51
Configuring driving program 178 Data, technical 298
Confirmation signal 75 Date 48
Connect device 52 Date, display 132
Connecting electrical devices, see Sock- Daytime running lights 147
ets 215 DCC, see Cruise control 186
Connections 52 Decorative trim 214
Consumption, see Average consump- Defrosting, see Windows, defrost-
tion 137 ing 203, 206
Consumption, see Current consump- Deleting personal data 51
tion 132 Departure schedule, see Pre-ventila-
Contacts, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tion 207
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Destination distance 138
Continued driving with a flat tire 158, 161 Device list 52
Control Display 38 Digital clock 132
Control Display, brightness 49 Digital compass 212
Controller 39 Dimensions 298
Control systems, driving stability 175 Dimmable exterior mirrors 90
Convenient closing, vehicle key 64 Dimmable interior mirror 91
Convenient opening, vehicle key 63 Direction indicator, see Turn signals 106
Cooling, maximum 204 Display, date 132
Cornering light 147 Display, electronic, instrument clus-
Corrosion on brake discs 233 ter 125, 126
Cosmetic mirror 214 Display, engine temperature 138
Coupling, see Pairing 52 Display, GREEN Mode 236
Courtesy lights during unlocking 63 Display, iDrive 36
Courtesy lights with the vehicle locked 64 Display lighting, see Instrument light-
Cruise control 186 ing 149
Cruise control, active 179 Displays 123
Cruise control with distance control, see Disposal, coolant 276
Camera-based cruise control 179 Disposal, vehicle battery 283
Cruise control without distance control, see Distance control, see PDC 189
Cruise control 186 Distance to destination 138
Cruising range 132 Divided screen view, split screen 38
Cup holder 222 Drive-off assistant 178
306
Drive-off assistant, see DSC 175 Emergency service, see MINI Roadside As-
Driver assistance, see Intelligent sistance 285
Safety 162 Emergency unlocking, fuel filler flap 243
Driver profiles 71 Emergency unlocking, transmission
Driver profiles, exporting profiles 73 lock 120
Driver profiles, importing profiles 73 Emergency wheel, compact wheel, see
Driving Dynamics Control, see MINI Driv- Emergency wheel 265
ing Modes switch 177 Energy control 132
Driving Excitement, SPORT 139 Engine, automatic Start/Stop function 101
Driving instructions, breaking in 230 Engine compartment 268
Driving mode, GREEN 236 Engine coolant 275
Driving mode, GREEN Driving style analy- Engine idling when driving, see Coast-
sis 241 ing 239
Driving modes 177 Engine oil 271
Driving notes, general 231 Engine oil, adding 272
Driving notes, things to remember when Engine oil change 274
driving 230 Engine oil filler neck 272
Driving on racetracks 234 Engine oil types to add 273
Driving stability control systems 175 Engine start, see Jump-starting 287
Driving, Start/Stop button 98 Engine start, see Starting the engine 99
Driving style analysis 241 Engine stop 100
Driving through water 232 Engine temperature, display 138
Driving tip, GREEN tip 238 Entering a destination, see Owner's Hand-
Driving tips 231 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
DSC Dynamic Stability Control 175 munication 6
DTC Dynamic Traction Control 176 Entering an address, navigation, see Own-
DVD, video, see Owner's Handbook for Nav- er's Manual for Navigation, Entertainment
igation, Entertainment, Communication 6 and Communication 6
Dynamic damping, see Adaptive chas- Entertainment, see Owner's Manual for Nav-
sis 177 igation, Entertainment and Communica-
Dynamic Stability Control DSC 175 tion 6
Dynamic Traction Control DTC 176 Equipment, interior 209
Error displays, see Check Control 126
E ESP Electronic Stability Program, see
DSC 175
Electronic displays, instrument clus- Exchanging, wheels and tires 255
ter 125, 126 Exhaust gas system 231
Electronic oil measurement 271 Exhaustion warner 173
Electronic Stability Program ESP, see Exhaust, see Exhaust gas system 231
DSC 175 Exterior mirror, Automatic Curb Moni-
E-mail, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga- tor 90
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Exterior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
Emergency braking, see PostCrash - ture 90
iBrake 174 Exterior mirrors 89
Emergency Request 286 Exterior mirrors, malfunction 90
External start, see Jump-starting 287
307
External temperature display 131 Fuel recommendation 244

External temperature warning 131 Fuel tank, see Filling capacity 301
Eyes for securing cargo 225 Fuse 283
F G
Failure message, see Check Control 126 Garage door opener, see Integrated Univer-
False alarm, see Avoiding unintentional sal Remote Control 209
alarms 77 Gasoline 244
Fan, see Air flow 202, 205 Gear shift indicator 134
Fastening safety belts, see Safety belts 85 General driving notes 231
Fatigue alert 173 General settings 48
Filler neck for engine oil 272 Glare shield 214
Filter, see Microfilter 203 Glass sunroof, initialize the system 81
Fine wood, care 296 Glass sunroof, see Panoramic glass sun-
First-aid kit 285 roof 79
Fish, MINIMALISM display 241 Glove compartment 220
Flat tire, changing wheels 262 GPS geolocation, vehicle position 49
Flat tire, continued driving 158, 161 GPS, navigation, see Owner's Handbook for
Flat tire, Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Flat tire message, FTM 160 tion 6
Flat tire message, TPM 156 GREEN bonus range 238
Flat Tire Monitor TPM 160 GREEN Mode 236
Flat tire, repairing 257 GREEN - program, driving dynamics 177
Flat tire, warning light 156, 160 GREEN tip, driving tip 238
Flooding, driving through 232 Gross vehicle weight, approved 299
Floor carpet, care 296 Ground clearance 233
Floor mats, care 296
Fold-away position, windshield wip- H
ers 110, 113
Foot brake 232 Handbrake, electric, see Parking brake,
Forward Collision Warning with collision electric 104
mitigation 163 Handbrake, manual, see Parking brake,
For Your Own Safety 7 manual 104
Front airbags 151 Hand-held transmitter, alternating
Front-seat passenger airbags, automatic de- code 210
activation 153 Hands-free device, see Owner's Handbook
Front-seat passenger airbags, indicator for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
light 154 cation 6
Front seats 82 Hazard warning flashers 285
Fuel 244 Head airbag 152
Fuel cap 242 Headlight control, automatic 146
Fuel filler flap 242 Headlight flasher 107
Fuel filler flap, emergency unlocking 243 Headlight glass 281
Fuel gauge 130 Headlights, care 294
Fuel quality 244
308
Head restraints and seats 82 Individual air distribution 202, 206

Head restraints, front 87 Individual settings, see Driver profiles 71
Head restraints, rear 88 Inductive charging, smartphone, see Wire-
Head-up Display 141 less charging tray 216
Head-up Display, shift point indicator 144 Inflation pressure, tires 246
Head-up Display, sport displays 143 Inflation pressure warning TPM, tires 160
Head-up Display, standard view 142 Info Display 125
Heated steering wheel 91 Information 6
Heavy cargo, stowing 224 Initialization, Flat Tire Monitor FTM 160
Height, vehicle 298 Input, iDrive 36
High-beam Assistant 147 Instrument cluster 123
High beams 107 Instrument cluster, electronic dis-
High beams/low beams, see High-beam As- plays 125, 126
sistant 147 Instrument lighting 149
Hills 233 Integrated key 67
Hill start assistant, see Drive-off assis- Integrated Owner's Manual in the vehi-
tant 178 cle 60
Holder for beverages, see Cup holders 222 Integrated Universal Remote Control 209
HomeLink, see Integrated Universal Remote Intelligent emergency call 286
Control 209 Intelligent Safety 162
Homepage, see Internet 6 Intended use 8
Hood 269 Intensity, AUTO program 205
Horn 32 Interior equipment 209
Hot exhaust gas system 231 Interior lights 149
HUD Head-up Display 141 Interior lights during unlocking 63
Hydroplaning 232 Interior lights with the vehicle locked 64
Interior mirror 89
I Interior mirror, automatic dimming fea-
ture 91
iBrake - PostCrash 174 Interior mirror, compass 212
Ice warning, see External temperature Interior mirror, manually dimmable 90
warning 131 Interior motion sensor 76
Icy roads, see External temperature warn- Interval display, service notifications 133
ing 131 Interval mode 108, 111
Identification marks, tires 252 In the vicinity of the center console 34
Identification number, see Vehicle identifi- In the vicinity of the roofliner 35
cation number 13
Ignition off 98 J
Ignition on 98
Illuminated ring, central instrument clus- Jacking points for the vehicle jack 264
ter 140 Jam protection system, glass sunroof 81
Indicator and warning lights, see Check Jam protection system, windows 78
Control 126 Jump-starting 287
Indicator light, front-seat passenger air-
bags 154
Indicator light, see Check Control 126
309
K Low beams, automatic, see High-beam As-

sistant 147
Keyless Go, see Comfort Access 68 Low beams, operation 145
Key, see Integrated key 67 Lower back support, see Lumbar sup-
Key, see Vehicle key 62 port 83
Kickdown, Steptronic transmission 118 Luggage rack, see Roof-mounted luggage
Knee airbag 152 rack 233
Lumbar support 83
L M
Label on recommended tires 255
Lane departure warning 169 Maintenance 277
Lane threshold, warning 169 Maintenance recommendations, see Condi-
Language, set 48 tion Based Service CBS 277
Lashing eyes 225 Maintenance, service notifications 133
LATCH child restraint fixing system 95 Maintenance system, MINI 277
Launch Control 121 Make-up mirror 214
Leather care 295 Malfunction displays, see Check Con-
LED ring, central instrument cluster 140 trol 126
LEDs, light-emitting diodes 280 Manual air flow 202
Length, vehicle 298 Manual brake, electric, see Parking brake,
Letters and numbers, entering 37 electric 104
Light-alloy wheels, care 295 Manual brake, manual, see Parking brake,
Light-emitting diodes, LEDs 280 manual 104
Lighter 214 Manual control, air distribution 202, 206
Lighting 145 Manual control, air flow 205
Light replacement 280 Manual mode, transmission 119
Light replacement, rear 281 Manual operation, PDC Park Distance Con-
Lights 145 trol 190
Lights and bulbs 280 Manual operation, rearview camera 193
Light switch 145 Manual Speed Limiter 171
LIM button, see Manual Speed Limiter 171 Manual transmission 115
List, instrument cluster, see Selection Manufacturer of the MINI 7
lists 136 Map update, see Owner's Handbook for Nav-
List of all messages 50 igation, Entertainment, Communication 6
Load 225 Matt paint, care 295
Loading 224 Maximum cooling 204
Loading position 226 Maximum speed display, see Speed Limit
Loading the cargo area, see Stowing Info 134
cargo 224 Maximum speed, winter tires 256
Location, vehicle position 49 Measuring units 49
Locking, automatic 74 Mechanical key 67
Locking, from inside 68 Media of the Owner's Manual 60
Locking, settings 74 Medical supplies, see First-aid kit 285
Menu, instrument cluster, see Selection
lists 136
310
Menus, Central Information Display Neutral cleaner, see Light-alloy wheels,

(CID) 40 care 295
Messages 50 New wheels and tires 255
Messages, see Check Control 126 Notifications 50
Microfilter 203, 206
MID - program, driving dynamics 177 O
MINI Connected, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278
tion 6 OBD, see OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278
MINI driving modes 177 Obstacle marking, rearview camera 194
MINI logo projection during unlocking 63 Octane rating, see Recommended fuel
MINI maintenance system 277 grade 245
MINIMALISM analyzer 241 Odometer 131
MINIMALISM information 239 Oil 271
Minimum tread, tires 254 Oil, adding 272
MINI Roadside Assistance 285 Oil change 274
Mirrors 89 Oil filler neck 272
Mobile communication devices in the vehi- Oil service interval, service notifica-
cle 231 tions 133
Mobile phone, connecting 52 Oil types to add, engine 273
Mobile phone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Onboard literature, printed 60
gation, Entertainment and Communica- Onboard vehicle tool kit 279
tion 6 On-call service, see MINI Roadside Assis-
Mobile Service, see MINI Roadside Assis- tance 285
tance 285 Opening and closing 62
Mobility System 257 Opening, from inside 68
Modifications, technical, see For Your Own Operating concept Central Information Dis-
Safety 7 play (CID) operating concept 36
Moisture in headlight 281 Operating menus, Central Information Dis-
Monitor, see Control Display 38 play (CID) 36
Mounting of child restraint systems 93 Operation via the Controller 40
MP3 player, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- Operation via touchscreen 42
tion, Entertainment, Communication 6 Operation via voice 44
Multifunction steering wheel, buttons 32 Optional equipment, see Vehicle equip-
Multimedia, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- ment 7
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 Overwintering, see Long-term vehicle stor-
age 297
N Owner's Manual, printed 60
Navigation, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- P

tion, Entertainment and Communication 6
Neck restraints, front, see Head restraints Paint, car care 294
front 87 Pair device 52
Neck restraints, rear, see Head restraints Panic alarm, see Panic mode 76
rear 88 Panic mode 76
311
Panoramic glass sunroof 79 Rear lights 281

Parallel parking assistant 195 Rear seat backrests, folding down 226
Park Distance Control PDC 189 Rearview camera 192
Parked vehicle, condensation 233 Rear-view mirrors, exterior 89
Parking aid, see PDC 189 Rear window defroster 203, 206
Parking assistant 195 Rear window wiper, operation 109, 113
Parking brake, electric 104 Recirculated-air filter, see Microfilter/acti-
Parking brake, manual 104 vated-charcoal filter 206
Parking lights 145 Recirculated-air mode 202, 205
Parts and accessories 8 Recommended fuel grade 245
Passenger's side exterior mirror, tilt down, Recommended tire brands 255
see Automatic Curb Monitor 90 Refueling 242
Pathway lighting 146 Remaining range 132
Pathway lines, rearview camera 193 Remote control, universal 209
Payload, technical data 299 Remote services, app, see Owner's Hand-
PDC Park Distance Control 189 book for Navigation, Entertainment, Com-
Pedestrian Collision Warning with City Col- munication 6
lision Mitigation 167 Replacing parts 279
Performance Control 177 Replacing the battery, vehicle key 65
Personal data, deleting 51 Replacing, wheels and tires 255
Personal profile, see Driver profiles 71 Reporting safety malfunctions 14
Phone, connecting 52 RES CNCL button, camera-based cruise con-
Plastic, care 296 trol 179
PostCrash - iBrake 174 RES CNCL button, cruise control 186
Power failure 283 Reserve warning, see Range 132
Power windows 77 Reset, Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 156
Pressure, tires 246 Retreaded tires 256
Pre-ventilation 207 Roadside parking lights 146
Printed onboard literature 60 Rolling code hand-held transmitter 210
Profiles, see Driver profiles 71 RON recommended fuel grade 245
Programmable memory buttons, Central In- Roofliner 35
formation Display (CID) 43 Roof-mounted luggage rack 233
Protective function, glass sunroof, see Jam Route, navigation, see Owner's Handbook
protection system 81 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Protective function, windows, see Jam pro- cation 6
tection system 78 RTTI, see Owner's Handbook for Naviga-
Push-and-turn reel, see Controller 39 tion, Entertainment, Communication 6
Rubber components, care 295
R Run-flat tire 256
Racetrack operation 234 S

Radio-ready state 99
Radio, see Owner's Manual for Navigation, Safe braking 232
Entertainment and Communication 6 Safety belt reminder for driver's seat and
Rain sensor 108, 111 front passenger seat 86
Ratchet straps 225 Safety belt reminder for the rear seats 86
312
Safety belts 85 Software, updating 58

Safety belts, care 296 SOS button 286
Safety locks, doors, and windows 97 Sound output, see Owner's Handbook for
Safety switch, windows 79 Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
Safety systems, see Airbags 151 tion 6
Saving fuel 235 Spare tire, see Emergency wheel 265
Screen, see Control Display 38 Speech recognition 44
Screwdriver 279 Speed Limit Device, see Speed Limiter 171
Sealant, see Mobility System 257 Speed limit display, see Speed Limit
Seat heating, front 85 Info 134
Seating position for children 92 Speed Limiter 171
Seats and head restraints 82 Speed Limit Info 134
Seats, front 82 Speed Limit Info, trip computer 138
Securing, cargo 224 Speed limit, see Speed Limiter 171
Selection list in the instrument cluster 136 Speed, see Average speed 137
Sensors, care 296 Speed warning 140
Service and warranty 9 Split screen 38
Service Center, see MINI Roadside Assis- Sport displays 139
tance 285 Sport displays, Head-up Display 143
Service notifications, display 133 SPORT program, driving dynamics 178
Service notifications, see Condition Based Sport program, transmission 118
Service CBS 277 Stability control systems 175
Servotronic 178 Standard equipment, see Vehicle equip-
SET button, camera-based cruise con- ment 7
trol 179 Standard view, Head-up Display 142
SET button, cruise control 186 Stars, MINIMALISM display 241
Setting, Control Display 49 Start/stop, automatic function 101
Settings, general 48 Start/Stop button 98
Settings, locking/unlocking 74 Starting the engine 99
Settings, mirrors 89 Stations, AM/FM, see Owner's Handbook
Settings, seats and head restraints 82 for Navigation, Entertainment, Communi-
Shift paddles on the steering wheel 120 cation 6
Shift point indicator, Head-up Display 144 Status control display, tires 155
Side airbag 151 Status information, Central Information Dis-
Signaling, horn 32 play (CID) 37
Signals when unlocking 75 Status of Owner's Manual 7
Sitting safely 82 Status, vehicle 144
Slide/tilt glass roof 79 Steering assistance 178
Smallest turning circle, vehicle 298 Steering column adjustment 91
Smartphone, connecting 52 Steering wheel, adjusting 91
Smartphone, see Owner's Manual for Navi- Steering wheel, buttons 32
gation, Entertainment and Communica- Steptronic Sport transmission, see Step-
tion 6 tronic transmission 116
Socket, OBD Onboard Diagnosis 278 Steptronic Sport transmission with double
Sockets, electrical devices 215 clutch, see Steptronic transmission 116
Software update 58 Steptronic transmission 116
313
Steptronic transmission with double clutch, Time 48

see Steptronic transmission 116 Time of arrival 138
Stopping the engine 100 Tire brands, recommended 255
Storage compartments 220 Tire chains 261
Storage, tires 256 Tire damage 254
Storing the vehicle 297 Tire identification marks 252
Stowing, cargo 224 Tire inflation pressure 246
Suitable devices 53 Tire inflation pressure monitoring, see
Suitable mobile phones 53 TPM 160
Summer tires, tread 254 Tire inflation pressure monitor TPM 160
Sun visor 214 Tire pressure 246
Supplementary Owner's Manuals 60 Tire Pressure Monitor TPM 155
Supplementary text message 130 Tire repair kit, see Mobility System 257
Switches, see Dashboard 32 Tires 246
Switch for driving dynamics 177 Tires, changing 255
Symbols 6 Tire sealant, see Mobility System 257
Tires, run-flat 256
T Tire tread 254
Tone, see Owner's Manual for Navigation,
Tachometer 131 Entertainment and Communication 6
Tailgate 70 Tools 279
Tailgate via vehicle key 64 Touchscreen 42
Tail lights 281 Towing 289
Tank capacity 301 Tow-starting 289
Technical changes, see For Your Own TPM Flat Tire Monitor 160
Safety 7 TPM Tire Pressure Monitor 155
Technical data 298 Traction control 176
Telephone, see Owner's Manual for Naviga- TRACTION, see Dynamic Traction Control,
tion, Entertainment and Communication 6 DTC 176
Teleservices, see Owner's Handbook for Traffic bulletins, see Owner's Handbook for
Navigation, Entertainment, Communica- Navigation, Entertainment, Communica-
tion 6 tion 6
Temperature, air conditioner 201 Transmission lock, electronic unlock-
Temperature, automatic climate con- ing 120
trol 204 Transmission, manual transmission 115
Temperature display for external tempera- Transmission, see Steptronic transmis-
ture 131 sion 116
Temperature, engine 138 Transporting children safely 92
Terminal, starting aid 288 Travel computer 138
Text message, Check Control 130 Tread, tires 254
Theft alarm system, see Alarm system 75 Trip computer 136
Thigh support 84 Triple turn signal activation 106
Third-party provider, voice assistant 46 Trip odometer 131
Tilt alarm sensor 76 Trip recorder, see Trip odometer 131
Tilt down, passenger's side exterior mirror, Trunk, see Cargo area 224
see Automatic Curb Monitor 90 Turning circle, vehicle 298
314
Turning radius lines, rearview camera 193 Ventilation 206

Turn signal, indicator light 129 Ventilation, see Pre-ventilation 207
Turn signals, operation 106 Venting, see Ventilation 206
Turn signals, rear, bulb replacement 281 Vent, see Ventilation 206
VIN, see Vehicle identification number 13
U Voice assistant, third-party provider 46
Voice command response 44
Unintentional alarm, avoiding 77 Voice control 44
Units, see Measuring units 49 Voice control system 44
Universal remote control 209
Unlocking, automatic 75 W
Unlocking, settings 74
Updates made after the editorial deadline 7 Warning and indicator lights, see Check
Updating, software 58 Control 126
Upholstery care 295 Warning displays, see Check Control 126
Upper retaining strap, top tether 96 Warning messages, see Check Control 126
USB connection 55 Warning triangle 285
USB port, position in vehicle 216 Warranty 8
Used battery, disposing of 283 Washer fluid 114
Use, intended 8 Washer nozzles, windshield 109, 113
Using a smartphone via voice control 46 Washer system 107, 111
Washing the vehicle 293
V Washing, vehicle 293
Water on roads 232
Vanity mirror 214 Website 6
Vehicle battery 282 Weights 299
Vehicle breakdown, see Breakdown assis- Welcome lights 146
tance 285 Welcome lights during unlocking 63
Vehicle, breaking in 230 Wheel base, vehicle 298
Vehicle care 294 Wheels 246
Vehicle care products 294 Wheels, changing 255
Vehicle equipment 7 Width, vehicle 298
Vehicle identification number 13 Windows, powered 77
Vehicle jack 264 Windshield defroster 203, 206
Vehicle key, additional 65 Windshield washer fluid, see Washer
Vehicle key, loss 65 fluid 114
Vehicle key, malfunction 66 Windshield washer nozzles 109, 113
Vehicle key, opening/closing 62 Windshield wiper, see Wiper sys-
Vehicle key, replacing the battery 65 tem 107, 111
Vehicle key, see Vehicle key 62 Windshield wipers, fold-away posi-
Vehicle paint, care 294 tion 110, 113
Vehicle position, vehicle location 49 Winter storage, see Long-term vehicle stor-
Vehicle status 144 age 297
Vehicle storage 297 Winter tires, suitable tires 256
Vehicle washing 293 Winter tires, tread 254
Wiper blades, replacing 279
315
Wiper fluid, see Washer fluid 114

Wiper, see Washer/wiper system 107, 111
Wiper system 107, 111
Wireless charging, smartphone, see Wire-
less charging tray 216
Wireless charging tray for smart-
phones 216
Wood, care 296
Word match concept, navigation 37
Working in, engine compartment 269
Wrench 279
316
01405A2C1C9 ue
*BL5A2C1C900V*
California Proposition 65
Warning
For vehicles sold in California:

MINI MOTORER'S GUIDE APP.
Your customized information about the vehicle in an app.
Optimized for smartphones & tablets. Can be used offline.
01405A2C1C9 ue
*BL5A2C1C900V*

MINI Owners Manual F55 F56 SOP 3-2022

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

MINI Owners Manual F55 F56 SOP 3-2022

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

LINK:

CONTENT & A-Z

Navigation, Entertainment and Communication can be called up via the

© 2021 Bayerische Motoren Werke

Icon Meaning This also applies to safety-related functions

Icons on vehicle components Updates made after the editorial

Intended use If work is performed improperly, for in-

an in-vehicle transmitter and receiver unit Event Data Recorder EDR

Vehicle identification number

The engraved vehicle identification number

Right nameplate The vehicle identification number can be

The vehicle identification number can be

Windshield other information about motor vehicle

For Canadian customers

Reporting safety defects

Displays and control elements

On the driver's or front passenger's door In the vicinity of the steering

Locking the vehicle

1 Low beams, fog lights

Central Information Display (CID)

Buttons on the Controller

For 5-door models: Press once: calls up the main

Goes to destination input menu

If no other commands are available, operate

Terminating the voice control system

Set-up and use

Adjusting the head restraint

1. Fold the lever down.

Entering the rear Button Function

Changing the waveband/satellite

Navigation destination input

Pairing the mobile phone Using the telephone

– Bluetooth, WLAN, and Siri voice opera-

Switching on Bluetooth and CarPlay

Pairing the iPhone with CarPlay

Manual transmission: switching off

Start/stop engine Engage manual parking brake

Manual transmission: starting

Turn signal, high beams, headlight Canada: roadside parking light

To illuminate the vehicle on one side.

High beams, headlight flasher

Wiper system Rain sensor

Switching the wipers on/off and brief Activating/deactivating

To activate: press the lever up once from its

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.

Pull the lever.

Canada: wiper system Rain sensor

Switching the wipers on/off and brief Activating/deactivating

Press the button on the wiper lever.

Set interval or sensitivity of the rain

Switching off and brief wipe

Turn the thumbwheel on the wiper lever.

Cleaning the windshield

Press the lever down.

Climate control Button Function

Air distribution, manual.

Air conditioning. Defrosts and defogs the

Controls the air flow, Rear window defroster.

Automatic climate control

2. Turn the fuel cap counterclockwise.